Agilent E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter

User’s Manual

E1326-90009
Printed in USA
July 2004 E0704

*E1326-90009*

S1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Contents
HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual

Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Reader Comment Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Chapter 1. Getting Started with the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . 13

About This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Multimeter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Introduction to Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Multimeter Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Resetting the Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Making a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Chapter 2. Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

About This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Setting the Logical Address Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
VXIbus Interrupt Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
HP E1326B Internal Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Installing the HP E1411B in a Mainframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
The Reference Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Input Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Input Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Connecting Multiplexers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Wiring Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Measurement Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Carrier Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Additional Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Selecting VME RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Disabling Front-panel for Stand-alone Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Chapter 3. Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

About This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Using the Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Making a Single Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Making a Burst of Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Making an Externally Triggered Burst of Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual Contents 1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Making Multiple Burst Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Scanning a Channel List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Making Multiple Scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Making Multiple Paced Scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Making an Externally Triggered Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Scanning Switchbox Channels (E1326B/E1351A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Scanning Switchbox Channels (E1411B/E1460A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Multiple High-Speed Scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Maximizing Measurement Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Changing the Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Using a PC, C Language, and the HP 82335 HP-IB Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Maximizing Measurement Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Storing Readings in Shared Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Checking for Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Synchronizing the Multimeter with a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Additional Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Chapter 4. Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

About This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Using MEASure and CONFigure Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
How to Make Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Using MEASure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Using CONFigure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Data Formats and Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Reading Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Reading Destination Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
DC Voltage Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
RMS AC Voltage Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Resistance Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Temperature Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Specifying a Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Multimeter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Autorange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Aperture and Integration Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Autozero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Offset Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Triggering the Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
The Trigger Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
The Trigger Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
The Trigger Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
The Sample Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
The Sample Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
The Wait-For-Trigger State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Using a Single Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Aborting a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

2 Contents HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Saving Multimeter Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
How to Save and Recall a Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Chapter 5. HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Using This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Common Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
SCPI Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Linking Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
SCPI Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
ABORt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
CALibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
:LFRequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
:LFRequency? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
:ZERO:AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
:ZERO:AUTO? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
CONFigure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
:FRESistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
:RESistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
:TEMPerature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
:VOLTage:AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
:VOLTage[:DC] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
CONFigure? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
DIAGnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
:FETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
:FETS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
DISPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
:MONitor:CHANnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
:MONitor:CHANnel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
:MONitor[:STATe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
:MONitor[:STATe]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
FETCh? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
FORMat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
[:DATA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
FORMat? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
INITiate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
[:IMMediate] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
MEASure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
:FRESistance? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
:RESistance? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
:TEMPerature? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
:VOLTage:AC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
:VOLTage[:DC]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
MEMory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
:VME:ADDRess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
:VME:ADDRess? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
:VME:SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
:VME:SIZE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual Contents 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 :VME:STATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
:VME:STATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
OUTPut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
n
:TTLTrg [:STATe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
:TTLTrgn[:STATe]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
READ? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
SAMPle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
:COUNt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
:COUNt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
:SOURce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
:SOURce? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
:TIMer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
:TIMer? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
[SENSe:] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
FUNCtion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
FUNCtion? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
RESistance:APERture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
RESistance:APERture? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
RESistance:NPLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
RESistance:NPLC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
RESistance:OCOMpensated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
RESistance: OCOMpensated? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
RESistance:RANGe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
RESistance:RANGe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
RESistance:RANGe :AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
RESistance:RANGe:AUTO? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
RESistance:RESolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
RESistance:RESolution? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
VOLTage:AC:RANGe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
VOLTage:AC: RANGe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
VOLTage:APERture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
VOLTage:APERture? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
VOLTage[:DC]:RANGe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
VOLTage[:DC]:RANGe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
VOLTage:NPLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
VOLTage:NPLC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
VOLTage:RESolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
VOLTage:RESolution? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
SYSTem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
:CDEScription? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
:CTYPe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
:ERRor? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
TRIGger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
:COUNt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

4 Contents HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 :COUNt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
:DELay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
:DELay? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
:DELay:AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
:DELay:AUTO? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
[:IMMediate] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
:SOURce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
:SOURce? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
IEEE 488.2 Common Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Command Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Appendix A. HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Appendix B. HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Appendix C. HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming . . . . . . . 199

About This Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Register Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
The Base Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Register Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Accessing the Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
The WRITE Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
The Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
The Command and Parameter Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
The READ Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
The ID Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
The Device Type Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
The Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
The Query Response Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
The Data Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Program Timing and Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Resetting the Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Configuring the Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Retrieving Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Checking for Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Querying Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Using a Multiplexer with the Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Register Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
The Trigger System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Multimeter Triggering Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Control Register Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Resetting the Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Reading the ID Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual Contents 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Reading the Device Type Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Reading the Query Response Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Reading an Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Stand-Alone Multimeter Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Scanning Multimeter Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Useful Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Command and Parameter Opcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Register-Based Programming Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Multimeter Power-On Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Function and Aperture Change Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
VME Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Appendix D. Measurement Speed and Accuracy Tradeoffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

6 Contents HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Certification
Hewlett-Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory. Hewlett-
Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technol-
ogy (formerly National Bureau of Standards), to the extent allowed by that organization’s calibration facility, and to the calibration
facilities of other International Standards Organization members.

Warranty
This Hewlett-Packard product is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three years from date of ship-
ment. Duration and conditions of warranty for this product may be superseded when the product is integrated into (becomes a part of)
other HP products. During the warranty period, Hewlett-Packard Company will, at its option, either repair or replace products which
prove to be defective.
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Hewlett-Packard (HP). Buyer shall pre-
pay shipping charges to HP and HP shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping
charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to HP from another country.
HP warrants that its software and firmware designated by HP for use with a product will execute its programming instructions when
properly installed on that product. HP does not warrant that the operation of the product, or software, or firmware will be uninterrupted
or error free.
Limitation Of Warranty
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied prod-
ucts or interfacing, unauthorized modification or misuse, operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product, or im-
proper site preparation or maintenance.
The design and implementation of any circuit on this product is the sole responsibility of the Buyer. HP does not warrant the Buyer’s
circuitry or malfunctions of HP products that result from the Buyer’s circuitry. In addition, HP does not warrant any damage that oc-
curs as a result of the Buyer’s circuit or any defects that result from Buyer-supplied products.
NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exclusive Remedies
THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. HP SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CON-
TRACT, TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.

Notice
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. HEWLETT-PACKARD (HP) MAKES NO WAR-
RANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WAR-
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. HP shall not be liable for errors contained
herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance or use of this material. This docu-
ment contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be photo-
copied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard Company. HP assumes no
responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by HP.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights

The Software and Documentation have been developed entirely at private expense. They are delivered and licensed as "commercial
computer software" as defined in DFARS 252.227-7013 (October 1988), DFARS 252.211.7015 (May 1991) or DFARS 252.227-7014
(June 1995), as a "commercial item" as defined in FAR 2.101(a), or as "Restricted computer software" as defined in FAR 52.227-19
(June 1987) (or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause), whichever is applicable. You have only those rights provided for
such Software and Documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the HP standard software agreement for the product involved.

E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2-Digit Multimeter User’s Manual

E1326-90009
Copyright © 2004 Agilent Technologies, All Rights Reserved.

HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2-Digit Multimeter User’s Manual 7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Documentation History
All Editions and Updates of this manual and their creation date are listed below. The first Edition of the manual is Edition 1. The Edi-
tion number increments by 1 whenever the manual is revised. Updates, which are issued between Editions, contain replacement pages
to correct or add additional information to the current Edition of the manual. Whenever a new Edition is created, it will contain all of
the Update information for the previous Edition. Each new Edition or Update also includes a revised copy of this documentation his-
tory page.
Edition 1, August 2004;

Safety Symbols
Instruction manual symbol affixed to prod-
uct. Indicates that the user must refer to the Alternating current (AC).
manual for specific WARNING or CAU-
TION information to avoid personal injury
or damage to the product. Direct current (DC).

Indicates hazardous voltages.

Indicates the field wiring terminal that must
be connected to earth ground before operat-
ing the equipment—protects against electri- Calls attention to a procedure, practice, or
cal shock in case of fault. WARNING condition that could cause bodily injury or
death.
Calls attention to a procedure, practice, or con-
Frame or chassis ground terminal—typi- CAUTION dition that could possibly cause damage to
or
cally connects to the equipment’s metal equipment or permanent loss of data.
frame.

WARNINGS
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of this product.
Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,
manufacture, and intended use of the product. Hewlett-Packard Company assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to
comply with these requirements.
Ground the equipment: For Safety Class 1 equipment (equipment having a protective earth terminal), an uninterruptible safety earth
ground must be provided from the mains power source to the product input wiring terminals or supplied power cable.
DO NOT operate the product in an explosive atmosphere or in the presence of flammable gases or fumes.
For continued protection against fire, replace the line fuse(s) only with fuse(s) of the same voltage and current rating and type.
DO NOT use repaired fuses or short-circuited fuse holders.
Keep away from live circuits: Operating personnel must not remove equipment covers or shields. Procedures involving the removal
of covers or shields are for use by service-trained personnel only. Under certain conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the
equipment switched off. To avoid dangerous electrical shock, DO NOT perform procedures involving cover or shield removal unless
you are qualified to do so.
DO NOT operate damaged equipment: Whenever it is possible that the safety protection features built into this product have been im-
paired, either through physical damage, excessive moisture, or any other reason, REMOVE POWER and do not use the product until
safe operation can be verified by service-trained personnel. If necessary, return the product to a Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Of-
fice for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained.
DO NOT service or adjust alone: Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person, capable of rendering first aid
and resuscitation, is present.
DO NOT substitute parts or modify equipment: Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute
parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the product. Return the product to a Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office for
service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained.

8 HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2-Digit Multimeter User’s Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
SA According to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and CEN/CENELEC EN 45014

Manufacturer’s Name: Agilent Technologies, Incorporated

Manufacturer’s Address: Measurement Product Generation Unit
th
815 14 ST. S.W.
Loveland, CO 80537 USA

Declares, that the product

Product Name: B-Size VXI 5 ½ Digital Multimeter

Model Number: E1326B
Product Options: This declaration covers all options of the above product(s).

Conforms with the following European Directives:

The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
and carries the CE Marking accordingly

Conforms with the following product standards:

EMC Standard Limit

IEC 61326-1:1997+A1:1998 / EN 61326-1:1997+A1:1998
CISPR 11:1997 +A1:1997 / EN 55011:1998 Group 1 Class A [1]
IEC 61000-4-2:1995+A1:1998 / EN 61000-4-2:1995 4kV CD, 8kV AD
IEC 61000-4-3:1995 / EN 61000-4-3:1995 3 V/m, 80-1000 MHz
IEC 61000-4-4:1995 / EN 61000-4-4:1995 0.5kV signal lines, 1kV power lines
IEC 61000-4-5:1995 / EN 61000-4-5:1995 0.5 kV line-line, 1 kV line-ground
IEC 61000-4-6:1996 / EN 61000-4-6:1996 3V, 0.15-80 MHz
IEC 61000-4-11:1994 / EN 61000-4-11:1994 I cycle, 100%

Canada: ICES-001:1998
Australia/New Zealand: AS/NZS 2064.1

Safety IEC 61010-1:1990+A1:1992+A2:1995 / EN 61010-1:1993+A2:1995

Canada: CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1:1992
UL 3111-1:1994

Supplemental Information:
[1]
The product was tested in a typical configuration with Agilent Technologies test systems.

September 5, 2000
Date Name
Quality Manager
Title

For further information, please contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office, agent or distributor.
Authorized EU-representative: Agilent Technologies Deutschland GmbH, Herrenberger Straβe 130, D 71034 Böblingen, Germany

Revision: A.03 Issue Date: 09/05/00

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
SA According to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and CEN/CENELEC EN 45014

Manufacturer’s Name: Agilent Technologies, Incorporated

Manufacturer’s Address: Measurement Product Generation Unit
th
815 14 ST. S.W.
Loveland, CO 80537 USA

Declares, that the product

Product Name: 5 ½ Digit Multimeter

Model Number: E1411B
Product Options: This declaration covers all options of the above product(s).

Conforms with the following European Directives:

The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
and carries the CE Marking accordingly

Conforms with the following product standards:

EMC Standard Limit

IEC 61326-1:1997+A1:1998 / EN 61326-1:1997+A1:1998
CISPR 11:1997 +A1:1997 / EN 55011:1998 Group 1 Class A [1]
IEC 61000-4-2:1995+A1:1998 / EN 61000-4-2:1995 4kV CD, 8kV AD
IEC 61000-4-3:1995 / EN 61000-4-3:1995 3 V/m, 80-1000 MHz
IEC 61000-4-4:1995 / EN 61000-4-4:1995 0.5kV signal lines, 1kV power lines
IEC 61000-4-5:1995 / EN 61000-4-5:1995 0.5 kV line-line, 1 kV line-ground
IEC 61000-4-6:1996 / EN 61000-4-6:1996 3V, 0.15-80 MHz
IEC 61000-4-11:1994 / EN 61000-4-11:1994 I cycle, 100%

Canada: ICES-001:1998
Australia/New Zealand: AS/NZS 2064.1

Safety IEC 61010-1:1990+A1:1992+A2:1995 / EN 61010-1:1993+A2:1995

Canada: CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1:1992
UL 3111-1:1994

Supplemental Information:
[1]
The product was tested in a typical configuration with Agilent Technologies test systems.

September 5, 2000
Date Name
Quality Manager
Title

For further information, please contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office, agent or distributor.
Authorized EU-representative: Agilent Technologies Deutschland GmbH, Herrenberger Straβe 130, D 71034 Böblingen, Germany

Revision: A.03 Issue Date: 09/05/00

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 1
Getting Started with the HP E1326B/E1411B
Multimeter

About This Chapter

This chapter introduces you the B-size HP E1326B and C-size HP E1411B
51⁄2 - Digit Multimeters. The main sections of the chapter are:

• Multimeter Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 13

• Introduction to Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 16

Note This manual is to be used with the HP E1326B or HP E1411B installed in

the HP 75000 Series B or Series C mainframe, and when the multimeter is
programmed using Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments
(SCPI) language or when it is programmed at the register level.

Multimeter Overview
The HP E1326B/E1411B multimeter is a register-based VXI instrument.
There are two different methods of programming the multimeter based on
the system configuration that it is used in.

If the HP E1326B is used in an HP E1300/E1301/E1302 B-size VXI

mainframe, or if the HP E1326B/E1411B is used in a C-size VXI
mainframe with an HP E1405/E1406 Command Module or with a computer
which has HP Compiled SCPI software, then it may be programmed using
SCPI language. This is the method described in Chapters 1 through 5.

If the HP E1326B is in a VME mainframe or the E1326B/E1411B is in a

C-size VXI mainframe and no HP Command Module or computer with
Compiled SCPI is present, then the multimeter must be programmed at the
register level. Appendix C covers register level programming.

The HP SCPI driver provides an error queue, input and output buffers,
status registers, and is allocated a portion of mainframe memory for reading
storage. This "instrument" may consist of the multimeter, or it can also
include multiplexers such as the HP E1345A/46A/47A/51A/53A and the
HP E1460A/76A. The instrument is operated from the mainframe front
panel or from a computer using the SCPI language.

Instruments are based on the logical addresses of the plug-in modules. The
HP VXIbus Systems Installation and Getting Started Guide explains how to

Chapter 1 Getting Started with the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 set the addresses in order to create an instrument. The guide should be your
starting point toward using the multimeter. The functions and features of
the multimeter are presented in the following functional, electrical, and
physical descriptions.

Functional The 51⁄2 - digit multimeter can be used stand-alone, or combined with
Description multiplexers (for example, HP E1345A/46A/47A/51A/52A/55A/56A/
57A/58A or HP E1460A/76A) to form a scanning multimeter.

In stand-alone operation, input signals are connected to the multimeter’s

external (faceplate) terminals. In scanning operation, input signals are
connected to the multiplexer channels. The multimeter is linked to relay
multiplexer(s) via an analog bus cable. The multimeter is linked to FET
multiplexers via an analog cable and a digital bus cable.

Measurement The multimeter’s measurement functions are shown below. These functions
Functions are typical of those required for many data acquisition and computer aided
test applications.
– DC Voltage
– RMS AC voltage
– 2-Wire Resistance (scanning multimeter only)
– 4-Wire Resistance
– Temperature (thermistors, RTDs, thermocouples)

Configuring the With MEASure or CONFigure, the multimeter is configured for

Multimeter measurements using a single command. When necessary, low-level
commands are available to set configurations for unique applications. Such
commands, for example, allow you to enable autozero or offset
compensation, or change various analog-to-digital (A/D) converter
parameters.

Triggering the The multimeter’s trigger system allows it to be internally or externally

Multimeter triggered. The system enables you to scan a multiplexer channel list
multiple times, or in the stand-alone configuration, take multiple readings
per trigger. An on-board timer allows you to pace measurements.

Reading Storage Readings are returned directly to the multimeter’s output buffer or are
stored in mainframe memory. The total number of readings which can be
stored (all multimeters combined) depends on the amount of memory
available. Each reading stored will consume four bytes of memory.

Saving Configurations To minimize repeated programming, up to 10 stand-alone multimeter

configurations can be saved and recalled. The configurations remain in
memory until a new configuration is saved or until power is cycled.

Electrical The electrical performance of the multimeter is summarized in Table 1-1.

Description Refer to Appendix A for a complete table of specifications.

14 Getting Started with the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table 1-1. HP E1326B/E1411B Operating Characteristics

DC Voltage

Ranges 0.125V, 1.0V, 8.0V, 64.0V, 300V full scale.

Resolution 120nV on 0.125V range with 20/16.7 msec aperture time.
Accuracy (90 days) 0.01%
Max Rdgs/sec 13,150

AC RMS Voltage

Ranges 0.0875V, 0.7V, 5.6V, 44.8V, 300V full scale.

Resolution 29.8nV on 0.0875V range with 320/267 msec aperture time.
Accuracy (90 days) 0.625%
Frequency Range 20 Hz to 10 kHz

2-Wire and 4-Wire Resistance

Ranges 256Ω, 2048Ω, 16384Ω, 131072Ω, 1048576Ω full scale.

Resolution 250mΩ on 256Ω range with 20/16.7 msec aperture time.
Accuracy (90 days) 0.025%

Physical The 51⁄2 - digit multimeter occupies one B-Size or one C-Size mainframe
Description slot. However, the faceplate of the B-size multimeter covers up an
additional slot in the B-Size mainframe. This prevents another B-size card
from being installed in the slot directly above the multimeter. An internal
installation kit, discussed in Chapter 2, enables you to install the multimeter
internal to the HP 75000 Series B mainframe. This saves two externally
accessed slots.

Input Terminals There are four input terminals on the faceplate of the multimeter
(see Figure 2-7 on page 29). The terminals, which are isolated from chassis
ground, are used to connect input signals when the multimeter is used
stand-alone.

A high-to-low TTL pulse applied to the External Trigger port externally

triggers the multimeter. The Analog Bus and Digital Bus ports allow relay
and FET multiplexers to be connected to the multimeter.

Chapter 1 Getting Started with the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Introduction to Operation
This section contains information on checking communication between the
multimeter, mainframe, and computer. It includes information on returning
the multimeter to a known operating state should programming errors occur
or if you simply want to start over. It also shows how to send a command to
configure the multimeter and make a measurement.

Note The HP E1411B has a "Failed" annunciator and an "Access" annunciator on

the faceplate. The "Failed" annunciator turns on if the multimeter does not
properly respond during the mainframe’s power-on sequence. If this
occurs, return the multimeter to Hewlett-Packard for service. The "Access"
annunciator turns on each time the multimeter receives a command.

Multimeter Self-Test Once the mainframe completes its power-on sequence, the multimeter is
ready for use. Sending the self-test command is an easy way to verify that
you are properly addressing the multimeter. Also, the self-test is useful in
locating intermittent problems that might occur during operation. The
command used to execute the self-test is:
*TST?

You can also run the self-test by selecting “TEST” from the multimeter’s
front panel menu on the HP E1301A mainframe. Upon execution, the
self-test resets the multimeter, performs the test, and returns one of the
codes listed in Table 1-2.

The following program executes the self-test. The program assumes the
mainframe (command module for C-size systems) is at primary HP-IB
address of 09 and the multimeter is at secondary address 03. The program
also assumes an HP 9000 Series 200/300 computer is used.
10 !Send the self-test command to the multimeter.
20 OUTPUT 70903;"*TST?"
30 !Enter and display the self-test code.
40 ENTER 70903;A
50 PRINT A
60 !Reset the multimeter.
70 OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"
80 END

After the test passes, always reset the multimeter to return it to a known state.

16 Getting Started with the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table 1-2. HP E1326/E1411 Self-Test Codes

Self-Test
Code Description

0 Test passed.

1 Multimeter does not respond to the self-test.

2 Invalid communication between the multimeter’s two on-board processors.

3 Data line test between the multimeter and the mainframe command module failed.

4 Invalid communication between the multimeter and mainframe command module.

If self-test code 1, 2, 3, or 4 occurs, return the multimeter to Hewlett-Packard for repair.

Note If the multimeter did not respond to the self-test, the address you specified
may be incorrect. Refer to Chapter 2 in this manual and the HP VXIbus
Systems Installation and Getting Started Guide.

Resetting the During operation, programming errors and other conditions may occur
Multimeter making it necessary to reset the multimeter. This section shows you how to
reset and clear the multimeter, and read its error queue.

The multimeter is reset with the command:

*RST

which can be sent from an HP 9000 Series 200/300 computer as:

OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"

The multimeter can also be reset by pressing the green “Reset Instr” key on
the HP E1301A mainframe front panel. Note that the multimeter must first
be selected from the mainframe menu.

When resetting the multimeter:

• A front panel reset (“Reset Instr” key on the HP E1301A mainframe)

returns the multimeter to the idle state from the busy state and sets the
multimeter’s power-on configuration (Table 1-3). A front panel reset is
equivalent to clearing the multimeter followed by a reset.

• A reset from the computer (*RST) returns the multimeter to the idle
state from the busy state if the multimeter is busy due to a command
entered from the front panel. If the multimeter is busy due to a
command sent from the computer, you must clear the multimeter
before sending the reset. The reset sets the multimeter’s power-on
configuration.

Chapter 1 Getting Started with the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table 1-3. HP E1326/E1411 Power-on Settings

Parameter Setting

FUNCtion VOLT:DC

VOLTage:RANGe 8V

RESistance:RANGe 16384Ω

VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO ON

RESistance:RANGe:AUTO ON

VOLTage:RESolution 7.629 µV

RESistance:RESolution 15.6 mΩ

VOLTage:APERture 16.7 ms or 20 ms (based on line frequency)

RESistance:APERture 16.7 ms or 20 ms (based on line frequency)

CALibration:LFRequency Unchanged (factory setting = 60 Hz)

VOLTage:NPLC 1

RESistance:NPLC 1

RESistance:OCOMpensated OFF

CALibration:ZERO:AUTO ON

TRIGger:COUNt 1

TRIGger:DELay:AUTO ON

TRIGger:SOURce IMM

SAMPle:COUNt 1

SAMPle:SOURce IMM

18 Getting Started with the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Clearing the Multimeter When the multimeter is selected from the HP E1301A mainframe menu, the
multimeter is cleared by pressing the “Clear Instr” key on the front panel.
The multimeter is also cleared by sending the following command from an
HP 9000 Series 200 or Series 300 controller:
CLEAR 70903

Clearing the multimeter:

– allows you to regain control without cycling power and without
setting the power-on configuration.
– with the HP E1301A “Clear Instr” key terminates any
command entered from the front panel. A command sent from
the computer will still continue to execute.
– from the computer (CLEAR 70903) terminates any command
sent from the computer. A command entered from the
HP E1301A front panel will still continue to execute.
– erases any pending commands. For example, if commands are
sent from the computer to the multimeter while the multimeter is
waiting for an external trigger, the commands are buffered until
they can execute after the trigger is received. Clearing the
multimeter (from the computer) erases those commands.
Similarly, clearing the multimeter from the HP E1301A front
panel erases any pending front panel commands.
– if cleared from the HP E1301A front panel, the display buffer is
cleared. If cleared over HP-IB, the data in the output buffer is
erased.

The Error Queue When an error occurs during operation, an error code and corresponding
message are stored in the multimeter’s error queue. If the Series B
mainframe has a display (HP E1301A) and the multimeter is being
monitored, the "err" annunciator will turn on.

Since many mainframes may not have a front panel display, the other way
to determine if an error has occurred is to read the error queue. This is done
with the command:
SYSTem:ERR?

The following program shows how the command is used to read and clear
the error queue.
10 !Declare a string variable in the computer to store the error message.
20 DIM Message$[256]
30 !Read the error queue until no errors remain.
40 !Print the error codes and messages.
50 REPEAT
60 OUTPUT 70903;"SYST:ERR?"
70 ENTER 70903;Code,Message$
80 PRINT Code,Message$
90 UNTIL Code=0
100 END

Chapter 1 Getting Started with the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The error queue can store up to 30 error messages which are retrieved in a
first in, first out (FIFO) manner. When there are no error messages in the
queue, a code of 0 and the message "No Error" are returned. Errors
generated during front panel operation are displayed but are not stored in
the error queue.

Note Appendix B contains a list of error messages associated with the multimeter
and their causes.

Making a The HP E1326B/E1411B multimeter can be configured and make

Measurement measurements using the MEASure command. The following examples
show how it is used with the stand-alone and scanning multimeters.

Example: Making a This example uses the MEASure command to make a DC voltage
Measurement measurement on the terminals connected to the multimeter’s faceplate.
(Stand-Alone The reading is then entered into the computer and displayed.
Multimeter) 10 OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:VOLT:DC?"
20 ENTER 70903;Rdg
30 PRINT Rdg
40 END

Example: Making a This example uses the MEASure command to scan a list of multiplexer
Measurement channels and make a DC voltage measurement on each channel. The
(Scanning Multimeter) readings are then entered into the computer and displayed.
10 DIM Rdgs(1:5)
20 OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:VOLT:DC? (@100:104)"
30 ENTER 70903;Rdgs(*)
40 PRINT Rdgs(*)
50 END

20 Getting Started with the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 2
Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B
Multimeter

About This Chapter

This chapter contains information on connecting input signals to the
multimeter using multiplexers and using the terminals on the multimeter’s
faceplate. The main sections of the chapter are:

• Installation Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 21

• Input Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28
• Connecting Input Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32
• Carrier Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 37
• Additional Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 39

WARNING SHOCK HAZARD. Only service-trained personnel who are

aware of the hazards involved should install or configure the
multimeter. Remove all sources of power to the multimeter and
mainframe before removing the multimeter.

The maximum allowable input on the multimeter terminals is

300 V dc (450 V ac peak). Since the terminals are isolated from
the multimeter chassis, the potential between the terminals and
the chassis is equal to the value of the input signal.

Installation Overview
As mentioned in the HP VXIbus Systems Installation and Getting Started
Guide, each plug-in module has a row of switches which set the module’s
logical address. Based on this address, the system instrument within the
HP 75000 Series B mainframe and HP E1406A command module combines
the modules into virtual instruments. The instruments are programmed by a
computer using SCPI language or from a computer by writing commands
directly to the multimeter registers (see Appendix C).

This section shows the location of the multimeter’s logical address switch
and shows how it is set. It also mentions considerations when installing the
multimeter in the mainframe.

Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Setting the Logical Figure 2-1 shows the location and settings of the multimeter’s logical
Address Switch address switch.

The switch has a factory setting of 24 which is equivalent to a secondary

HP-IB address of 03. If you have more than one multimeter, you must change
the logical address to some other multiple of 8 (for example, 32, 40, 48...), as
there can only be one instrument per secondary address.

Figure 2-1. HP E1326/1411 Logical Address Switch Settings

22 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Forming a Scanning If multiplexers are used to form a scanning multimeter, they must be
Multimeter assigned successive logical addresses beginning with the address
immediately following that of the multimeter. An example is shown in
Figure 2-2.

The scanning multimeter can consist of relay multiplexers, FET

multiplexers, or a combination of both. See “Connecting Multiplexers” on
page 30 for information on physically connecting the multiplexers to the
multimeter.

Figure 2-2. Setting Successive Logical Addresses to Form

an Instrument

Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 VXIbus Interrupt The multimeter sends interrupts to, and receives acknowledgements from
Lines the slot 0 module via the VXIbus backplane interrupt lines. Since the
multimeter is a nonprogrammable interrupter, the interrupt line is selected
with the multimeter’s IRQ jumper.

There are seven backplane interrupt lines. At the factory, the IRQ jumper is
set to line 1. The system instrument in the Series B mainframe is assigned
to each line, and the system instrument in the HP E1406A command module
is assigned to line 1 by default. Therefore, in Series B systems it is not
necessary to change the IRQ jumper setting. If the command module in
Series C systems is assigned another line and the multimeter is to use that
line, the IRQ jumper must be set accordingly. Figure 2-3 shows the location
of the jumpers used to select an interrupt line. For most applications where
the multimeter is installed in an HP 75000 Series B or Series C mainframe,
the jumpers do not have to be moved.

Note IRQ OFF is set when the multimeter is installed in systems without a Series B
mainframe or HP E1406A command module.

Interrupt Priority In the HP 75000 Series B and Series C mainframes, the VXIbus interrupt
lines have the same priority; therefore, interrupt priority is established by
installing modules in slots numerically closest to the slot 0 module. Thus,
slot 1 (internal on the Series B mainframe) has a higher priority than slot 2
(also internal), slot 2 has a higher priority than slot 3, and so on.

HP E1326B HP E1411B

Interrupt
Jumper
Location

Interrupt
Jumper
Location

Figure 2-3. Interrupt Jumper Locations

24 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 HP E1326B Internal When the HP E1326B is installed in an HP E1300A/E1301A/E1302A
Installation mainframe, it occupies one slot. However, the faceplate to which the input
terminals are connected covers up an additional slot. This prevents another
module from being installed in the slot directly above the multimeter.

To make the two slots available to other modules, the HP E1326B can be
installed internal to the mainframe (in slot 2) using an internal installation
kit (HP P/N E1326-80004).

Multimeter installation into the external slots is covered in the Installation

and Getting Started Guide. Instructions for installing the multimeter
internally are included in the installation kit.

Connecting the If the HP E1326B multimeter is installed internal to the HP E1300A/E1301A

HP E1326B Adapter mainframe, the HP E1326-80005 adapter can be used to provide HI, LO,
COM, and HI banana plug terminals for the multimeter. When the adapter
is connected as shown in Figure 2-4, the terminals, rather than the
multiplexer, are the input to the multimeter.

Figure 2-4. Connecting the HP E1326B Adapter

Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installing the The HP E1411B multimeter can be installed in any slot (except slot 0) in a
HP E1411B in a C-size VXIbus mainframe. Refer to Figure 2-5 to install the E1411B in a
mainframe.
Mainframe
Set the extraction levers out.

Slide the multimeter into any slot

(except slot 0) until the backplane
connectors touch.

Seat the multimeter into

the mainframe by pushing
in the extraction levers.

Tighten the top and bottom screws

to secure the multimeter to the
mainframe.

To remove the multimeter from the mainframe,

reverse the procedure.

Figure 2-5. Installing the HP E1411B Multimeter in a VXIbus Mainframe

26 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Reference In many data acquisition applications, DC voltage and resistance
Frequency measurements are often made in the presence of normal mode noise. This
type of noise emanates from the surrounding environment, primarily from
50 Hz and 60 Hz power lines. The HP E1326B/E1411B multimeter is able
to reject normal mode noise by using an integrating analog-to-digital (A/D)
converter. The integration process averages out the power line related noise
over an integer number of power line cycles (PLCs) during the A/D
conversion. The multimeter’s ability to reject noise at the power line
frequency is expressed in terms of normal mode rejection (NMR).

Setting the Reference In certain applications, the multimeter’s power line frequency may be
Frequency different from the line frequency of the device being measured. Assume,
for example, the multimeter has a power line frequency of 60 Hz and the
device being measured has a line frequency of 400 Hz. Normal mode
rejection can be achieved by setting the reference frequency to 50 Hz.
This is done with the command:
CALibration:LFRequency frequency | MIN | MAX
frequency is power line frequency. Settings are 50 or 60.
MIN sets the minimum power line frequency (50 Hz).
MAX sets the maximum power line frequency (60 Hz).

The reference frequency is set to 60 Hz at the factory. The setting is stored

in non-volatile memory and is changed only when CALibration:LFRequency
is executed.

Querying the The reference frequency is queried with the following commands.
Reference Frequency See Chapter 5 for additional information about these commands.
CALibration:LFRequency?
CALibration:LFrequency? MIN | MAX

Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Input Characteristics
The multimeter is a floating, balanced differential multimeter. Floating means
the multimeter’s input terminals are isolated from its chassis. A balanced
differential multimeter is one where the input impedance between HI and COM
is the same as the impedance between LO and COM (see Figure 2-6). The
only difference between the HI and LO terminals is the polarity.

Figure 2-6. A Floating, Balanced Differential Multimeter

28 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Input Terminals The multimeter input terminals are shown in Figure 2-7. The maximum
input on the HI and LO terminals is 300 V dc (450 V ac peak). The
maximum amount of common mode voltage developed between LO and
COM and HI (current) and COM cannot exceed 15 V peak.

CAUTION A maximum voltage of 300 V dc (450 V ac peak) is allowed on

the multimeter’s rear terminals. Multiplexers connected to the
multimeter reduce the voltage that can be applied between the
multiplexer’s High (H), Low (L), and Guard terminals, to the
level specified for the multiplexer. For example,

HP E1343A/44A 250 V dc or 354 V ac peak

HP E1345A/47A 120 V dc or 170 V ac peak
HP E1351A 14 V dc or ac peak

Mixing of multiplexer types reduces all voltage ratings to that of

the lowest rated multiplexer. For example, if an HP E1343A and
E1351A are connected to the same multimeter, then the system
rating is that of the E1351A, which is 14 V.

Figure 2-7. HP E1326B/E1411B Input Terminals

Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connecting In a scanning multimeter configuration, the multimeter is connected to the
Multiplexers multiplexers with an analog bus cable, or with the analog bus cable and a
digital bus cable. The cable(s) used is determined as follows:

1. If the scanning multimeter uses relay multiplexers only, the analog

bus cable is used.

2. If the scanning multimeter uses FET multiplexers only, the analog

bus cable and the digital bus cable are used.

3. If the scanning multimeter uses a combination of relay and FET

multiplexers, only the analog bus cable is used.

Figure 2-8 shows how the analog and digital bus cables are connected.

Figure 2-8. Connecting the Analog and Digital Bus Cables

30 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Analog Bus The analog bus coming from the multiplexer consists of six lines. On the
Connections at the multiplexer terminal block these lines are labeled:
Multimeter H L G I+ I- IG

Where the ribbon cable connects the multiplexer to the multimeter the lines
are labeled:
H L G H L G

The lines are then connected to the multimeter’s HI LO COM HI lines as

shown in Figure 2-9.

Figure 2-9. Analog Bus Connections

Digital Bus Overview The digital bus cable coordinates the operation (handshaking) between the
multimeter and FET multiplexers without involvement from the system
instrument. This enables the multimeter to scan the FET channels at a rate
of approximately 13,150 channels/sec.

The digital bus consists of a Voltmeter Complete line, an (external) Trigger

line, and ground. The handshake sequence is described in the following
steps and in Figure 2-10.

1. When a FET channel is closed, a "channel closed" signal is sent over

the Trigger line. This triggers the multimeter which, in turn, makes a
measurement.

2. When the measurement is finished, a "voltmeter complete" signal is

sent from the multimeter to the multiplexer on the Voltmeter
Complete line. This signal advances the scan to the next channel in
the list. When the channel is closed, the channel closed signal
triggers the multimeter and the process repeats.

Figure 2-10. Digital Bus Overview

Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connecting Input Signals
This section contains guidelines on connecting input signals to the
multimeter and shows the connections required to make the following
measurements:

• DC and AC RMS Voltage

• 2-Wire Resistance (including thermistors and RTDs)
• 4-Wire Resistance (including thermistors and RTDs)
• Thermocouples

Note Refer to the HP E1355A - E1358A Strain Gage Multiplexers User’s Manual
for information on connecting strain gages.

Wiring To ensure accurate measurements, input signals should be connected to the

Considerations multimeter (via its rear terminals or a multiplexer) using a shielded
twisted-pair cable. Twisted-pair cables reduce magnetic (inductive) noise in
the measurement circuit. The shield reduces electrical (capacitive) noise.

Connecting the To prevent the HI and LO terminals from floating from the COM terminal
COM Lead and causing erratic overload readings, the COM terminal must be connected
to the signal source. If a shielded cable is used, connect one end of the
cable shield to the LO lead at the signal source, and connect the other end of
the cable shield to the COM (or guard) terminal. If a shielded cable is not
used, connect a COM (guard) lead with the LO lead AT THE SIGNAL
SOURCE. These connections (Figure 2-11), apply to measurement using
the rear terminals or multiplexers.

WARNING The HI, LO, COM, HI terminals on the multimeter faceplate are
internally connected to the analog bus port. Thus, signals on
the analog bus (from a multiplexer) appear on the faceplate
terminals and vice versa.

Figure 2-11. Connecting the COM Lead

32 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Measurement
Connections

E1345A/47A/51A/53A

E1346A E1352A

E1460A

Figure 2-12. Connections for DC and AC Voltage Measurements

Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 E1345A/47A/51A/53A

E1460A E1346A E1352A

Figure 2-13. Connections for 2-Wire Resistance Measurements

(Including Thermistors and RTDs)

Note 2-wire resistance measurements require the multiplexer modules shown

above. Resistance measurements using the multimeter terminals or directly
through the analog bus must be configured as 4-wire measurements.

34 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 E1460A
E1345A/47A/51A/53A
NOTE: Channel Pairs are banks 0/4, 1/5, 2/6, and 3/7.
See Chapter 2 of the HP E1460A User’s Manual.

Figure 2-14. Connections for 4-Wire Resistance Measurements

(Including Thermistors and RTDs)

Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 E1344A/47A/53A E1476A

Figure 2-15. Connections for Thermocouples

36 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Carrier Cable Assemblies
The following table and figures show the cables used to connect relay and
FET multiplexers to the HP E1411B multimeter. These cables are required
when the (B-Size) multiplexers are installed in the Series C mainframe
using the HP E1403B A/B-to-C-size module adapter.

Table 2-1. Cable Assemblies

Configuration 1: HP E1345A/46A/47A/55A or 56A (relay multiplexer) in HP E1403B module adapter.
Configuration 2: HP E1351A/52A/53A/57A or 58A (FET multiplexer) in HP E1403B module adapter.

Cable assemblies for HP E1411B multimeter-to-multiplexer connections

Configuration 1 Configuration 2

Connecting the HP E1411B to: E1326-61611 (analog bus) E1326-61611 (analog bus)
E1411-61601 (digital bus)

Cable assemblies for multiplexer-to-multiplexer connections

Configuration 1 Configuration 2

Connecting Configuration 1 to: E1400-61605 (analog bus) E1400-61605 (analog bus)

Connecting Configuration 2 to: E1400-61605 (analog bus) E1400-61605 (analog bus)

and
E1400-61601 (digital bus)

Examples:

1. To connect the HP E1411B multimeter to a FET multiplexer in the HP E1403B module adapter
(configuration 2), the analog and digital bus cables in kit E1400-80001 are required.

2. To connect a FET multiplexer in the HP E1403B module adapter (configuration 2) to a relay

multiplexer in the E1403B adapter (configuration 1), the E1400-61605 analog bus cable is required.

Notes:

1. The HP E1326-61611 analog bus cable and HP E1411-61601 digital bus cable are available
under kit part number E1411-80001. This kit is not included with the multimeter or multiplexers.
It must be ordered separately.

2. The HP E1400-61605 analog bus cable ships with the HP E1345A/46A/47A/55A and 56A relay
multiplexers. The HP E1400-61605 analog bus cable and HP E1400-61601 digital bus cable
ship with the HP E1351A/52A/53A/57A/58A FET multiplexers.

Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Figure 2-16. Cables for B-Size Multiplexers in HP E1403B Adapter

38 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Additional Configurations
This section contains information on two additional configurations for the
multimeter:

• selecting VME RAM, and

• disabling front-panel for stand-alone applications.

Selecting VME RAM Up to 12 Mbytes of VME RAM can be added to the B-size mainframe to
be used for multimeter reading storage. The following lists guidelines for
using VME RAM with the multimeter:

• Dynamic RAM must handle its own refresh, and not require any
command module activity.
• VME cards can never be a bus master.
– B-size mainframe does not have bus arbitration.

• VME cards must exclude the first and last 2 Mbytes of A24 space.
– B-size mainframe’s system ROM is located in the lower
2 Mbytes.
– B-size mainframe’s system RAM is located in the upper
2 Mbytes.

• VME RAM may not be used for IBASIC program memory.

The following lists guidelines in selecting a VME card:

A24 A24 address space

D16 16 bits of data at a time

3U A size slot

6U B size slot

Disabling When using the HP E1326B Multimeter as a stand-alone instrument, the

Front-panel for HP E1301A front-panel keyboard can be disabled without disabling the
display. To disable the front-panel keyboard, use the following guidelines:
Stand-alone
Applications – send a "REMOTE" command to each instrument, and
– send a "LOCAL LOCKOUT" to the HP-IB interface.

This should allow the display to still work, but disable the keyboard and the
softkeys.

Chapter 2 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Notes

40 Configuring the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3
Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter

About This Chapter

This chapter is a collection of example programs which show you how to
make measurements with various multimeter configurations. The examples
in this chapter include:
• Making a Single Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 42
• Making a Burst of Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 43
• Making an Externally Triggered Burst of
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 44
• Making Multiple Burst Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 45
• Scanning a Channel List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 46
• Making Multiple Scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47
• Making Multiple Paced Scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 48
• Making an Externally Triggered Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 49
• Scanning Switchbox Channels (E1326B/1351A) . . . . . . . . . Page 50
• Scanning Switchbox Channels (E1411B/1460A. . . . . . . . . . Page 52
• Multiple High-Speed Scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 54
• Maximizing Measurement Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 56
• Changing the Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 58
• Using a PC, C Language, and the HP 82335 HP-IB
Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 60
• Maximizing Measurement Accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 63
• Storing Readings in Shared Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 64
• Checking for Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 66
• Synchronizing the Multimeter with a Computer . . . . . . . . . . Page 68
• Additional Measurement Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 69

Using the Programs The purpose of the chapter is to provide example programs that show you
how to operate the multimeter. With minor modifications, these programs
can also be used for many of your applications.

Programming The example programs are shown in the Hewlett-Packard BASIC language
Language and assume the multimeter is controlled from an HP 9000 Series 200/300
computer over the HP-IB. When using HP BASIC, a command is sent to
the multimeter with the OUTPUT statement:
OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:VOLT:DC? (@100)"

The destination specified (70903) is the interface select code of the

computer (7), plus the HP-IB addresses of the HP 75000 Series B
mainframe or Series C command module (09), and the multimeter (03).
The multimeter command is enclosed between quotation marks. Use
ENTER to enter data from the multimeter is entered into the computer:

ENTER 70903;variable

Chapter 3 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Multimeter Connections Chapter 2 contains information on connecting input signals for the
measurements described in this chapter.

The MEASure and All of the example programs use the MEASure or CONFigure commands.
CONFigure Commands These commands configure the multimeter, and are equivalent to executing
several other multimeter commands. The CONFigure command is used in
place of MEASure when changes to the configuration set by either
command are required.

Recall from Chapter 1 that the HP E1326B/E1411B can function

stand-alone, or with multiplexers as a scanning multimeter instrument.
When programming, the stand-alone multimeter and scanning multimeter
are distinguished by the absence or presence of the (@channel_list)
parameter in the MEASure or CONFigure command. Chapter 4 provides
details on these commands and the multimeter configurations they set.

Measurement In each of the programs, the measurement function specified is DC voltage.

Functions other than The function can be changed by changing the MEASure or CONFigure
DC Voltage command. The different functions available are shown following the last
example program.

Making a Single Measurement

This program makes a single DC voltage measurement on the terminals
connected to the multimeter’s faceplate using the configuration set by the
MEASure command.

10 !Clear and reset the multimeter.

20 CLEAR 70903
30 OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"
40 !Configure the multimeter and make a DC voltage measurement.
50 OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:VOLT:DC?"
60 !Enter and display the reading on the computer.
70 ENTER 70903;A
80 PRINT A
90 END

Comments • The scanning multimeter (multimeter plus multiplexers) is required

to make 2-wire measurements (resistance, thermistors, RTDs) or
thermocouple measurements.

42 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Making a Burst of Measurements
This program makes 100 DC voltage measurements on the terminals
connected to the multimeter’s faceplate.
10 !Dimension a computer array to store the readings.
20 DIM Rdgs(1:100)
30 !Clear and reset the multimeter.
40 CLEAR 70903
50 OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"
60 !Configure the multimeter for DC voltage measurements. Take a burst of 100
70 !readings, store the readings in mainframe memory until all readings are
80 !taken. Fetch the readings from memory and place them in the output buffer.
90 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:VOLT:DC"
100 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:COUN 100"
110 OUTPUT 70903;"INIT"
120 OUTPUT 70903;"FETCH?"
130 !Enter the readings into the computer. Display selected measurements.
140 ENTER 70903;Rdgs(*)
150 PRINT Rdgs(1),Rdgs(50),Rdgs(100)
160 END

Comments • CONFigure sets a burst consisting of one measurement. The

SAMPle:COUNt command is used to set a burst of measurements
greater than one. Up to 16,777,215 measurements can be specified
with SAMPle:COUNt.

• When INIT follows CONFigure, the readings are stored in mainframe

memory. FETCH? retrieves the readings and places them in the
output buffer once all measurements are taken. Replacing INIT and
FETCH? with READ? returns the readings directly to the output
buffer. Readings should be stored in memory first, rather than
returned directly to the output buffer, when measurement speed is
critical.

• Readings are returned directly to the multimeter’s output buffer, or

are stored in mainframe memory on in memory shared by the
VXIbus system. The total number of readings which can be stored
depends on the amount of memory available. Each reading stored
will consume four bytes of memory.

• A burst of measurements (set by SAMPle:COUNt) can also be made

when scanning a single channel.

Chapter 3 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Making an Externally Triggered Burst of Measurements
This program makes a burst of 10 measurements on the faceplate terminals
when the multimeter receives an external trigger.
10 !Dimension a computer array to store the readings.
20 DIM Rdgs(1:10)
30 !Clear and reset the multimeter.
40 CLEAR 70903
50 OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"
60 !Configure the multimeter for DC voltage measurements. Set the trigger
70 !source to an external trigger. Take a burst of 10 readings when the trigger
80 !occurs. Wait for the trigger then return the readings to the output buffer.
90 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:VOLT:DC"
100 OUTPUT 70903;" TRIG:SOUR EXT"
110 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:COUN 10"
120 OUTPUT 70903;"READ?"
130 !Enter and display the readings on the computer.
140 ENTER 70903;Rdgs(*)
150 FOR I=1 TO 10
160 PRINT Rdgs(I)
170 NEXT I
180 END

Comments • The multimeter is triggered when a high-to-low TTL signal is

applied to the "External Trigger" port.

• CONFigure sets the trigger source to the multimeter’s internal

trigger. The trigger source is changed with the TRIGger:SOURce
command. The sources available are:

IMM - immediate (internal) trigger

EXT - external trigger
BUS - triggered by *TRG or HP-IB group execute trigger
HOLD - suspend trigger

• CONFigure sets a burst consisting of one measurement. The

SAMPle:COUNt command is used to set a burst of measurements
greater than one. Up to 16,777,215 measurements can be specified
with SAMPle:COUNt.

• The multimeter output buffer can hold eight readings. When the
buffer fills, measurements are suspended until readings are read from
the buffer (by the computer) to make space available.

44 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Making Multiple Burst Measurements
This program makes multiple burst measurements with a 5 second delay
between bursts. There are three bursts, each consisting of 100 readings,
occurring 1 ms apart.
10 !Dimension a computer array to store the readings.
20 DIM Rdgs(1:300)
30 !Clear and reset the multimeter.
40 CLEAR 70903
50 OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"
60 !Configure the multimeter for DC voltage measurements (7.27V range). Set
70 !the aperture time for 100 ms and turn autozero off. Make a total of 3 bursts,
80 !with a 5 second delay between them. Set each burst to 100 readings, with
90 !each reading 1 ms apart. Store the readings in mainframe memory until all
100 !bursts have occurred.
110 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:VOLT:DC 7.27"
120 OUTPUT 70903;" VOLT:APER 100E-6"
130 OUTPUT 70903;" CAL:ZERO:AUTO OFF"
140 OUTPUT 70903;" TRIG:COUN 3"
150 OUTPUT 70903;" TRIG:DEL 5"
160 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:SOUR TIM"
170 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:TIM 0.001"
180 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:COUN 100"
190 OUTPUT 70903;"INIT"
200 OUTPUT 70903;"FETCH?"
210 !Enter the readings and display selected measurements.
220 ENTER 70903;Rdgs(*)
230 PRINT Rdgs(100),Rdgs(200),Rdgs(300)
240 END

Comments • CONFigure sets an aperture time of 16.7 ms or 20 ms depending on

the line frequency. The VOLTage:APERture command is used to set
aperture times of 10 µs, 100 µs, 2.5 ms, 16.7 ms, 20 ms, 267 ms, and
320 ms. For this program, the 100 µs aperture time is the maximum
that allows the multimeter to sample the readings every 1 ms (see
Chapter 4).

• CONFigure turns autozero on. The command CALibration:ZERO:AUTO

is used to turn it off. Turning autozero off allows the readings in the
burst to occur at more precise, and smaller intervals.

• The trigger count is the number of triggers the multimeter is to

respond to before it returns to an idle state. In this program, the
multimeter responds to three internal triggers. CONFigure sets the
trigger count to 1. The command TRIGger:COUNt is used to set up
to 16,777,215 counts.

Chapter 3 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The trigger delay is the period between the trigger signal and the
start of the measurement (burst). The trigger delay set by
CONFigure is 0 seconds for the DC voltage function. The
TRIGger:DELay command is used to set delays up to 16.7 seconds.

• CONFigure sets the sample source such that there is a minimum

delay (sample rate) between measurements in a burst, and a burst
size of 1. The sample rate and burst size are changed with the
SAMPle:SOURce, SAMPle:TIMer, and SAMPle:COUNt commands.
SAMPle:SOURce selects the source which sets the sample rate.
SAMPle:TIMer sets the rate, and SAMPle:COUNt sets the number of
readings in the burst.

Scanning a Channel List

This program scans a channel list one time using the multimeter
configuration set by the MEASure command.
10 !Dimension a computer array to store the readings.
20 DIM Rdgs(1:16)
30 !Clear and reset the multimeter.
40 CLEAR 70903
50 OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"
60 !Configure the multimeter and make DC voltage measurements on
70 !channels 100 through 115.
80 OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:VOLT:DC? (@100:115)"
90 !Enter and display the readings on the computer.
100 ENTER 70903;Rdgs(*)
110 FOR I=1 TO 16
120 PRINT Rdgs(I)
130 NEXT I
140 END

Comments • The multimeter output buffer can hold eight readings. When the
buffer fills, measurements are suspended until readings are read from
the buffer (by the computer) to make space available.

46 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Making Multiple Scans
This program scans a channel list multiple times.
10 !Dimension a computer array to store the readings.
20 DIM Rdgs(1:20)
30 !Clear and reset the multimeter.
40 CLEAR 70903
50 OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"
60 !Configure the multimeter for DC voltage measurements. Scan the
70 !channel list five times.
80 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:VOLT:DC (@100:103)"
90 OUTPUT 70903;" TRIG:COUN 5"
100 OUTPUT 70903;"READ?"
110 !Enter and display the readings on the computer.
120 ENTER 70903;Rdgs(*)
130 FOR I=1 TO 20 STEP 4
140 PRINT Rdgs(I),Rdgs(I+1),Rdgs(I+2),Rdgs(I+3)
150 NEXT I
160 END

Comments • For the scanning multimeter, CONFigure sets one scan (pass)
through the channel list. The TRIGger:COUNt command can specify
up to 16,777,215 scans.

• The multimeter makes one measurement per channel per scan.

However, multiple measurements per channel (per scan) can be
made when scanning a single channel. The number of measurements
taken during a single channel scan is set with the SAMPle:COUNt
command.

• The multimeter output buffer can hold eight readings. When the
buffer fills, measurements are suspended until readings are read from
the buffer (by the computer) to make space available.

Chapter 3 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Making Multiple Paced Scans
This program makes multiple scans through a channel list with the scans
occurring at specified intervals.
10 !Dimension a computer array to store the readings.
20 DIM Rdgs(1:20)
30 !Clear and reset the multimeter.
40 CLEAR 70903
50 OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"
60 !Configure the multimeter for DC voltage measurements. Scan the
70 !channel list five times, with a two second delay between scans.
80 !Store the readings in mainframe memory.
90 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:VOLT:DC (@100:103)"
100 OUTPUT 70903;" TRIG:COUN 5"
110 OUTPUT 70903;" TRIG:DEL 2"
120 OUTPUT 70903;"INIT"
130 OUTPUT 70903;"FETCH?"
140 !Enter and display the readings on the computer.
150 ENTER 70903;Rdgs(*)
160 FOR I=1 TO 20 STEP 4
170 PRINT Rdgs(I),Rdgs(I+1),Rdgs(I+2),Rdgs(I+3)
180 NEXT I
190 END

Comments • For the scanning multimeter, CONFigure sets one scan (pass)
through the channel list. The TRIGger:COUNt command can specify
up to 16,777,215 scans.

• The delay between scans is the delay between the trigger signal and
the first channel in the list. There is no programmable delay between
subsequent channels in the list. The trigger delay set by CONFigure
is 0 seconds for the DC voltage function. The TRIGger:DELay
command is used to set delays up to 16.7 seconds.

• When scanning with the FET multiplexers, the sample period for
each channel can be specified with the SAMPle:TIMer command.
This feature is available with the FET multiplexers only.

• When INIT follows CONFigure, the readings are stored in mainframe

memory. FETCH? retrieves the readings and places them in the
output buffer once all measurements are taken. Replacing INIT and
FETCH? with READ? returns the readings directly to the output
buffer.

48 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Making an Externally Triggered Scan
This example makes one scan through a channel list when the multimeter
receives an external trigger.
10 !Dimension a computer array to store the readings.
20 DIM Rdgs(1:16)
30 !Clear and reset the multimeter.
40 CLEAR 70903
50 OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"
60 !Configure the multimeter for DC voltage measurements. Set the
70 !trigger source to an external trigger. Scan the channel list one time
80 !when the trigger is received.
90 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:VOLT:DC (@100:115)"
100 OUTPUT 70903;" TRIG:SOUR EXT"
110 OUTPUT 70903;"READ?"
120 !Enter and display the readings on the computer.
130 ENTER 70903;Rdgs(*)
140 FOR I=1 TO 16
150 PRINT Rdgs(I)
160 NEXT I
170 END

Comments • The multimeter is triggered when a high-to-low TTL signal is

applied to the "External Trigger" port.

• CONFigure sets the trigger source to the multimeter’s internal

trigger. The trigger source is changed with the TRIGger:SOURce
command. The sources available are:

IMM - immediate (internal) trigger

EXT - external trigger
BUS - triggered by *TRG or HP-IB group execute trigger
HOLD - suspend trigger

• If programmed for multiple scans, multiple external triggers must

occur since each scan requires a trigger.

Chapter 3 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Scanning Switchbox Channels (E1326B/E1351A)
In this example, the stand-alone multimeter (HP E1326B) scans 5 channels
of an HP E1351A FET multiplexer switchbox 100 times. The scanning
sequence is controlled with the digital bus.
10 !Dimension a controller array to store the readings.
20 DIM Rdgs(1:500)
30 !Reset the E1326B multimeter and the E1351A FET switchbox. Turn the
40 !multimeter monitor mode off to increase throughput.
50 OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"
60 OUTPUT 70903;"*OPC?"
70 ENTER 70903;Rst_done
80 OUTPUT 70914;"*RST"
90 OUTPUT 70914;"*OPC?"
100 ENTER 70914;Rst_done
110 OUTPUT 70903;"DISP:MON OFF"
120 !Configure the multimeter for measurements at its fastest rate. This
130 !includes a fixed range (7.27), a 10 µs aperture time (MAX), autozero
140 !off, and a sample period of 76 µs (SAMP:TIM MIN). Set the multimeter
150 !to make 500 measurements (5 channels/100 scans). Wait for the
160 !configuration to complete.
170 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:VOLT:DC 7.27,MAX"
180 OUTPUT 70903;" CAL:ZERO:AUTO OFF"
190 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:COUN 500"
200 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:SOUR TIM"
210 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:TIM MIN"
220 OUTPUT 70903;"*OPC?"
230 ENTER 70903;Complete
240 !Configure the switchbox so that it receives its triggers over the digital bus.
250 !Route the signals on the multiplexer channels to the multimeter via the
260 !analog bus. Specify the scan list. Wait for the configuration to complete.
270 OUTPUT 70914;"TRIG:SOUR DBUS"
280 OUTPUT 70914;"SCAN:PORT ABUS"
290 OUTPUT 70914;"SCAN (@100:104)"
300 OUTPUT 70914;"*OPC?"
310 ENTER 70914;Complete
320 !Place the switchbox in the continuous scanning mode. Start the scan by
330 !closing the first multiplexer channel in the channel list. Wait for the
340 !command to complete and then trigger the multimeter.
350 OUTPUT 70914;"INIT:CONT ON"
360 OUTPUT 70914;"INIT"
370 WAIT .1
Continued on Next Page

50 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 380 OUTPUT 70903;"INIT"
390 !Retrieve the readings from multimeter memory and enter them into the
400 !controller. Clear the switchbox to exit the continuous scanning mode.
410 OUTPUT 70903;"FETC?"
420 ENTER 70903;Rdgs(*)
430 CLEAR 70914
440 END

Comments • The multimeter at secondary address 03 (logical address 24) is

connected to the switchbox at secondary address 14 (logical
address 112) with an analog bus cable and a digital bus cable.

• The analog bus carries the input signals to the multimeter. The
digital bus is used to carry a "multimeter complete" signal to the
switchbox to trigger the next channel closing.

• Because of the fast rate at which the FET channels close, the
multimeter is triggered once (INIT) and then samples continuously
(SAMP:COUN 500). Thus, the multimeter ignores the multiplexer
"channel closed" signal on the digital bus.

• Using this configuration, the multimeter is able to continuously scan the

switchbox and store readings in its memory at a 76 µs (13 kHz) rate.

Chapter 3 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Scanning Switchbox Channels (E1411B/E1460A)
In this example, the stand-alone multimeter (HP E1411B) scans 64 channels
on an HP E1460A relay multiplexer switchbox. The scanning sequence is
controlled with the VXIbus TTLTrg trigger lines.
10 !Dimension a computer array to store the readings.
20 DIM Rdgs(1:64)
30 !Reset the E1411B multimeter and the E1460 switchbox. Wait for the
40 !resets to complete before continuing.
50 OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"
60 OUTPUT 70903;"*OPC?"
70 ENTER 70903;Rst_done
80 OUTPUT 70914;"*RST"
90 OUTPUT 70914;"*OPC?"
100 ENTER 70914;Rst_done
110 !Configure the multimeter for DC voltage measurements. Set its trigger
120 !source to TTL trigger line 0, set it to receive 64 triggers (one to measure
130 !each channel). Set the multimeter to output its channel closed pulse on
140 !TTL trigger line 1. Wait for the configuration to complete. Place the
150 !multimeter in the wait-for-trigger state.
160 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:VOLT:DC"
170 OUTPUT 70903;" TRIG:SOUR TTLT0"
180 OUTPUT 70903;" TRIG:COUN 64"
190 OUTPUT 70903;" OUTP:TTLT1:STAT ON"
200 OUTPUT 70903;"*OPC?"
210 ENTER 70903;Complete
220 OUTPUT 70903;"INIT"
230 !Configure the switchbox so that it receives its "channel advance" trigger
240 !on TTL trigger line 1, and that it outputs its "channel closed" pulse on
250 !TTL trigger line 0. Route the signals on the multiplexer channels to the
260 !multimeter via the analog bus. Specify the scan list. Wait for the
270 !configuration to complete before proceeding.
280 OUTPUT 70914;"TRIG:SOUR TTLT1"
290 OUTPUT 70914;"OUTP:TTLT0:STAT ON"
300 OUTPUT 70914;"SCAN:PORT ABUS"
310 OUTPUT 70914;"SCAN (@100:177)"
320 OUTPUT 70914;"*OPC?"
330 ENTER 70914;Complete
340 !Start the scan and the measurements by closing the first multiplexer
350 !channel in the channel list.
360 OUTPUT 70914;"INIT"
Continued on Next Page

52 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 370 !Retrieve the readings from multimeter memory, enter and display them
380 !on the computer.
390 OUTPUT 70903;"FETC?"
400 ENTER 70903;Rdgs(*)
410 PRINT Rdgs(*)
420 END

Comments • The multimeter and (multiplexer) switchbox have unique secondary

HP-IB addresses and as such, are two separate instruments. Input
signals from the switchbox are routed to the multimeter via the
analog bus. The scanning sequence is controlled with selected
TTLTrg trigger bus lines.

• The HP E1460A multiplexer has eight banks of channels with eight

channels in each bank. Channel numbers are 00 through 07 on
bank 0, up to 70 through 77 on bank 7. Since the switchbox consists
of only one multiplexer, the channel list for scanning 64 channels
is (@100:177).

• Additional information on triggering the multimeter is found in

Chapters 4 and 5. Information on the multimeter’s OUTPut
subsystem is contained in Chapter 5.

Chapter 3 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Multiple High-Speed Scans
This example shows how a scanning multimeter consisting of the HP E1326B
multimeter and HP E1351A FET multiplexer is programmed for multiple scans
at a 13 kHz rate. The program scans 16 channels 100 times.
10 !Dimension a controller array to store the readings.
20 DIM Rdgs(1:1600)
30 !Reset the multimeter, turn monitor mode off, and then download the
40 !channel list to the FET multiplexer.
50 OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"
60 OUTPUT 70903;"*OPC?"
70 OUTPUT 70903;"DIAG:FETS 1"
80 ENTER 70903;Rst_done
90 OUTPUT 70903;"DISP:MON OFF"
100 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:VOLT:DC 7.27,MAX,(@100:115)"
110 !Configure the multimeter for a burst of measurements. Specify a fixed
120 !range (7.27), a 10 µs aperture time (MAX), turn autozero off, and set a
130 !76 µs sample period (SAMP:TIM MIN). The number of measurements
140 !(sample count) is determined by multiplying the number of channels times
150 !the number of scans. In this example, 16 channels are scanned 100 times.
160 !Wait for the configuration to complete.
170 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:VOLT:DC 7.27,MAX"
180 OUTPUT 70903;" CAL:ZERO:AUTO OFF"
190 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:COUN 1600"
200 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:SOUR TIM"
210 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:TIM MIN"
220 OUTPUT 70903;"*OPC?"
230 ENTER 70903;Complete
240 !The following commands set the FET multiplexer scanning configuration
250 !by writing directly to the multiplexer registers. Specifically, the first
260 !command transfers control of the scan from the multimeter to the user.
270 !The second command enables digital bus triggering, continuous scanning,
280 !and sets the pointer to the beginning of the scan list. The third command
290 !transfers control back to the multimeter. The fourth command closes the
300 !first channel in the list.
310 OUTPUT 70900;"VXI:WRITE 25,4,8"
320 OUTPUT 70900;"VXI:WRITE 25,6,26"
330 OUTPUT 70900;"VXI:WRITE 25,4,0"
340 OUTPUT 70900;"VXI:WRITE 25,4,16"
350 OUTPUT 70900;"*OPC?"
360 ENTER 70900;Complete
Continued on Next Page

54 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 370 !Trigger the multimeter to start the measurements. Retrieve the readings
380 !from multimeter memory and enter them into the controller. Since the
390 !first channel in the scan list remains closed after the last multimeter
400 !complete signal is received, transfer control to the user, open the channel,
410 !and then transfer control to the multimeter.
420 OUTPUT 70903;"INIT"
430 OUTPUT 70903;"FETC?"
440 ENTER 70903;Rdgs(*)
450 OUTPUT 70900;"VXI:WRITE 25,4,8"
460 OUTPUT 70900;"VXI:WRITE 25,6,16"
470 OUTPUT 70900;"VXI:WRITE 25,4,0"
480 END

Comments • The multimeter is connected to the multiplexer using the analog bus
cable and the digital bus cable.

• The analog bus carries the input signals to the multimeter. The
digital bus is used to carry a "multimeter complete" signal to the
multiplexer to trigger the next channel closing.

Because of the fast rate at which the FET channels close, the
multimeter is triggered once (INIT) and then samples continuously
(SAMP:COUN 1600). Thus, the multimeter ignores the multiplexer
"channel closed" signal on the digital bus.

Using this scanning multimeter configuration, the multimeter is able

to continuously scan the multiplexer channels and store readings in
its memory at a 76 µs (13 kHz) rate.

• The maximum number of continuous scans and measurements

depends on the amount of multimeter memory available.

• Detailed information on the FET multiplexer registers can be found

in the register-based programming section of the multiplexer user’s
manual.

Chapter 3 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maximizing Measurement Speed
This program shows the multimeter configuration required to make
measurements at the fastest possible rate (13150 readings/sec).
10 !Dimension a computer array to store the readings.
20 DIM Rdgs(1:500)
30 !Clear and reset the multimeter. For mainframes with a display and
40 !keyboard, turn off monitor mode so the measurements are not displayed.
50 CLEAR 70903
60 OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"
70 OUTPUT 70903;"DISP:MON OFF"
80 !Configure the multimeter for DC voltage measurements. Increase
90 !measurement speed by specifying a fixed range (7.27), the worst
100 !resolution (MAX), and turning autozero off. Specify the number of
110 !readings in the burst and set the fastest sample rate. Store the
120 !readings in mainframe memory.
130 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:VOLT:DC 7.27,MAX"
140 OUTPUT 70903;" CAL:ZERO:AUTO OFF"
150 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:COUN 500"
160 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:SOUR TIM"
170 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:TIM MIN"
180 OUTPUT 70903;"INIT"
190 OUTPUT 70903;"FETC?"
200 !Enter the readings and display selected measurements.
210 ENTER 70903;Rdgs(*)
220 PRINT Rdgs(1),Rdgs(250),Rdgs(500)
230 END

Comments • The 13 kHz reading rate is achieved under the following conditions:
function = DC voltage
range = fixed
resolution = least
aperture time = 10 µs
autozero = off
sample rate = 76 µs (MINimum)
reading storage = mainframe (or shared) memory

In addition, there should be no activity by other instruments in the

mainframe.

56 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The terms MIN and MAX often appear as parameter choices in a
command’s syntax. MIN selects the minimum numeric value for that
parameter. MAX selects the maximum numeric value. This
eliminates the need to look up specific numbers in the manual.

• In this program, note that MAX in the CONFigure command selects

the least resolution and sets the aperture time to 10 µs (see Table 4-5
on page 92). When measurement speed is critical, readings should
be stored in mainframe memory first, rather than returned directly to
the output buffer.

• The total number of readings which can be stored depends on the

amount of memory available. Each reading stored will consume four
bytes of memory.

• To increase the (throughput) speed at which measurement data is

transferred from the multimeter to the computer by the FETCh?
command, the multimeter’s output data format should be set to
REAL,64 or REAL,32 (see “Changing the Data Format” on page 58).

• The 13 kHz reading rate must be reduced to 12.82 kHz when the
sample count is greater than 32 k. Setting the SAMP:TIM to 78 µs
gives a reading rate of 12.82 kHz and allows the sample count to be
greater than 32 k.
CONF:VOLT:DC 7.27,MAX
CAL:ZERO:AUTO OFF
SAMP:SOUR TIM
SAMP:TIM 0.078
INIT

Chapter 3 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Changing the Data Format
Throughput speed between the multimeter and computer is increased when
binary (rather than ASCII) data formats are used. The following program
changes the data format to REAL 64, and then makes a burst of 1,000
measurements on a single multiplexer channel.
10 !Dimension computer variables to store the data header and readings.
20 !Assign an input/output path between the multimeter and computer.
30 !This is a path for data in the REAL 64 format. Clear the path and
40 !reset the multimeter.
50 DIM Ndig$[1],Count$[9],Rdgs(1:1000)
60 ASSIGN @Dmm TO 70903;FORMAT OFF
70 CLEAR @Dmm
80 OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"
90 !Set the data format to REAL 64. Configure the multimeter for DC
100 !voltage measurements on multiplexer channel 0. Increase
110 !measurement speed by specifying a fixed range (58.1), turning
120 !autozero off, and setting the minimum aperture time. Specify the
130 !number of readings in the burst and set the fastest sample period.
140 !Store the readings in mainframe memory.
150 OUTPUT 70903;"FORM REAL,64"
160 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:VOLT:DC 58.1,(@100)"
170 OUTPUT 70903;" CAL:ZERO:AUTO OFF"
180 OUTPUT 70903;" VOLT:APER MIN"
190 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:COUN 1E3"
200 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:SOUR TIM"
210 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:TIM MIN"
220 OUTPUT 70903;"INIT"
230 OUTPUT 70903;"FETC?"
240 !Enter and display readings.
250 ENTER 70903 USING "#,X,K,K";Ndig$;Count$[1;VAL(Ndig$)]
260 ENTER @Dmm;Rdgs(*)
270 ENTER 70903;Lf$
280 PRINT Rdgs(*)
290 END

Comments • The REAL,64 format is selected because the HP 9000 Series 200/300
computer stores readings in that format.

• REAL,64 data is transferred to the computer in the IEEE 488.2-1987

Definite Length Arbitrary Block format. Data in this format is
preceded by a header consisting of: # <non-zero digit>
<block length>. In this program, the header preceding the
measurement data is #48000. The 4 represents the number of digits
indicating the block length (8000), and 8000 is the block length
(1,000 readings * 8 bytes/reading).

58 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • When HP BASIC is used, the program’s ENTER @Dmm USING ...
statement is used to remove the Arbitrary Block header:

# - tells the computer to terminate the ENTER when all ENTER

statements have completed.

X - tells the computer to skip the first character of the Arbitrary

Block header (#).

K,K - stores the <non-zero digit> and <block length> portions of

the header in the Ndig$ and Count$ variables respectively.

More information on the Definite Length Arbitrary Block format is

located in Chapter 4.

• The ENTER @Dmm;Rdgs(*) statement enters the readings into

the computer. Since a Line Feed (LF) follows the last reading,
ENTER 70903;Lf$ removes the LF character from the multimeter
output buffer. If the LF character is not removed, Error -410 "Query
Interrupted" occurs the next time data is sent to the buffer. This
(third) ENTER statement is only required when using the REAL data
formats.

Chapter 3 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Using a PC, C Language, and the
HP 82335 HP-IB Interface Card
The following benchmark program scans 50 channels, 40 times, and
compares each reading to upper and lower limits. The benchmarks varied
from 1.5 to 1.75 sec. The variation is caused by the time function in the
computer reporting back time with only 1 second increments.

The loop is repeated four times, thus: 6/4=1.5 and 7/4=1.75.

The line:
IOOUTPUTS(ADDR, "FORMAT REAL,32",14 );
programs the E1326B to output its data in a 32-bit real format.

The line:
IOENTERAB(ADDR, rdgs, &bytes, swap);
/* enter readings and remove block header */
enters the 32-bit numbers sent out by the DMM directly into a "float" type
C variable which is also 32-bits. Doing binary transfers this way is the
fastest method of moving data.

The program was Compiled in Borland TurboC, and was run on an

HP Vectra 25 MHz, 386 PC with an HP 82335 HP-IB card connected
to an HP E1301A mainframe with an HP E1326B multimeter and four
HP E1351A FET multiplexers.
/* BENCHMK.C - This is a benchmark program for the E1326B. The program */
/* scans 50 FET multiplexer channels 40 times, and repeats the sequence */
/* 4 times. The readings are compared to a set of limits after each scan. */
/* Results: 1.5000 to 1.75000 seconds for 40 scans of 50 channels */

/* Include the following header files */

#include <studio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <time.h>
#include <malloc.h>
#include <cfunc.h>
/* This file is from the HP-IB Command Library Disk */
#define ADDR 70903L
/* I/O path from PC to the E1326 scanning multimeter */
/* Function Prototypes */

void rst_clr(void);
void scan_mult(void);
void check_error(char *func_tion);
/******************************************************************/

Continued on Next Page

60 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 void main(void) /* run the program */
{

clrscr(); /* clears screen (turbo C only) */

rst_clr(); /* reset the scanning multimeter */
scan_mult(); /* function to configure multimeter and take readings */
}
/******************************************************************/
void scan_mult(void)
{
time_t T1, T2;
int c = 0, i = 0, j = 0, length = 0, swap = 0, bytes = 0;
float *rdgs, rdy;
char lf_remove[1];
/* dynamically allocate memory for readings */
rdgs = malloc(8000 * sizeof(float)); /* float = 32-bit real number */
/* set number of bytes placed in memory, and number of bytes read */
swap = size of (float); /* place 4 bytes/reading in memory */
bytes = 8000 * swap; /* read 32,000 bytes */
/* configure the scanning multimeter and wait for configuration to complete */
IOOUTPUTS(ADDR, "CONF:VOLT:DC
(@1(00:15),2(00:15),3(00:15),4(00:01))", 51);
IOOUTPUTS(ADDR, "VOLT:RANGE 10;:CAL:ZERO:AUTO
OFF;:VOLT:APERMIN",47 );
IOOUTPUTS(ADDR, "FORMAT REAL,32",14 );
IOOUTPUTS(ADDR, "*OPC?", 5); /* wait for configuration to complete */
IOENTER(ADDR, &rdy); /* enter *OPC? response from multimeter */
/* function call to check for multimeter configuration errors */
check_error("scan_mult");
T1 = time(NULL); /* get start time */
/* program loop which set 4, 40 scan measurements */
for (c = 0; c 4; c++)
{
/* program loop which scans the 50 multiplexer channels 40 times */
for (i = 0; i 40; i++)
{
IOOUTPUTS(ADDR, "INIT", 4); /* trigger multimeter */
IOOUTPUTS(ADDR, "FETCH?", 6); /* fetch the readings */
IOENTERAB(ADDR, rdgs, &bytes, swap); /* enter readings and remove
block header*/
/* remove line feed which trails the last data byte */
length = 1;
IOENTERS(ADDR, lf_remove, &length);
/* compare each reading to a set of limits */
for (j = 0; j 50; j++)
{
Continued on Next Page

Chapter 3 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 if (rdgs[j] -.5 || rdgs[j] = .5)
printf("\n%f", rdgs[j]);
}
}
}
T2 = time(NULL); /* get stop time */
/* calculate time for measurements */
printf("\nTime = %f seconds", (difftime(T2,T1)/4));
free(rdgs);
}
/******************************************************************/
void rst_clr(void)
{
/* Reset and clear the scanning multimeter */
IOOUTPUTS(ADDR, "*RST;*CLS", 9); /* Send (9) characters */
}
/******************************************************************/
void check_error(char *func_tion)
{
char into[161];
int length = 160;
IOOUTPUTS(ADDR, "SYST:ERR?", 9); /* Query error register */
IOENTERS(ADDR, into, &length); /* Enter error message */
if (atoi(into) != 0) /* Determine if error is present
If errors present, print and exit */
{
while (atoi(into) != 0)
{
printf("Error %s in function %s\n\n", into, func_tion);
IOOUTPUTS(ADDR, "SYST:ERR?", 9);
IOENTERS(ADDR, into, &length);
}
exit(1);
}
}

62 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maximizing Measurement Accuracy
This program makes DC voltage measurements on three channels using the
multimeter configuration which makes the most accurate measurements.
Note that measurement accuracy also depends on wiring practices and the
surrounding environment.
10 !Dimension a computer array to store the readings.
20 DIM Rdgs(1:3)
30 !Clear and reset the multimeter.
40 CLEAR 70903
50 OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"
60 !Configure the multimeter for DC voltage measurements.
70 !Set autorange and select the minimum (best) resolution.
80 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:VOLT:DC AUTO,MIN,(@101:103)"
90 OUTPUT 70903;"READ?"
100 !Enter and display the readings on the computer.
110 ENTER 70903;Rdgs(*)
120 PRINT Rdgs(*)
130 END

Comments • MIN sets the minimum (best) resolution for the range set by
autorange. MIN also indirectly selects the aperture time for the most
accurate measurements.

• The terms MIN and MAX often appear as parameter choices in a

command’s syntax. MIN selects the minimum numeric value for that
parameter. MAX selects the maximum numeric value for the
parameter. This eliminates the need to look up specific numbers in
the manual.

• CONFigure turns autozero on.

• When making resistance measurements (including thermistors and

RTDs), accuracy can often be increased by turning on offset
compensation (for example, RESistance:OCOMpensated).

Chapter 3 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Storing Readings in Shared Memory
The following program stores the multimeter readings on a VME memory card.
10 !Dimension computer variables to store the data header and readings.
20 !Assign an input/output path between the multimeter and computer.
30 !Clear the path and reset the multimeter.
40 DIM Ndig$[1],Count$[9],Rdgs(1:200,1:1000)
50 ASSIGN @Dmm TO 70903;FORMAT OFF
60 CLEAR @Dmm
70 OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"
80 !Specify the starting memory location in shared memory (800000h),
90 !specify the amount of memory to use (1 MByte), direct the readings to the
100 !memory card.
110 OUTPUT 70903;"MEM:VME:ADDR #H800000"
120 OUTPUT 70903;"MEM:VME:SIZE #H100000"
130 OUTPUT 70903;"MEM:VME:STAT ON"
140 !Set the data format to REAL,64. Configure the multimeter to take 200,000
150 !readings at its fastest possible rate.
160 OUTPUT 70903;"FORMAT REAL,64"
170 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:VOLT:DC 58.1"
180 OUTPUT 70903;" CAL:ZERO:AUTO OFF"
190 OUTPUT 70903;" VOLT:APER MIN"
200 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:COUN 200000"
210 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:SOUR TIM"
220 OUTPUT 70903;" SAMP:TIM MIN"
230 OUTPUT 70903;"INIT"
240 OUTPUT 70903;"FETC?"
250 !Enter the readings.
260 ENTER 70903 USING "#,X,K,K";Ndig$;Count$[1;VAL(Ndig$)]
270 ENTER @Dmm;Rdgs(*)
280 ENTER 70903;Lf$
290 END

64 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Comments • Once the INIT command completes, the readings in shared memory
are available to any device. The readings at this time are in 32-bit
REAL format.

• When the shared memory state is on (MEM:VME:STAT ON), all

readings are stored in VME memory regardless of the number of
readings taken.

• The VME memory location and memory size can be specified in

decimal or hexadecimal. Configuration of the VME memory card
should be covered in the manual which came with the card.

• In this program, the readings retrieved from shared memory are

64-bit REAL numbers in the IEEE 488.2-1987 Definite Length
Arbitrary Block format. Page 58 contains an example which
describes the Arbitrary Block format and additional format
information is located in Chapter 4.

• When running HP BASIC, an array dimension can have no more

than 32767 elements. Thus, to store 200,000 readings, a
two-dimensional array is declared.

Chapter 3 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Checking for Errors
The following program is a method of checking for errors as you program the
multimeter. The program monitors the multimeter’s Standard Event Status
Register for an error condition. If no errors occur, the multimeter functions as
programmed. If errors do occur, the multimeter interrupts the computer and the
error codes and messages are read from the multimeter error queue.

The computer commands shown are for an HP 9000 Series 200/300

computer running HP BASIC and controlling the multimeter over HP-IB.
10 !Call computer subprogram "Errmsg" if a multimeter programming error
20 !occurs. Enable the computer to respond to an interrupt from the multimeter.
30 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg
40 ENABLE INTR 7;2
50 !Unmask the Event Status bit in the multimeter’s Status Byte register.
60 !Unmask the multimeter error conditions in its Standard Event Status
70 !register.
80 OUTPUT 70903;"*SRE 32"
90 OUTPUT 70903;"*ESE 60"
100 !At this point, the multimeter is programmed for the intended application.
110 OUTPUT 70903;"...
120 OUTPUT 70903;"...
130 !Allow the computer time to respond if an error occurs during the
140 !multimeter configuration or measurement. Process the measurement
150 !data if no error occurs.
160 WAIT 2
170 ENTER 70903;...
180 PRINT ...
190 END
200 !When an error occurs, clear the multimeter to regain control. Execute a
210 !Serial Poll to clear the service request bit in the Status Byte register.
220 !Read all error messages in the multimeter error queue. Clear all bits in
230 !the multimeter Standard Event Status Register.
240 SUB Errmsg
250 DIM Message$[256]
260 CLEAR 70903
270 B=SPOLL(70903)
280 REPEAT
290 OUTPUT 70903;"SYST:ERR?"
300 ENTER 70903;Code,Message$
310 PRINT Code,Message$
320 UNTIL Code=0
330 OUTPUT 70903;"*CLS"
340 STOP
350 SUBEND

66 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Comments • If you have an HP 75000 Series B mainframe with a keyboard, errors
can be monitored by selecting "Monitor" from the multimeter menu.
If errors occur when the program executes, the "err" annunciator will
appear. Entering SYST:ERR? repeatedly from the keyboard reads
all of the messages in the error queue.

• An overload condition (for example, reading = +9.900000E+037)

sets the Device Dependent Error bit in the Standard Event Status
Register. In this program, this condition interrupts the computer
which then calls the subprogram. However, an overload does not
generate an error message so 0 "No Error" is displayed.

• The B-size VXIbus Mainframe User’s Manual contains detailed

information on the Status and Standard Event Status Registers.

Chapter 3 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Synchronizing the Multimeter with a Computer
This is an example of how an HP 9000 Series 200/300 computer can
monitor the multimeter to determine when data is available. This allows the
computer to perform other functions while the multimeter is making
measurements. When the readings are available, the computer stops its
current function and enters the data.
10 !Dimension a computer array to store the readings.
20 DIM Rdgs(1:15)
30 !Clear and reset the multimeter. Unmask the Message Available (MAV)
40 !bit (4) in the Status Byte Register.
50 OUTPUT 70903;"*CLS"
60 OUTPUT 70903;"*RST"
70 OUTPUT 70903;"*SRE 16"
80 !Configure the multimeter for DC voltage measurements. Make 5 scans
90 !through the channel list with each scan 5 seconds apart. Store the
100 !readings in mainframe memory.
110 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:VOLT:DC (@104:106)"
120 OUTPUT 70903;" TRIG:COUN 5"
130 OUTPUT 70903;" TRIG:DEL 5"
140 OUTPUT 70903;"INIT"
150 OUTPUT 70903;"FETC?"
160 !Monitor the message available bit. Have the computer perform another
170 !function (e.g. display a message) until the bit indicating a reading is
180 !available is set. Enter and display the readings.
190 WHILE NOT BIT (SPOLL(70903),4)
200 DISP "WAITING FOR DATA"
210 WAIT 1
220 DISP ""
230 WAIT 1
240 END WHILE
250 ENTER 70903;Rdgs(*)
260 FOR I=1 TO 15 STEP 3
270 PRINT Rdgs(I),Rdgs(I+1),Rdgs(I+2)
280 NEXT I
290 END

Comments • Readings are not fetched from memory until all scans and all
measurements have completed.
• The message available bit (MAV) is set when the first reading
retrieved from memory enters the output buffer.
• Only the data from one command can be in the output buffer or in
mainframe memory. Synchronizing the computer with the
multimeter in this manner ensures the data is entered into the
computer before it is overwritten by data from another command.

68 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Additional Measurement Functions
The following MEASure and CONFigure statements can be substituted into
the example programs to make measurements other than DC voltage.

Additional Stand-Alone The following statements can be substituted into the program “Making a
Multimeter Functions Single Measurement” on page 42.

!AC voltage.
OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:VOLT:AC?"

!4-wire resistance.
OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:FRES?"

!4-wire thermistor (type = 2252, 5000, 10000).

OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:TEMP? FTH,type"

!4-wire RTD (type = 85, 92).

OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:TEMP? FRTD,type"

The following statements can be substituted into the programs where the
faceplate terminals are used to make multiple reading bursts or multiple
burst measurements.
!AC voltage.
OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:VOLT:AC"

!4-wire resistance.
OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:FRES"

!4-wire thermistor (type = 2252, 5000, 10000).

OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:TEMP FTH,type"

!4-wire RTD (type = 85, 92).

OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:TEMP FRTD,type"

Additional Scanning The following statements can be substituted into the program “Scanning a
Multimeter Functions Channel List” on page 46.

!AC voltage.
OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:VOLT:AC? (@channel_list)"

!2-wire resistance.
OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:RES? (@channel_list)"

!4-wire resistance (channels available are 00 through 07).

OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:FRES? (@channel_list)"

!Thermocouple (type = B, E, J, K, N14, N28, R, S, T).

OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:TEMP? TC,type,(@channel_list)"

Chapter 3 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 !2-wire thermistor (type = 2252, 5000, 10000).
OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:TEMP? THER,type,(@channel_list)"

!4-wire thermistor (type = 2252, 5000, 10000)

!Channels available are 00 through 07.
OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:TEMP? FTH,type,(@channel_list)"

!2-wire RTD (type = 85, 92).

OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:TEMP? RTD,type,(@channel_list)"

!4-wire RTD (type = 85, 92)

!Channels available are 00 through 07.
OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:TEMP? FRTD,type,(@channel_list)"

The following statements can be substituted into the programs where the
multimeter configuration is set by CONFigure (and low-level commands).
!AC voltage.
OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:VOLT:AC (@channel_list)"

!2-wire resistance.
OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:RES (@channel_list)"

!4-wire resistance (channels available are 00 through 07).

OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:FRES (@channel_list)"

!Thermocouple (type = B, E, J, K, N14, N28, R, S, T).

OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:TEMP TC,type,(@channel_list)"

!2-wire thermistor (type = 2252, 5000, 10000).

OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:TEMP THER,type,(@channel_list)"

!4-wire thermistor (type = 2252, 5000, 10000)

!Channels available are 00 through 07.
OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:TEMP FTH,type,(@channel_list)"

!2-wire RTD (type = 85, 92).

OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:TEMP RTD,type,(@channel_list)"

!4-wire RTD (type = 85, 92).

!Channels available are 00 through 07.
OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:TEMP FRTD,type,(@channel_list)"

Note The HP E1326B/E1411B multimeter also makes strain gage measurements.

Refer to the HP E1355A - E1358A Strain Gage Multiplexers User’s Manual
for example programs.

70 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Additional Function This is an example of how to setup scanning when using an HP E1345A
Using the HP E1345A multiplexer configured as a switchbox and the HP E1326B multimeter used
Multiplexer with no multiplexers assigned to it. The two subprograms used in this
example are Scan_100µsec and Scan_10µsec. Configuration for this
example is as follows:

Connect two cables as:

• Multimeter’s "Ext Trig" to "Trig Out" on the E1406 or E1300/E1301.

• Multimeter’s "VM Compl" to "Trig In" on the E1406 or E1300/E1301.

The two different subprograms are used to demonstrate a more effective
method of scanning (Scan_100µs) and a less effective method of scanning
(Scan_10µs). Comments follow the program and subprograms providing
information about the instruments execution.

Scan_100µs demonstrates the multimeter set for an aperture of 100µs and

achieves a scan rate of 123/sec in the E1300 B-size mainframe. Whereas,
Scan_10µs demonstrates the multimeter set for an aperture of 10 µs and
achieves a decrease in scanning speed.
10 !Define I/O paths.
20 !
30 ASSIGN @Sys TO 70900
40 ASSIGN @Dvm TO 70903
50 ASSIGN @Sw TO 70916
60 !
70 !Setup for timeouts and errors.
80 !
90 ON TIMEOUT 7,5 GOTO End
100 ON ERROR RECOVER Kaboom
105 !
110 !Supply your own application code for Main.
120 !
130 Main
140 PRINT "Checking for E13xx_errors at the end of the program"
150 E13xx_errors
160 !
170 !Subprogram Kaboom.
180 !
190 Kaboom:PRINT ""
200 PRINT ERRM$
210 PRINT "Checking for E13xx Errors as a BASIC Error has occurred"
220 E13xx_errors
230 End:END
240 !
250 !Subprogram to read all errors from E13xx instruments.
260 !
270 SUB E13xx_errors
280 .
.
.
300 SUBEND
Continued on Next Page

Chapter 3 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 310 !
320 !Subprogram Scan_100µs.
330 !
340 SUB Scan_100us
350 COM @Sys,@Dvm,@Sw
360 DIM Readings(0:15)
370 !
380 !Clear and reset multimeter.
390 !
400 CLEAR @Dvm
410 OUTPUT @Dvm"*RST;*CLS;*OPC?"
420 ENTER @Dvm;A
430 !
440 !Clear and reset switch.
450 !
460 CLEAR @Sw
470 OUTPUT @Sw;"*RST;*CLS;*OPC?"
480 ENTER @Sw;A
490 !
500 !Send commands to multimeter.
510 !
520 OUTPUT @Dvm;"CONF:VOLT:DC 11"
530 OUTPUT @Dvm;"VOLT:APER 100E-6"
540 OUTPUT @Dvm;"CAL:ZERO:AUTO ONCE"
550 OUTPUT @Dvm;"TRIG:SOUR EXT;COUNT 16"
560 OUTPUT @Dvm;"*OPC?"
570 ENTER @Dvm;A
580 OUTPUT @Dvm;"INIT"
590 !
600 !Send commands to switch.
610 !
620 OUTPUT @Sw;"OUTP ON"
630 OUTPUT @Sw;"TRIG:SOUR EXT"
640 OUTPUT @Sw;"SCAN:MODE VOLT"
650 OUTPUT @Sw;"SCAN:PORT ABUS"
660 OUTPUT @Sw;"SCAN (@100:115)"
670 OUTPUT @Sw;"*OPC?"
680 ENTER @Sw;A
690 !
700 !Get readings.
710 !
720 Start=TIMEDATE
730 OUTPUT @Sw;"INIT"
740 OUTPUT @Dvm;"FETCH?"
750 ENTER @Dvm;Readings(*)
760 Stop=TIMEDATE
765 PRINT "Scan Rate with Multimeter Aperture at 100us ";16/(Stop-Start)
770 SUBEND
780 !
790 !Subprogram Scan_10µs.
800 !
810 SUB Scan_10us
820 COM @Sys,@Dvm,@Sw
830 DIM Readings(0:15)
840 !
Continued on Next Page

72 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 850 !Clear and reset multimeter.
860 !
870 CLEAR @Dvm
880 OUTPUT @Dvm;"*RST;*CLS;*OPC?"
890 ENTER @Dvm;A
900 !
910 !Clear and reset switch.
920 !
930 CLEAR @Sw
940 OUTPUT @Sw;"*RST;*CLS;*OPC?"
950 ENTER @Sw;A
960 !
970 !Send commands to multimeter.
980 !
990 OUTPUT @Dvm;"CONF:VOLT:DC 11"
1000 OUTPUT @Dvm;"VOLT:APER 10E-6"
1010 OUTPUT @Dvm;"CAL:ZERO:AUTO ONCE"
1020 OUTPUT @Dvm;"TRIG:SOUR EXT;COUNT 16"
1030 OUTPUT @Dvm;"*OPC?"
1040 ENTER @Dvm;A
1050 OUTPUT @Dvm;"INIT"
1060 !
1070 !Send commands to switch.
1080 !
1090 OUTPUT @Sw;"OUTP ON"
1100 OUTPUT @Sw;"TRIG:SOUR EXT"
1110 OUTPUT @Sw;"SCAN:MODE VOLT"
1120 OUTPUT @Sw;"SCAN:PORT ABUS"
1130 OUTPUT @Sw;"SCAN (@100:115)"
1140 OUTPUT @Sw;"*OPC?"
1150 ENTER @Sw;A
1160 !
1170 !Get readings.
1180 !
1190 Start=TIMEDATE
1200 OUTPUT @Sw;"INIT"
1210 OUTPUT @Dvm;"FETCH?"
1220 ENTER @Dvm;Readings(*)
1230 Stop=TIMEDATE
1240 PRINT "Scan Rate with Multimeter Aperture at 10us ";16/(Stop-Start)
1250 SUBEND

Results of this program are as follows:

Scan Rate with Multimeter Aperture at 100µs: 123.072300469

Scan Rate with Multimeter Aperture at 10µs: 4.48178352225

Checking for E13xx Errors at the end of the program:

DVM ERROR: "No error"
SYSTEM ERROR: "No error"
SWITCH ERROR: "No error"

Chapter 3 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Notes

74 Using the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 4
Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B
Multimeter

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the parameters which configure the multimeter and
helps you determine settings to optimize performance. Information on
triggering the multimeter and on saving multimeter configurations in
memory is also included.

The chapter is divided into the following sections:

• Using MEASure and CONFigure Commands . . . . . . . . . . . Page 76
• How to Make Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 78
• Data Formats and Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 80
• Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 86
• Multimeter Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 91
• Triggering the Multimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 101
• Saving Multimeter Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 114

Note Throughout this chapter, the HP E1326B/E1411B multimeter is referred to

as a "scanning multimeter" or a "stand-alone multimeter".

"Scanning" implies that one or more multiplexers are used with the
multimeter and are part of the same instrument (i.e. same HP-IB secondary
address).

"Stand-alone" means the multimeter is the only device at that secondary

address.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Using MEASure and CONFigure Commands
Each time the multimeter makes a measurement, it does so from a
configuration based on several parameters. The easiest way to set these
parameters is with the MEASure and CONFigure commands:
MEASure:measurement?
[range|AUTO|DEF|MIN|MAX[,resolution|DEF|MIN|MAX]][,(@channel_list)]

CONFigure:measurement
[range|AUTO|DEF|MIN|MAX[,resolution|DEF|MIN|MAX]][,(@channel_list)]

MEASure:TEMPerature? transducer,type[,(@channel_list)]

CONFigure:TEMPerature transducer,type[,(@channel_list)]

Executing these high-level commands is equivalent to setting up the

multimeter with the commands shown in Table 4-1 on page 77. Note that
specifying a channel list identifies a scanning multimeter. No channel list
identifies a stand-alone multimeter.

Note If a channel list is the only parameter specified in the MEASure or

CONFigure command, it must be separated from the command header by a
space, rather than a comma (e.g. MEAS:VOLT:DC? (@100)).

76 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table 4-1. Configurations Using MEASure and CONFigure

Parameter Command Setting

Function As specified.
Range VOLTage:RANGe As specified or autorange.
RESistance:RANGe

Resolution VOLTage:RESolution As specified or a function of range and aperture or

RESistance:RESolution integration time.
Aperture Time VOLTage:APERture 16.7 ms (60 Hz), 20 ms (50 Hz), or based on the
RESistance:APERture specified resolution.
Integration Time VOLTage:NPLC 1 power line cycle (PLC) or based on the specified
RESistance:NPLC resolution.
Autozero CALibration:ZERO:AUTO ON; autozero is performed after every measurement.

Offset Compensation RESistance:OCOMpensated OFF; resistance measurements only.

Trigger Source TRIGger:SOURce IMM; trigger signal is always true. Measurement is taken
when multimeter goes to Trigger State.
Number of Triggers TRIGger:COUNt 1; number of triggers issued or number of scans through
or Number of Scans channel list before multimeter returns to Idle State.
Trigger Delay TRIGger:DELay AUTO - delays are 0 seconds for DC voltage and
resistance, 0.5 seconds for AC voltage.
Readings per Trigger SAMPle:COUNt 1; number of measurements taken when trigger is
received.
Sample Period SAMPle:SOURce IMM; period between measurements or the period
between FET multiplexer scans.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How to Make Measurements
This section explains when you should use MEASure or CONFigure to
configure the multimeter. It also shows you how to make measurements
once the configuration is set.

Using MEASure When MEASure is used, the measurement is taken automatically after the
configuration is set. For example, executing MEASure as:
MEAS:VOLT:DC? 0.91,0.953E-6,(@100:104)

makes measurements on channels 100 through 104 after setting the function
to DC voltage, the range to 0.91 V, the resolution to 0.953 µV, and the
remainder of the parameters as shown in Table 4-1 on page 77.

Because the measurement is taken immediately, variations to the multimeter

configuration are limited to the parameters within the MEASure command
(range, resolution, channel list).

Using CONFigure Use CONFigure for applications requiring a configuration different from
that available with MEASure. CONFigure does not make a measurement
after setting the configuration. Any of the low-level commands
(see Table 4-1 on page 77) can be used to change selected parameters
before a measurement is made.

Assume an application requires the following configuration:

• 4-wire resistance measurements

• 1861 ohm range
• Maximum (best) resolution
• Measure four multiplexer channels
• Offset compensated measurements
• Three scans (passes) through the channel list

MEASure cannot be used since it turns offset compensation off

(RES:OCOM OFF). MEASure also sets the multimeter to make one scan
(TRIGger:COUNt 1), while the application requires three scans.

By setting the configuration with CONFigure, the low-level commands

RESistance:OCOMpensated and TRIGger:COUNt can be used to turn offset
compensation ON and set the desired number of scans:
CONF:FRES 1861,MAX,(@100:103)
RES:OCOM ON
TRIG:COUN 3

78 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Making Measurements To make a measurement the multimeter must be in the wait-for-trigger state
When Using CONFigure when a trigger signal occurs. The MEASure command automatically places
the multimeter in the "wait state" after setting the configuration. When
CONFigure is used, the multimeter must be placed in the wait state with the
command:
READ? (readings are sent to the output buffer)
or
INIT[:IMMediate] (readings are stored in memory)

These commands follow CONFigure as shown below:

CONF:FRES 1861,MAX,(@100:103)
RES:OCOM ON
TRIG:COUN 3
READ?
CONF:FRES 1861,MAX,(@100:103)
RES:OCOM ON
TRIG:COUN 3
INIT

Note READ? and INIT will make measurements upon execution if TRIG:SOUR IMM
(trigger signal always true) remains set. If the trigger source is changed
following the CONFigure command, execution of the READ? or INIT
commands will place the multimeter in the wait-for-trigger state; however, a
measurement will not be made until a trigger from the specified source occurs.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Data Formats and Destinations
The HP E1326B/E1411B multimeter allows you to specify the
measurement (data) format and reading destination parameters which affect
throughput speed. This section identifies the formats available and shows
you how to display and store measurements.

Data Formats The multimeter data formats are selected with the command:
FORMat[:DATA] <type> [,<length>]

The formats (and lengths) are shown in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2. Multimeter Data Formats

Type Representation Bytes/Reading

ASCII +-1.234567E+-123 15

REAL 64 # <non-zero digit> <block length> <8-bit data bytes> 8

REAL 32 # <non-zero digit> <block length> <8-bit data bytes> 4

REAL 64 and REAL 32 numbers are transferred to the computer in the IEEE 488.2-1987
Definite Length Arbitrary Block format. Data in this format is preceded by a header
consisting of # <non-zero digit> <block length>. <non-zero digit> indicates the number of
digits representing <block length>. <block length> indicates the number of 8-bit data bytes
which follow. The following examples show how to interpret the Arbitrary block header.

REAL, 32 #14 <4 bytes> 1 reading

#240 <40 bytes> 10 readings
#44000 <4000 bytes> 1,000 readings

REAL, 64 #18 <8 bytes> 1 reading

#280 <80 bytes> 10 readings
#48000 <8000 bytes> 1,000 readings

The default format is ASCII. Readings in ASCII are followed by a comma (,).
A line feed (LF) and End-Or-Identify (EOI) follow the last reading in all
formats.

Specifying a Format The following program segment shows you how to select a data format.
Chapter 3 contains an example on selecting a format and entering data with the
definite length arbitrary block header into an HP Series 200/300 computer.
FORM REAL,64
CONF:FRES 1861,MAX,(@100:103)
RES:OCOM ON
TRIG:COUN 3
READ?

80 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Overload Indications The multimeter indicates an overload condition (input greater than the
selected range can measure) by displaying or storing:

±9.900000E+037

for the measurement. For temperature measurements:

9.910000E+037
indicates an overload condition.

An overload sets the Device Dependent Error bit in the Standard Event
Status Register. However, the overload does not generate an error message.

Reading Measurements can be displayed on the HP E1301A mainframe, returned to

Destinations the output buffer and entered into a computer, or stored in memory. This
section explains how a reading destination is selected.

Reading Destination The data formats available depend on the reading destination. Table 4-3
vs. Data Format shows the data formats available for each reading destination.

Table 4-3. Reading Destination vs. Data Format

Destination Formats

Display ASCII / REAL 64-bit / REAL 32-bit

Output Buffer ASCII / REAL 64-bit / REAL 32-bit

Mainframe Memory/ REAL 32-bit

VME Memory Card

Destination = When a measurement is made by entering commands from the HP E1301A

Mainframe Display mainframe front panel, the reading is displayed on the front panel.
Readings are also displayed when commands are sent from a computer and
the multimeter’s monitor mode is on.

Although REAL,64 and REAL,32 are accepted formats, readings displayed

in those formats will not resemble the measured values.

Destination = Computer When multimeter measurements are made using:

MEASure:measurement? ...
or
READ?

the readings are available to the computer via the output buffer. The
following examples show how data (ASCII format) is entered into an
HP 9000 Series 200/300 computer using HP BASIC.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example: Entering 10 !Declare computer array to store 5 readings.
Data into the Computer
(measurements using 20 REAL Dc_rdgs(1:5)
MEASure) 30 !Configure multimeter and take the measurements.
40 OUTPUT 70903;"MEAS:VOLT:DC? (@100:104)"
50 !Enter readings into the computer.
60 ENTER 70903;Dc_rdgs(*)
70 !Display readings on computer.
80 PRINT Dc_rdgs(*)
90 END

Example: Entering 10 !Declare computer array to store 12 readings.

Data into the Computer
(measurements using 20 REAL Ohm_rdgs(1:12)
READ?) 30 !Configure the multimeter.
40 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:FRES 1861,MAX,(@100:103)"
50 OUTPUT 70903;" RES:OCOM ON"
60 OUTPUT 70903;" TRIG:COUN 3"
70 !Put multimeter in wait-for-trigger state; take readings.
80 OUTPUT 70903;"READ?"
90 !Enter readings into the computer.
100 ENTER 70903;Ohm_rdgs(*)
110 !Display readings on the computer.
120 PRINT Ohm_rdgs (*)
130 END

The data returned by commands such as MEASure or READ? must be

entered into the computer before another command is executed. Otherwise,
Error -410,“Query Interrupted” occurs and the data will be overwritten if
data is generated by the next command.

Destination = A few words about mainframe memory:

Mainframe Memory
1. The E1301A memory is built into the mainframe whereas the
E1405A/E1406A memory is not built-in.

2. Data is stored in mainframe and shared memory by executing the

INIT command.

3. Reading rates are increased when the readings are stored in

mainframe memory. Storing readings in memory also ensures that
the sample rate is maintained at a constant value.

82 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Data stored in memory overwrites the data from a previous command.

5. Each reading stored in memory is four bytes (REAL 32-bit). This

format cannot be changed.

6. Each multimeter instrument within the HP 75000 Series B or Series C

mainframe is allocated enough memory to store a minimum of
100 readings.

If greater than 100 readings are requested, the mainframe multiplies

the TRIGger:COUNt setting by the SAMPle:COUNt setting to
determine the exact number. If enough memory is available, an
additional amount is allocated to the multimeter and the readings are
stored. If enough memory is not available, an error message occurs
and the command is aborted.

The number of additional readings which can be stored in memory

depends on the amount of memory in your system and on the number
of instruments which use the memory.

7. The memory allocated to the multimeter above the amount required

to store 100 readings remains dedicated to that multimeter until *RST
is executed or until power is cycled. Once de-allocated, the memory
is available to any instrument.

Example: Storing To store measurements in mainframe memory, execute:

Readings in Mainframe
INIT[:IMMediate]
Memory
following the CONFigure command (or any applicable low-level commands).
10 !Configure the multimeter.
20 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:FRES 1861,MAX,(@100:103)"
30 OUTPUT 70903;" RES:OCOM ON"
40 OUTPUT 70903;" TRIG:COUN 3"
50 !Place the multimeter in the wait-for-trigger state, store the readings
60 !in memory.
70 OUTPUT 70903;"INIT"

Retrieving Data From Data stored in mainframe memory is retrieved using:

Mainframe Memory
FETCh?

Once the data is fetched, it is available to the computer via the output
buffer. Refer to the next example.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example: Retrieving 10 !Declare computer array to store 12 readings.
Data from Memory
20 REAL Ohm_rdgs(1:12)
30 !Configure the multimeter.
40 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:FRES 1861,MAX,(@100:103)"
50 OUTPUT 70903;" RES:OCOM ON"
60 OUTPUT 70903;" TRIG:COUN 3"
70 !Place the multimeter in the trigger state, store the readings in
80 !mainframe memory.
90 OUTPUT 70903;"INIT"
100 !Retrieve readings from mainframe memory.
110 OUTPUT 70903;"FETCh?"
120 !Enter readings into computer.
130 ENTER 70903;Ohm_rdgs(*)
140 !Display readings on computer.
150 PRINT Ohm_rdgs (*)
160 END

Destination = Multimeter measurements can also be stored in memory shared by the

Shared Memory VXIbus system (VME Memory Card). The commands used to specify the
memory location and direct the readings to shared memory are:
MEMory:VME:ADDRess <address>
MEMory:VME:SIZE <bytes>
MEMory:VME:STATe <mode>

Chapter 3 contains an example on storing readings in shared memory.

The MEMory command is covered in Chapter 5.

84 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Reading The reading destination you select will depend on your application.
Destination However, consider the following when selecting a destination:
Summary 1. Use READ? or MEASure? to return readings to the output buffer
when throughput speed is not important or when the number of
measurements is too large to store in mainframe memory.

2. Use INIT to store readings in mainframe memory when speed is

important. Use FETCh? to retrieve the readings.

3. Use the MEMory commands and INIT to store readings in shared

memory (VME memory card) when speed is important and when the
readings will not fit in mainframe memory. Use FETCh? to retrieve
the readings.

In addition to selecting a destination, you may want to determine

beforehand the number of readings that can be saved in the B-size
mainframe RAM. Consider the following when determining the number of
readings that can be saved:

• Select your System Instrument.

• Send "DIAG:RDIS:CRE? MAX".

• Divide the number returned by four (4)

(this determines the approximate number of readings that can be saved).

You can also determine if a certain number of readings can be stored in the
B-size mainframe RAM by doing the following:

• Select the E1326B multimeter.

• Send "SAMP:COUNt nnn" command

(where nnn is the number of readings).

• Look for an "OUT OF MEMORY" error message

(if the message is NOT generated, then nnn readings can be stored).

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Measurement Functions
The HP E1326B/E1411B multimeter can make the following measurements:
– DC Voltage
– RMS AC Voltage
– 2-Wire Resistance
– 4-Wire Resistance
– Temperature

Note The HP E1326B/E1411B multimeter also makes 1⁄4 bridge, 1⁄2 bridge, and
full bridge strain measurements. Refer to the HP E1355A - E1358A Strain
Gage Multiplexer User’s Manual for descriptions of these functions.

DC Voltage The multimeter can measure DC voltages up to 300 V (170 V with

Measurements multiplexers), with resolution down to approximately 30 nV depending on the
range and aperture or integration time. Selectable integration times of 1 or 16
power line cycles (PLC) provide normal mode rejection for measurements in
the presence of noise.

The DC voltage function is specified as:

VOLTage:DC

and generally appears in the MEASure and CONFigure commands as:

MEAS:VOLT:DC? ...
CONF:VOLT:DC ...

RMS AC Voltage The multimeter can measure RMS AC voltages up to 450 Vpeak
Measurements (170 Vpeak with multiplexers, 15 Vpeak with FET multiplexers), at
frequencies from 20 Hz to 10 kHz. Measurement resolution down to
approximately 30 nV is achieved with the appropriate range and aperture
or integration time settings. The AC measurements are AC-coupled. This
means that for an AC signal with a DC offset, only the AC amplitude is
measured. The DC offset is prevented (blocked) from reaching the
measurement circuitry of the multimeter.

The multimeter uses a true RMS converter for AC voltage measurements.

This allows accurate measurement of voltages that are noisy, distorted, or
non-sinusoidal such as square waves, triangle waves, sawtooths, and so on.

86 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The AC voltage function is specified as:
VOLTage:AC

and generally appears in the MEASure and CONFigure commands as:

MEAS:VOLT:AC? ... [(@channel_list)]
CONF:VOLT:AC ... [(@channel_list)]

Resistance The multimeter can measure resistance up to 1.048 MΩ. Measurement

Measurements resolution down to 60 µΩ is achieved with the appropriate range and
aperture or integration time settings. Measurements can be made using a
2-wire or 4-wire configuration.

How Resistance is The multimeter measures resistance by turning on an internal current source
Measured which induces a voltage across the unknown resistance. The induced
voltage is measured and is divided by the amount of current applied. The
result is the "measured" resistance (resistance = voltage/current).

Table 4-4 shows the amount of current applied to the unknown resistance
for a given range. Consider that the current flowing through the resistance
will cause a certain amount of self-heating, thus changing the resistance.
The effects of self-heating can be minimized by selecting a higher range
since less current is applied. However, measurement resolution is also
decreased.

Table 4-4. Current Source Values

Range Current

256 Ω 488 mA
2048 Ω 488 µA
16384 Ω 61 µA
131072 Ω 61 µA
1048576 Ω 7.6 µA

Two-Wire vs. Four-Wire The multimeter uses separate "sense" and "source" terminals when making
Measurements resistance measurements. The sense terminals measure (sense) the input
signal. The source terminals route current from the current source through
the unknown resistance. When the scanning multimeter makes a 2-wire
resistance measurement, the multiplexer connects these terminals together.
Thus, the input is sensed and the current is sourced through essentially the
same terminals. When the stand-alone multimeter is used, you must
connect the sense and source terminals to the resistance being measured.
This is a 4-wire configuration and the measurement must be specified
accordingly. Only 4-wire measurements can be made with the stand-alone
multimeter. Two-wire and 4-wire measurements can be made with the
scanning multimeter.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Two-Wire Two-wire measurements are useful in applications where test lead
Measurements resistance is not critical. Because the multimeter measures the total
resistance between its terminals, lead resistance that is large relative to the
unknown resistance will cause inaccurate measurements. Thus, for all
resistance measurements and especially those on the lower ranges, the leads
should be as short as possible.

Two-wire measurements are specified as:

RESistance

This function appears in the MEASure and CONFigure commands as:

MEAS:RES? ...(@channel_list)
CONF:RES ...(@channel_list)

Four-Wire For applications which require accurate resistance measurements or where

Measurements long test leads are used, the 4-wire configuration should be used. In the
4-wire configuration, errors due to test lead resistance are eliminated since
only the voltage induced across the unknown resistance is measured.

Four-wire measurements are specified as:

FRESistance

This function appears in the MEASure and CONFigure commands as:

MEAS:FRES?...[(@channel_list)]
CONF:FRES ...[(@channel_list)]

Channel Pairs Four-wire measurements with multiplexers use channel pairs. Channel pairs
on the HP E1345A 16-channel multiplexer, for example, are channels 00 and
08, 01 and 09, 02 and 10, ... 07 and 15. The lower channel in the channel pair
(00, 01, 02) is the sense channel. The higher channel (08, 09, 10) is the source
channel. When specifying a channel list, the lower "sense" channels are
specified.

Temperature The multimeter can make temperature measurements using specific

Measurements thermistors, thermocouples, and RTDs.

Thermistor The thermistor types supported are 2252 Ω, 5000 Ω, and 10000 Ω. Use
Measurements thermistors that match the Omega 440xx series temperature response
curves. Thermistor measurements can be made in either a 2-wire or 4-wire
configuration. Two-wire measurements require the scanning multimeter.

Two-wire thermistor measurements are specified as:

TEMP THERmistor,type

88 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 This function appears in the MEASure and CONFigure commands as:

MEAS:TEMP? THER,type,(@channel_list)
CONF:TEMP THER,type,(@channel_list)

Four-wire measurements are specified as:

TEMP FTHermistor,type

This function appears in the MEASure and CONFigure commands as:

MEAS:TEMP? FTH,type[,(@channel_list)]
CONF:TEMP FTH,type[,(@channel_list)]

Thermocouple Thermocouple measurements require the HP E1344A, E1347A, E1353A, or

Measurements HP E1476A multiplexers which are thermocouple compensated. The
thermocouple types supported are B, E, J, K, N14, N28, R, S, and T.

Thermocouple measurements are specified as:

TEMP TCouple,type

and appear in the MEASure and CONFigure commands as:

MEAS:TEMP? TC,type,(@channel_list)
CONF:TEMP TC,type,(@channel_list)

You can also measure the temperature of the reference thermistor on the
HP E1344A, E1347A, E1353A, or E1476A multiplexers as shown below:
MEAS:TEMP? THER,5000,(@nn93)

where nn is the multiplexer card number.

RTD Measurements The RTD types supported are 85 (alpha = 0.00385) and 92 (alpha = 0.00392).
RTD measurements can be made in either a 2-wire or 4-wire configuration.
Two-wire measurements require the scanning multimeter.

Two-wire RTD measurements are specified as:

TEMP RTD,type

The function appears in the MEASure and CONFigure commands as:

MEAS:TEMP? RTD,type,(@channel_list)
CONF:TEMP RTD,type,(@channel_list)

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Four-wire measurements are specified as:

TEMP FRTD,type

The function appears in the MEASure and CONFigure commands as:

MEAS:TEMP? FRTD,type[,(@channel_list)]
CONF:TEMP FRTD,type[,(@channel_list)]

Note When making temperature measurements with the MEASure command, the
question mark (?) must be inserted between TEMP and the temperature
transducer used. Also, if a channel list immediately follows the transducer, it
must be separated by a comma (,) (e.g. MEAS:TEMP? THER,5000,(@100)).

Specifying a The measurement functions described previously are represented by the

Function "measurement" parameter in the MEASure and CONFigure commands:

MEASure:measurement?
[range|AUTO|DEF|MIN|MAX[,resolution|DEF|MIN|MAX]][,(@channel_list)]

CONFigure:measurement
[range|AUTO|DEF|MIN|MAX[,resolution|DEF|MIN|MAX]][,(@channel_list)]

When using the stand-alone multimeter, the low-level command:

FUNCtion:function

can be used to change the measurement function without causing a complete

reconfiguration of the multimeter. The stand-alone multimeter functions
which can be changed are:
VOLT:DC
VOLT:AC
FRESistance

The next example shows you how to change from a DC voltage

measurement to a 4-wire resistance measurement.

90 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example: Changing 10 !Configure for DC voltage measurement.
Measurement
Functions with 20 CONF:VOLT:DC
FUNCtion 30 !Put multimeter in wait-for-trigger state, take reading.
40 READ?
50 !Enter reading into computer.
60 !Change function to 4-wire resistance.
70 FUNC:FRES
80 !Put multimeter in wait-for-trigger state, take reading.
90 READ?
100 !Enter reading into computer.

In addition to the function change the range, resolution, aperture time, and
integration time for the second measurement are set to either their reset or
last programmed values. The triggering parameters remain as set by
CONFigure.

Multimeter Parameters
Many of the parameters set by MEASure, CONFigure, and low-level
commands configure the multimeter’s analog-to-digital (A/D) converter and
other portions of its measurement circuitry. These parameters include:
– range
– resolution
– aperture and integration time
– autozero
– offset compensation

This section describes these parameters. The settings are summarized in

Table 4-5 on page 92.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table 4-5. Aperture Time, Range, and Resolution Settings
Aperture Time 10 µs* 100 µs 2.5 ms 16.7 ms 20 ms 267 ms 320 ms
Integration Time (PLCs) 0.0005 0.005 0.125 1 1 16 16

DC & AC Voltage
(Using CONFigure/MEASure)

Range Range Percent

DC AC Overrange Resolution

0.113 V 0.0795 V 10% 7.629 µV 3.814 µV 0.476 µV 0.119 µV 0.119 µV 28.9 nV 28.9 nV
0.91 V 0.63 V 10% 61.035 µV 30.517 µV 3.814 µV 0.953 µV 0.953 µV 0.238 µV 0.238 µV
7.27 V 5.09 V 10% 488.281 µV 244.14 µV 30.517 µV 7.629 µV 7.629 µV 1.907 µV 1.907 µV
58.1 V 40.7 V 10% 3.906 mV 1.953 mV 244.14 µV 61.035 µV 61.035 µV 15.258 µV 15.258 µV
300 V 300 V 0% 122.07 µV 122.07 µV
31.25 mV 15.625 mV 1.953 mV 488.28 µV 488.28 µV

DC & AC Voltage
(Using RANGe)

Range Range Percent

DC AC Overrange Resolution

0.125 V 0.0875 V 0% 7.629 µV 3.814 µV 0.476 µV 0.119 µV 0.119 µV 28.9 nV 28.9 nV

1.0 V 0.7 V 0% 61.035 µV 30.517 µV 3.814 µV 0.953 µV 0.953 µV 0.238 µV 0.238 µV
8.0 V 5.6 V 0% 488.281 µV 244.14 µV 30.517 µV 7.629 µV 7.629 µV 1.907 µV 1.907 µV
64.0 V 44.8 V 0% 3.906 mV 1.953 mV 244.14 µV 61.035 µV 61.035 µV 15.258 µV 15.258 µV
300 V 300 V 0% 122.07 µV 122.07 µV
31.25 mV 15.625 mV 1.953 mV 488.28 µV 488.28 µV

2-Wire & 4-Wire Resistance

(Using CONFigure/MEASure)

Percent
Range Overrange Resolution

232 Ω 10% 15.625 mΩ 7.812 mΩ 0.976 mΩ 244 µΩ 244 µΩ 61 µΩ 61 µΩ

1861 Ω 10% 125 mΩ 62.5 mΩ 7.812 mΩ 1.95 mΩ 1.95 mΩ 488 µΩ 488 µΩ
14894 Ω 10% 1Ω 0.5 Ω 62.5 mΩ 15.6 mΩ 15.6 mΩ 3.9 mΩ 3.9 mΩ
119156 Ω 10% 8Ω 4Ω 0.5 Ω 125 mΩ 125 mΩ 31.2 mΩ 31.2 mΩ
10%
1048576 Ω 64 Ω 32 Ω 4Ω 1Ω 1Ω 250 mΩ 250 mΩ

2-Wire & 4-Wire Resistance

(Using RANGe)

Percent
Range Overrange Resolution

256 Ω 0% 15.625 mΩ 7.812 mΩ 0.976 mΩ 244 µΩ 244 µΩ 61 µΩ 61 µΩ

2048 Ω 0% 125 mΩ 62.5 mΩ 7.812 mΩ 1.95 mΩ 1.95 mΩ 488 µΩ 488 µΩ
16384 Ω 0% 1Ω 0.5 Ω 62.5 mΩ 15.6 mΩ 15.6 mΩ 3.9 mΩ 3.9 mΩ
131072 Ω 0% 8Ω 4Ω 0.5 Ω 125 mΩ 125 mΩ 31.2 mΩ 31.2 mΩ
0%
1048576 Ω 64 Ω 32 Ω 4Ω 1Ω 1Ω 250 mΩ 250 mΩ

Max. Readings/Second ** 13,150 3,000 350 58 49 2 1.9

Line Frequency Rejected --- --- 400 Hz 60 Hz 50/400 Hz 60 Hz 50/400 Hz
Normal Mode Rejection 0 dB 0 dB 60 dB 60 dB 60 dB 84 dB 84 dB
Bits of Resolution 14 15 18 20 20 22 22

* 10 µs aperture time is only available when a fixed range is specified.

** Reading rates are approximate and are achieved using a stand-alone multimeter, DC voltage function, fixed range,
autozero off, offset compensation off, reading stored in mainframe/command module memory. See Table 4-6 on
page 110 for the necessary sample rates.

92 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Range The range parameter sets the range of input signal levels the multimeter is
to accept and measure. Consider the following when determining a range:

1. Measurement speed is increased when a fixed range is specified.

2. The selected range should include all of the input signal levels you
expect to measure. For the best resolution, select the lowest possible
range.

3. Setting an AC voltage range changes the DC voltage range to a

corresponding value and vice versa.

4. The range must be specified before specifying a resolution. You must

also set a fixed range in order to specify an aperture time of 10 µs.

Setting the Range The DC voltage, AC voltage, and resistance ranges are given in Table 4-5
on page 92.

The percentage (%) of overrange is the amount the input can exceed the
range value shown and still be measured on that range.

The commands used to specify a range are:

MEASure:measurement?
[range|AUTO|DEF|MIN|MAX[,resolution|DEF|MIN|MAX]][,(@channel_list)]

CONFigure:measurement
[range|AUTO|DEF|MIN|MAX[,resolution|DEF|MIN|MAX]][,(@channel_list)]

VOLTage:RANGe range | MIN | MAX

RESistance:RANGe range | MIN | MAX
VOLTage:AC:RANGe range | MIN | MAX

where:
range = measurement range from Table 4-5.
AUTO = sets autorange.
DEF = sets autorange.
MIN = sets the minimum range of 0.113 Vdc / 0.0795 Vac / 232 Ω
if MEASure or CONFigure is used. Sets the minimum range of 0.125 Vdc /
0.0875 Vac / 256 Ω if range is used.
MAX = sets the maximum range of 300 V / 1048576 Ω.

If no range parameter is specified in the MEASure or CONFigure command,

autorange is set. However, to specify a MIN or MAX resolution while
autoranging, AUTO or DEF must be explicitly specified. This prevents the
MIN or MAX resolution from being interpreted as a range setting.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Autorange The default range is autorange. Autorange is the process where the
multimeter samples the input signal, and then automatically selects the
correct (lowest valid) range. Consider the following when using autorange:

1. Autoranging typically adds 150 µs to the fixed range measurement

time if it ranges up one range, or ranges down any number of ranges.
Each reading takes an additional 50 µs for each additional range-up
step. If autoranging is enabled but does not occur, approximately
100 µs is added to the fixed range measurement time. The
E1326B/E1411B automatically switches to the 10 µs aperture time
when making measurements to determine the correct range.

2. For maximum speed, group channels together which use the same
range. When the aperture time is 10 µs and autoranging is enabled
but does not occur, the measurement rate is 2380 readings/second.

3. Use autorange to simplify thermocouple, thermistor, and RTD

measurements.

Setting Autorange Autorange is set when AUTO, DEF, or no range parameter is specified in the
MEASure or CONFigure command. Autorange is also enabled and disabled
with the low-level commands:
VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO mode
RESistance:RANGe:AUTO mode

where:
mode = ON (turns autorange on) or OFF (turns autorange off).

Querying the Range The measurement range is queried with the following commands:
VOLTage:RANGe?
VOLTage:RANGe? MIN | MAX

VOLTage:AC:RANGe?
VOLTage:AC:RANGe? MIN | MAX

RESistance:RANGe?
RESistance:RANGe? MIN | MAX

Executing CONFigure? returns the range, resolution, and measurement

function set by the CONFigure command.

Note When querying the range, the ranges available with the range command
(Table 4-5) are returned. For example, if a range of 0.113 V is set with the
MEASure or CONFigure command, 0.125 is returned if the range is queried.
If 0.91 V is set, 1.0 is returned, and so on.

94 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Querying the The autorange setting is queried with the VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO? and
Autorange Setting RESistance:RANGe:AUTO? commands. See Chapter 5 for additional
information.

Resolution Resolution is the smallest change in voltage or resistance that can be

discerned. Assume, for example, a nominal resistance of 10 Ω is measured.
The reading might appear as:
1.084540E+001

If the multimeter is set for 0.976 mΩ resolution, resistance changes as small

as 0.976 mΩ will appear in the measurements.

When setting a resolution, consider the following:

1. Specify a resolution only when making measurements on a fixed

range. Otherwise, the resolution will be changed to correspond to the
range selected during autorange.

2. Resolution affects the reading rate. The better the resolution, the
lower the reading rate.

3. Setting the resolution also sets the aperture time and integration time.
Of these three parameters, the settings of the other two are based on
the one most recently set.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Setting the Resolution The resolutions for DC/AC voltage and resistance measurements are given
in Table 4-5 on page 92. Note that the resolution is specified in the units of
the measurement (volts, ohms), and not as a percentage of the measurement.

When a resolution is specified the aperture time and integration time are set
accordingly. For example, specifying a range of 232 Ω and a resolution of
0.976 mΩ sets a 2.5 ms aperture time and 0.125 PLC of integration time.

The commands used to specify resolution are:

MEASure:measurement?
[range|AUTO|DEF|MIN|MAX[,resolution|DEF|MIN|MAX]][,(@channel_list)]

CONFigure:measurement
[range|AUTO|DEF|MIN|MAX[,resolution|DEF|MIN|MAX]][,(@channel_list)]

VOLTage:RESolution resolution | MIN | MAX

RESistance:RESolution resolution | MIN | MAX

where:
resolution = value from Table 4-5 on page 92 (for the corresponding range).

DEF = defaults the resolution. This sets 1 PLC of integration time.

MIN = sets the smallest resolution number in the table (best resolution) for
the specified range.

MAX = sets the largest resolution number in the table (worst resolution)
for the specified range.

Note When autoranging, MIN or MAX are the only resolution settings which can
be specified.

Querying the The resolution is queried with the following commands. See Chapter 5 for
Resolution additional information.
VOLTage:RESolution?
VOLTage:RESolution? MIN | MAX

RESistance:RESolution?
RESistance:RESolution? MIN | MAX

Executing CONFigure? returns the resolution, range, and measurement

function set by the CONFigure command.

96 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Aperture and The aperture time or integration time is the time which the multimeter
Integration Time samples the input signal. Aperture time is expressed in seconds and
integration time is expressed in power line cycles. Integrating multimeters,
like the E1326B, may be programmed to integrate an integer number of
power line cycles (PLC). These have a common mode rejection ratio. The
common mode rejection ratio is increased by the normal mode rejection
ratio. This is known as the effective common mode and is shown as follows:
[AC common mode rejection ratio] + [Normal mode rejection ratio]

The effective common mode rejection is only for power line frequencies.
However, this is the most common noise that needs to be rejected.
Therefore, the effective common mode rejection for DC and resistance
measurements is as follows:
110 db + 60 db = 170 db

when the voltmeter aperture is set for one power line cycle (PLC).

When setting an aperture or integration time, consider the following:

1. Normal mode rejection of 50 Hz or 60 Hz noise is only achieved with

aperture times ≥16.7 ms (60 Hz) (≥20 ms (50 Hz)), or with
integration times ≥ 1 power line cycle.

2. The longer the aperture or integration time, the greater the normal
mode noise rejection, but the lower the reading rate.

3. Setting the aperture time or integration time sets the other and the
resolution. Of these three parameters, the settings of the other two
are based on the one most recently set.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Setting the Aperture The multimeter aperture times, integration times, line frequency rejected,
and Integration Time and the amount of normal mode rejection (NMR) are given in Table 4-5 on
page 92.

When an aperture or integration time is specified, the time not specified and
the resolution are set accordingly. For example, an aperture time of 16.7 ms
(line frequency = 60 Hz) sets an integration time of 1 PLC. The
corresponding resolution depends on the function and range.

The MEASure and CONFigure commands set an aperture time of 16.7 ms

(60 Hz) or 20 ms (50 Hz) and an integration time of 1 PLC. These values
can be changed with the commands:
VOLTage:APERture time | MIN | MAX
RESistance:APERture time | MIN | MAX
VOLTage:NPLC value | MIN | MAX
RESistance:NPLC value | MIN | MAX

where:
time = aperture time (in seconds) from Table 4-5 on page 92.
value = number of PLCs from Table 4-5 on page 92.
MIN = sets an aperture time of 10 ms (fixed ranges only). This setting
offers no NMR; however, the reading rate is increased.
MIN = sets 0.0005 PLC. This setting offers no NMR; however, the
reading rate is increased. This setting is only available for measurements
on a fixed range.
MAX = sets an aperture time of 267 ms or 320 ms depending on the power
line frequency. This setting offers the greatest amount of NMR at the
lowest reading rate.
MAX = sets 16 PLC. This setting offers the greatest amount of NMR at
the lowest reading rate.

Querying the Aperture The aperture and integration times are queried with the following
and Integration Time commands. See Chapter 5 for additional information.
VOLTage:APERture?
VOLTage:APERture? MIN | MAX

RESistance:APERture?
RESistance:APERture? MIN | MAX

VOLTage:NPLC?
VOLTage:NPLC? MIN | MAX

RESistance:NPLC?
RESistance:NPLC? MIN | MAX

98 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Autozero Autozero is the process of cancelling out the offset voltage from DC voltage
and resistance measurements. When the multimeter is triggered and
autozero is enabled, the signal or induced voltage (resistance measurements)
is measured. The multimeter then internally disconnects the signal or turns
off the current source and measures the offset voltage. The difference
between these readings is the measurement, or the value used to calculate
the resistance.

When using autozero, consider the following:

1. Autozero ensures the most accurate DC voltage measurements;

however, measurement speed is half of that obtained with autozero off.

2. If the temperature of the measurement environment is constant and

the measurements are taken on the same range, autozero can be
turned off with few adverse affects on measurement accuracy.

3. Autozero does not occur following a range change whether it is on or off.

4. When on, an autozero will occur when changing the measurement

function to or from AC voltage.

5. Since autozero shorts the input internally, only the internal DC offset
to the A/D is measured.

Enabling Autozero The MEASure and CONFigure commands turn the autozero function on.
The command used to turn autozero on and off is:
CALibration:ZERO:AUTO mode | ONCE

where:
mode = ON (an offset voltage measurement is made after every
measurement of the input signal) or OFF (turns the autozero function off).

ONCE - performs an offset voltage measurement after one measurement

of the input signal. The offset is then subtracted from all subsequent
measurements.

Querying the Autozero The autozero mode is queried with the CALibration:ZERO:AUTO?
Mode command. See Chapter 5 for additional information.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 99

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Offset Anytime a resistance measurement is made, offset voltages internal and
Compensation external to the multimeter can be present. When these offsets are added to
the voltage induced (by the multimeter) across the resistance, measurement
accuracy is affected. Offset compensation cancels the offset voltage by:

1. Turning on the current source and measuring the induced voltage.

2. Turning off the current source and measuring the offset voltage.

3. Taking the difference between the induced and offset voltages and
dividing that number by the amount of current applied.

The result is the resistance measurement output from the multimeter.

Note The multimeter can compensate for offset voltages that are 10% of the
maximum voltage induced across the resistor.

When using offset compensation, consider the following:

1. Offset compensation allows you to make the most accurate 2-wire

and 4-wire resistance measurements; however, measurement speed is
decreased.

2. Offset compensation can be used on any measurement range;

however, on the highest range, the induced voltage is likely to be
much greater than the offset voltage. Thus, the offset voltage’s affect
on measurement accuracy is negligible.

3. The external circuit remains connected thus allowing an offset

measurement to be made for the SUM of BOTH internal and external
offsets.

4. With the external circuit connected, any induced voltage in your

external wiring is compensated for. Induced voltage in your external
wiring could be due to thermal heating, noise pickup, or other battery
effects (thermocouple junctions at wiring points, for example).

5. Offset compensation (OCOM) overrides autozero; however, if both

are on, the reading rate reflects the autozero state.

100 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Enabling Offset The MEASure and CONFigure commands turn offset compensation off.
Compensation The command used to turn offset compensation on is:
RESistance:OCOMpensated mode

where:
mode = ON (offset compensation is enabled) or OFF (offset compensation
is disabled).

Querying the Offset The offset compensation mode is queried with:

Compensation Mode
RESistance:OCOMpensated?

See Chapter 5 for additional information.

Triggering the Multimeter

The E1326B/E1411B multimeter operates in an idle state, a wait-for-trigger
state, and a triggered state. Configuration of the multimeter and its trigger
system occurs while the multimeter is in the idle state. When the
multimeter is ready to make a measurement, it is placed in the
wait-for-trigger state. When the trigger is received, the multimeter is placed
in the triggered state and a measurement is made. If the multimeter is
programmed to make one measurement per trigger, it returns to the idle
state once the measurement completes. If the multimeter is programmed for
multiple measurements per trigger or is programmed is to receive multiple
triggers, those conditions must be satisfied before it returns to the idle state.

Additionally, the multimeter’s trigger system consists of two loops - the

trigger count loop and the sample count loop. The sample count loop is the
faster of the two and can sustain 13 K samples per second as indicated in
Table 4-6 on page 110. The trigger count loop is slower due to the
following:

• The multimeter has a 512 by 16 bit buffer.

• In 10 µs aperture mode, the buffer holds 512 readings.

• For other aperture modes, the buffer holds 256 readings.

– for less than 512 readings, limitations by the multimeter occur
– for greater than 512 readings, limitations by the command
module occur

Figure 4-1 summarizes the multimeter’s trigger system. The trigger system
commands in the figure are covered on the following pages.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Figure 4-1. The Multimeter Trigger System

102 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Trigger Source The trigger source parameter specifies the signal which triggers the
multimeter. The trigger source is set with the following command:
TRIGger:SOURce source

The source settings are:

BUS = trigger source is the HP-IB group execute trigger (GET) or the
system *TRG command. Within the HP 75000 Series B mainframe, the
instrument whose trigger source is set to BUS and was the last instrument
addressed to listen will respond to the HP-IB group execute trigger. The
system trigger (*TRG) is sent to a specific instrument
(i.e. OUTPUT 70903;"*TRG").

EXT = trigger source is an external trigger applied to the multimeter’s

"External Trigger" BNC connector. The multimeter triggers on the
falling (negative-going) edge of a TTL signal.

When scanning with a FET multiplexer "switchbox" (multiplexers at a

different secondary HP-IB address), TRIGger:SOURce EXT must be
selected in order to trigger the multimeter with the Channel
Closed/External Trigger line on the digital bus.

HOLD = suspends triggering. Once set, the multimeter can only be

triggered with the TRIGger[:IMMediate] command.

IMMediate = an internal trigger signal is always present. Placing the

multimeter in the wait-for-trigger state (INIT) causes it to be triggered.
MEASure and CONFigure set TRIGger:SOURce IMM. (MEASure also
executes INIT.)

TTLTrg0 - TTLTrg7 = trigger source is VXIbus TTL trigger line 0 through 7.

These trigger sources are available with the HP E1411B multimeter only.

Querying the Trigger The trigger source is queried with the TRIGger:SOURce? command. See
Source Chapter 5 for additional information.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 103

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Trigger Count The function of the trigger count parameter depends on whether the
stand-alone multimeter or scanning multimeter is used.

Stand-alone Multimeter

The trigger count specifies the number of triggers the multimeter is to

receive before it returns to the idle state.

Scanning Multimeter

The trigger count specifies the number of scans (passes) through the channel
list. When making multiple scans through the channel list, a trigger signal
starts each scan. To take multiple readings on a particular channel, the
multimeter must scan only one channel, or make multiple scans through the list.

The command used to set the trigger count is the same for the stand-alone
and scanning multimeter:
TRIGger:COUNt number | MIN | MAX

where:
number = number of triggers received before the multimeter returns to the
idle state, or the number of scans through the channel list. The minimum
number is 1, the maximum number is 16,777,215. MEASure and
CONFigure set TRIGger:COUNt 1.

MIN = sets 1 trigger before returning to the idle state or 1 scan through the
channel list.

MAX = sets 16,777,215 triggers before returning to the idle state or

16,777,215 scans through the channel list. If MAX or 16,777,215 is
specified, Error +1000 “Out of memory” occurs indicating that many
readings cannot be stored in memory. However, READ? can be executed
to return the readings to the output buffer.

The next two examples show how TRIGger:COUNt is used in the

stand-alone and scanning multimeter configurations.

104 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example 1: Setting the In this example, one DC voltage measurement is taken each time an external
Trigger Count trigger occurs. After 10 external triggers (and measurements), the
(stand-alone multimeter returns to the idle state.
multimeter)
10 !Configure the stand-alone multimeter for DC voltage measurements
20 !on its terminals. Set the multimeter to receive 10 external triggers.
30 !Place the multimeter in the wait-for-trigger state.
40 CONF:VOLT:DC
50 TRIG:SOUR EXT
60 TRIG:COUN 10
70 READ?

Example 2: Setting the In this example, the multimeter scans the channel list five times making a total
Trigger Count of 25 measurements. The multimeter is internally triggered as the trigger
(scanning multimeter) source is not changed from that set by CONFigure (TRIG:SOUR IMM).
10 !Configure the scanning multimeter for DC voltage measurements on
20 !multiplexer channels 100 through 104. Make 5 scans through the channel list.
30 !Place the multimeter in the wait-for-trigger state.
40 CONF:VOLT:DC (@100:104)
50 TRIG:COUN 5
60 READ?

Querying the Trigger The trigger count setting is queried with the TRIGger:COUNt? and
Count TRIGger:COUNt? MIN | MAX commands. See Chapter 5 for additional
information.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Trigger Delay The trigger delay parameter allows you to specify the period between the
trigger signal and the measurement. For the stand-alone multimeter, this is
the delay between the trigger and the first measurement of each burst. For
the scanning multimeter, it’s the delay between the trigger and the first
channel in each scan (Figure 4-2).

Figure 4-2. Multimeter Trigger Delays

Note that you can set the sample period between measurements in a burst
and the sample period between FET multiplexer channels with the
SAMPle:TIMer command.

The trigger delay is set with the commands:

TRIGger:DELay period | MIN | MAX
TRIGger:DELay:AUTO mode

where:
period = period between the trigger signal and the measurement. The
range for period is 0 to 16.7772150 seconds.

MIN = sets the minimum trigger delay of 0 seconds for DC voltage and
resistance measurements. Sets a delay of 0.5 seconds for AC voltage
measurements.

MAX = sets the maximum trigger delay of 16.7772150 seconds.

mode = ON; delay is 0 seconds for the DC voltage and resistance

measurements, 0.5 seconds for the AC voltage measurements. To reduce
the delay for AC voltage measurements, change the function to AC
voltage first, and then set the delay. MEASure and CONFigure set
TRIGger:DELay:AUTO ON.

OFF turns TRIGger:DELay:AUTO off. Specifying a trigger delay

automatically turns TRIG:DEL:AUTO off.

106 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The following program segment shows the context in which
TRIGger:DELay is used.

Example: Setting a 10 !Configure the scanning multimeter for DC voltage measurements on

Trigger Delay 20 !channels 100 through 104. Make 5 scans through the channel list.
30 !Make a scan every 10 seconds.
40 CONF:VOLT:DC (@100:104)
50 TRIG:COUN 5
60 TRIG:DEL 10
70 READ?

Querying the Trigger The trigger delay setting is queried with the TRIGger:DELay? and
Delay TRIGger:DELay? MIN | MAX commands. See Chapter 5 for additional
information.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 107

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Sample Count The sample count specifies the number of measurements made for each
trigger signal received. For the stand-alone multimeter, it is the number of
measurements in a burst of readings. For the scanning multimeter, it is the
number of measurements made when scanning a single multiplexer channel.
The sample count is set with the command:
SAMPle:COUNt number | MIN | MAX

where:
number = number of readings (measurements) per trigger. The minimum
number is 1, the maximum number is 16,777,215. MEASure and CONFigure
set a sample count of 1.

MIN = sets 1 reading per trigger.

MAX = sets 16,777,215 readings per trigger. If MAX or 16,777,215 is

specified, Error +1000 “Out of memory” occurs indicating that many
samples (measurements) cannot be stored in memory. However, READ? can
be executed to return the readings to the output buffer.

The following program segment shows the context in which

SAMPle:COUNt is used.

Example: Setting In this segment, 10 DC voltage measurements are taken when a single
Sample Count external trigger is received.
10 !Configure the stand-alone multimeter for DC voltage measurements.
20 !Externally trigger the multimeter and take 10 readings when triggered.
30 CONF:VOLT:DC
40 TRIG:SOUR EXT
50 SAMP:COUN 10
60 READ?

Querying the Sample The sample count setting is queried with the SAMPle:COUNt? and
Count SAMPle:COUNt? MIN | MAX commands. See Chapter 5 for more
information.

108 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Sample Period Sample period is the time between measurements in a multiple-reading
burst, or the time between channels when scanning a FET multiplexer
channel list.

Note The sample period between channels can be specified for the FET
multiplexers only.

The source which sets the sample period is specified with the commands:
SAMPle:SOURce source
SAMPle:TIMer period | MIN | MAX

The source settings are:

IMM = the measurement is taken as soon as the previous measurement
completes. MEASure and CONFigure set SAMPle:SOURce IMM.

TIMer = the sample period is set with the SAMPle:TIMer command.

The period settings are:

period = period between measurements (sample rate). The period range
is 76 ms to 65.534 ms.

MIN = sets the sample period to 76 ms.

MAX = sets the sample period to 65.534 ms.

The sample period must be longer than the aperture time. Table 4-6 on
page 110 shows the minimum sample period for each available aperture
time setting.

Note If the aperture time is longer than the sample period, Error 2602 “Timer too
fast” is stored in the error queue when the multimeter begins to make the
measurement.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table 4-6. Aperture Times and Minimum Sample Period

Aperture Time Minimum Sample Rate Maximum Reading Rate

(SAMPle:TIMer) (Readings/second)

10 µs 76 µs 13,150

100 µs 0.32 ms 3,000

2.5 ms 2.8 ms 350

16.7 ms 16.9 ms 58

20 ms 20.3 ms 49

267 ms IMM* 2

320 ms IMM* 1.9

Aperture times and sample rates assume a fixed range and autozero off. Reading
rates are for the DC Voltage function. Times and number of readings are approximate.

* IMM is set with SAMPle:SOURce IMM.

Example: Setting the This program segment shows the context in which SAMPle:SOURce and
Aperture Time and SAMPle:TIMer are used, and their relationship to the aperture time.
Sample Period
10 !Configure the stand-alone multimeter for DC voltage measurements on
20 !the 7.27 V range. Turn off autozero. Set the aperture time to allow a
30 !sample period of 5 ms. Make a burst of 5 readings, sampled every 5 ms.
40 !Place the multimeter in the wait-for-trigger state and take the readings.
50 CONF:VOLT:DC 7.27
60 CAL:ZERO:AUTO OFF
70 VOLT:APER 0.0025
80 SAMP:COUN 5
90 SAMP:SOUR TIM
100 SAMP:TIM 0.005
110 READ?

Querying the Sample The sample source and sample period settings are queried with the
Source and Sample following commands. See Chapter 5 for more information.
Period Settings
SAMPle:SOURce?
SAMPle:TIMer?
SAMPle:TIMer? MIN | MAX

110 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The For the multimeter to respond to a trigger signal, the multimeter must be
Wait-For-Trigger placed in the wait-for-trigger state. This is done with the INIT[:IMMediate]
command. INIT is also executed by the READ? and MEASure? commands.
State The following examples show INIT implicitly and explicitly specified.

In this segment, INIT is executed by the MEASure command after

configuring the multimeter for DC voltage measurements. Since MEASure
sets TRIGger:SOURce IMM, placing the multimeter in the wait-for-trigger
state causes the measurements to be taken and sent to the output buffer. The
measurements overwrite any data currently in the buffer.
!INIT specified implicitly.
MEAS:VOLT:DC? (@100:104)

In this segment, INIT is executed by READ? after the multimeter is

configured with CONFigure and the low-level command VOLT:APER.
Because CONFigure sets TRIGger:SOURce IMM, placing the multimeter in
the wait-for-trigger state causes the measurements to be taken and sent to
the output buffer. Again, the measurements overwrite any data in the buffer.
!INIT specified implicitly.
CONF:VOLT:DC (@100:104)
VOLT:APER 267E-3
READ?

This segment shows that the multimeter is configured with the CONFigure
command and is externally triggered with TRIG:SOUR EXT. INIT puts the
multimeter in the wait-for-trigger state. When the external trigger occurs,
the measurements are taken and stored in memory - overwriting any
readings currently in memory.
!INIT specified explicitly.
CONF:VOLT:DC (@100:104)
TRIG:SOUR EXT
INIT
FETCH?

Recall that the stand-alone multimeter returns to the idle state following
each trigger, or after the number of triggers specified by TRIGger:COUNt
have occurred. The scanning multimeter returns to the idle state after the
number of scans specified by TRIGger:COUNt have occurred.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 111

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Using a Single The multimeter can be internally triggered with a single trigger signal. This
Trigger signal is issued with the TRIGger[:IMMediate] command:

Before a single trigger can be sent, however, the trigger source must be set
to HOLD and the multimeter must be in the wait-for-trigger state. These
conditions are shown in the following program which shows how a single
trigger can be used.

Example: When TRIG is executed, the multimeter makes 10 DC voltage

Measurements with a measurements and stores them in mainframe memory. The FETCH?
Single Trigger command retrieves the readings.
10 !Configure the stand-alone multimeter for DC voltage measurements.
20 !Suspend triggering and set 10 measurements to be taken when the single
30 !trigger is received.
40 CONF:VOLT:DC
50 TRIG:SOUR HOLD
60 SAMP:COUN 10
70 !Place the multimeter in the wait-for-trigger state and issue a single trigger.
80 !Fetch the readings from memory.
90 INIT
100 TRIG
110 FETCH?

Aborting a When the multimeter is in the wait-for-trigger state it can be returned to the
Measurement idle state before the trigger signal is received. This is done with the ABORt
command.

Trigger sources which allow the ABORt command to return the multimeter
to the idle state are TRIGger:SOURce BUS and TRIGger:SOURce HOLD.

The next two examples show how ABORt works.

112 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example: Aborting a After the multimeter is configured it is placed in the wait-for-trigger state.
Measurement ABORt returns the multimeter to the idle state, and when *TRG is executed,
(Trigger Source = BUS) the “Trigger Ignored” message is stored in the error queue.
10 !Configure the scanning multimeter for DC voltage measurements on
20 !channels 100 through 104. Set the trigger source to BUS (system or
30 !group execute trigger). Place the multimeter in the wait-for trigger state.
40 CONF:VOLT:DC (@100:104)
50 TRIG:SOUR BUS
60 INIT
70 !Abort the measurement before the trigger is received.
80 ABORt
90 *TRG
100 FETCH?

Example: Aborting a Again, the multimeter is configured and placed in the wait-for-trigger state.
Measurement Aborting the measurement causes the subsequent single trigger (TRIG) to be
(Trigger Source = HOLD) ignored.
10 !Configure the scanning multimeter for DC voltage measurements on
20 !channels 100 through 104. Suspend triggering. Place the multimeter in
30 !the wait-for-trigger state.
40 CONF:VOLT:DC (@100:104)
50 TRIG:SOUR HOLD
60 INIT
70 !Abort the measurement before the trigger is received.
80 ABORt
90 TRIG
100 FETCH?

Note If the multimeter is in the wait-for-trigger state and is waiting for an

external trigger (TRIG:SOUR EXT), clearing the multimeter returns it to the
idle state. This is done by pressing the “Clear Instr” key on the HP
E1301A mainframe front panel when the multimeter instrument is selected.
Sending CLEAR 70903 over the HP-IB also returns the multimeter to the
idle state.

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Saving Multimeter Configurations
To minimize repeated programming, up to 10 stand-alone multimeter
configurations can be saved in mainframe/command module memory.
The information saved includes:

Measurement System Parameters

– Measurement function
– Range
– Resolution
– Aperture time
– Integration time
– Autozero
– Offset compensation

Trigger System Parameters

– Trigger source
– Trigger count
– Trigger delay
– Sample count
– Sample source
– Sample timer

Because channel lists are not included, only stand-alone multimeter

configurations are saved. A configuration is identified by a number from
0 to 9. The configuration(s) remains in memory until power is cycled.

How to Save and Multimeter configurations are saved and recalled with the commands:
Recall a *SAV register
Configuration *RCL register

where register is a number from 0 to 9. The following program shows how

a configuration can be saved and recalled.

114 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example: Saving and This program saves a configuration in register 0. The multimeter is then
Recalling a reset in order to change the current configuration to the power-on
Configuration configuration. The configuration in register 0 is recalled which also places
the multimeter in the idle state. By placing the multimeter in the
wait-for-trigger state, the measurements are taken as soon as the internal
trigger signal is received.
10 !Configure the stand-alone multimeter for DC voltage measurements
20 !on the 7.27 V range. Set an aperture time of 267 ms.
30 CONF:VOLT:DC 7.27
40 VOLT:APER 267E-3
50 !Issue 10 triggers (10 measurements) before returning to the idle state.
60 !Set a one second delay between the trigger and the measurement.
70 TRIG:COUN 10
80 TRIG:DEL 1
90 !Save the configuration in register 0.
100 *SAV 0
110 !Reset the multimeter to its power-on configuration.
120 *RST
130 !Recall the configuration in register 0. Place the multimeter in the
140 !wait-for-trigger state, enter and display the readings.
150 *RCL 0
160 READ?

Chapter 4 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter 115

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Notes

116 Understanding the HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Chapter 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5
HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Command
Reference

Using This Chapter

This chapter describes the Standard Commands for Programmable
Instruments (SCPI) and IEEE 488.2 Common (*) commands applicable to
the HP E1326B and HP E1411B 51⁄2-Digit Multimeters.

• Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 117

• SCPI Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 121
• IEEE 488.2 Common Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 186
• Command Quick Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 187

Command Types
Commands are separated into two types: IEEE 488.2 Common Commands
and SCPI Commands.

Common The IEEE 488.2 standard defines the common commands that perform
Command Format functions such as reset, self-test, status byte query, and so on. Common
commands are four or five characters in length, always begin with the
asterisk character (*), and may include one or more parameters. The
command keyword is separated from the first parameter by a space
character. Some examples of common commands are shown below:
*RST *ESR 32 *STB?

SCPI Command The SCPI commands perform functions such as making measurements,
Format querying instrument states, or retrieving data. A command subsystem
structure is a hierarchical structure that usually consists of a top level (or
root) command, one or more low-level commands, and their parameters.
The following example shows a typical subsystem:
CALibration
:LFRequency <frequency>
:LFRequency? [MIN | MAX]
:ZERO:AUTO <mode>
:ZERO:AUTO?

CALibration is the root command, LFRequency, LFRequency?, and ZERO

are second level commands, and AUTO and AUTO? are third level
commands.

Command Separator A colon (:) always separates one command from the next lower level
command as shown below:

Chapter 5 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Command Reference 117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CALibration:ZERO:AUTO?

Colons separate the root command from the second level command
(CALibration:ZERO) and the second level from the third level
(ZERO:AUTO?).

Abbreviated The command syntax shows most commands as a mixture of upper and
Commands lower case letters. The upper case letters indicate the abbreviated spelling
for the command. For shorter program lines, send the abbreviated form.
For better program readability, you may send the entire command. The
instrument will accept either the abbreviated form or the entire command.

For example, if the command syntax shows MEASure, then MEAS and
MEASURE are both acceptable forms. Other forms of MEASure, such as
MEASU or MEASUR will generate an error. You may use upper or lower
case letters. Therefore, MEASURE, measure, and MeAsUrE are all
acceptable.

Implied Commands Implied commands are those which appear in square brackets ([ ]) in the
command syntax. (Note that the brackets are not part of the command and
are not sent to the instrument.) Suppose you send a second level command
but do not send the preceding implied command. In this case, the
instrument assumes you intend to use the implied command and it responds
as if you had sent it. Examine the partial [SENSe:] subsystem shown below:
[SENSe:]
FUNCtion[:<function>]
FUNCtion?
RESistance
:APERture <time>
:APERture? [MIN | MAX]
:NPLC <number>
:NPLC? [MIN | MAX]

The root command [SENSe:] is an implied command. To set the

multimeter’s function to AC volts, for example, you can send either of the
following command statements:

SENS:FUNC:VOLT:AC or FUNC:VOLT:AC

118 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Parameters Parameter Types. The following table contains explanations and examples
of parameter types you might see later in this chapter.

Parameter Type Explanations and Examples

Numeric Accepts all commonly used decimal representations of number

including optional signs, decimal points, and scientific notation.

123, 123E2, -123, -1.23E2, .123, 1.23E-2, 1.23000E-01.

Special cases include MINimum, MAXimum, and DEFault.

Boolean Represents a single binary condition that is either true or false.

ON, OFF, 1, 0

Discrete Selects from a finite number of values. These parameters

use mnemonics to represent each valid setting.

An example is the TRIGger:SOURce <source> command where

source can be BUS, EXT, HOLD, or IMM.

Optional Parameters. Parameters shown within square brackets ([ ]) are

optional parameters. (Note that the brackets are not part of the command
and are not sent to the instrument.) If you do not specify a value for an
optional parameter, the instrument chooses a default value. For example,
consider the TRIGger:COUNt? [MIN | MAX] command. If you send the
command without specifying a MINimum or MAXimum parameter, the
present TRIGger:COUNt value is returned. If you send the MIN parameter,
the command returns the minimum trigger count available. If you send the
MAX parameter, the command returns the maximum trigger count available.
Be sure to place a space between the command and the parameter.

Linking Commands Linking IEEE 488.2 Common Commands with SCPI Commands. Use
a semicolon between the commands. For example:

*RST;RES:OCOM ON or SAMP:SOUR TIM;*TRG

Linking Multiple SCPI Commands. Use both a semicolon and a colon

between the commands. For example:
SAMP:COUN 10;:SAMP:TIM 0.065

Table 5-1 lists the voltage and resistance ranges available for the
multimeter. Also shown are the associated resolution values, aperture
times, and integration times. You will be asked to refer to this table
throughout this chapter.

Chapter 5 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Command Reference 119

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table 5-1. Voltage and Ohms Ranges vs. Resolution, Aperture, and Integration Time
Aperture Time 10 µs* 100 µs 2.5 ms 16.7 ms 20 ms 267 ms 320 ms
Integration Time (PLCs) 0.0005 0.005 0.125 1 1 16 16

DC & AC Voltage
(Using CONFigure/MEASure)

Range Range Percent

DC AC Overrange Resolution

0.113 V 0.0795 V 10% 7.629 µV 3.814 µV 0.476 µV 0.119 µV 0.119 µV 28.9 nV 28.9 nV
0.91 V 0.63 V 10% 61.035 µV 30.517 µV 3.814 µV 0.953 µV 0.953 µV 0.238 µV 0.238 µV
7.27 V 5.09 V 10% 488.281 µV 244.14 µV 30.517 µV 7.629 µV 7.629 µV 1.907 µV 1.907 µV
58.1 V 40.7 V 10% 3.906 mV 1.953 mV 244.14 µV 61.035 µV 61.035 µV 15.258 µV 15.258 µV
300 V 300 V 0% 122.07 µV 122.07 µV
31.25 mV 15.625 mV 1.953 mV 488.28 µV 488.28 µV

DC & AC Voltage
(Using RANGe)

Range Range Percent

DC AC Overrange Resolution

0.125 V 0.0875 V 0% 7.629 µV 3.814 µV 0.476 µV 0.119 µV 0.119 µV 28.9 nV 28.9 nV

1.0 V 0.7 V 0% 61.035 µV 30.517 µV 3.814 µV 0.953 µV 0.953 µV 0.238 µV 0.238 µV
8.0 V 5.6 V 0% 488.281 µV 244.14 µV 30.517 µV 7.629 µV 7.629 µV 1.907 µV 1.907 µV
64.0 V 44.8 V 0% 3.906 mV 1.953 mV 244.14 µV 61.035 µV 61.035 µV 15.258 µV 15.258 µV
300 V 300 V 0% 122.07 µV 122.07 µV
31.25 mV 15.625 mV 1.953 mV 488.28 µV 488.28 µV

2-Wire & 4-Wire Resistance

(Using CONFigure/MEASure)

Percent
Range Overrange Resolution

232 Ω 10% 15.625 mΩ 7.812 mΩ 0.976 mΩ 244 µΩ 244 µΩ 61 µΩ 61 µΩ

1861 Ω 10% 125 mΩ 62.5 mΩ 7.812 mΩ 1.95 mΩ 1.95 mΩ 488 µΩ 488 µΩ
14894 Ω 10% 1Ω 0.5 Ω 62.5 mΩ 15.6 mΩ 15.6 mΩ 3.9 mΩ 3.9 mΩ
119156 Ω 10% 8Ω 4Ω 0.5 Ω 125 mΩ 125 mΩ 31.2 mΩ 31.2 mΩ
10%
1048576 Ω 64 Ω 32 Ω 4Ω 1Ω 1Ω 250 mΩ 250 mΩ

2-Wire & 4-Wire Resistance

(Using RANGe)

Percent
Range Overrange Resolution

256 Ω 0% 15.625 mΩ 7.812 mΩ 0.976 mΩ 244 µΩ 244 µΩ 61 µΩ 61 µΩ

2048 Ω 0% 125 mΩ 62.5 mΩ 7.812 mΩ 1.95 mΩ 1.95 mΩ 488 µΩ 488 µΩ
16384 Ω 0% 1Ω 0.5 Ω 62.5 mΩ 15.6 mΩ 15.6 mΩ 3.9 mΩ 3.9 mΩ
131072 Ω 0% 8Ω 4Ω 0.5 Ω 125 mΩ 125 mΩ 31.2 mΩ 31.2 mΩ
0%
1048576 Ω 64 Ω 32 Ω 4Ω 1Ω 1Ω 250 mΩ 250 mΩ

Max. Readings/Second ** 13,150 3,000 350 58 49 2 1.9

Line Frequency Rejected --- --- 400 Hz 60 Hz 50/400 Hz 60 Hz 50/400 Hz
Normal Mode Rejection 0 dB 0 dB 60 dB 60 dB 60 dB 84 dB 84 dB
Bits of Resolution 14 15 18 20 20 22 22

* 10 µs aperture time is only available when a fixed range is specified.

** Reading rates are approximate and are achieved using a stand-alone multimeter, DC voltage function, fixed range,
autozero off, offset compensation off, reading stored in mainframe/command module memory. See Table 4-6 on
page 110 for the necessary sample rates.

120 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SCPI Command Reference
This section describes the Standard Commands for Programmable
Instruments (SCPI) for the HP E1326B and HP E1411B 51⁄2-Digit
Multimeters. Commands are listed alphabetically by subsystem and also
within each subsystem.

Chapter 5 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Command Reference 121

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ABORt

The ABORt command subsystem removes the multimeter from the wait-for-trigger
state and places it in the idle state. ABORt can only
be used with the following trigger sources: TRIGger:SOURce BUS
and TRIGger:SOURce HOLD.

Subsystem Syntax ABORt

Comments • ABORt does not affect any other settings of the trigger system. When the INITiate
command is sent, the trigger system will respond as it did before ABORt was
executed.

• When TRIGger:SOURce BUS is selected, ABORt returns the multimeter to the

idle state. When a Group Execute Trigger (GET) bus command or *TRG common
command is executed, the
"Trigger ignored" error is generated.

• When TRIGger:SOURce HOLD is selected, ABORt returns the multimeter to the

idle state. All subsequent single triggers sent using TRIGger:IMMediate are
ignored and the "Trigger ignored" error is generated.

• When the trigger system is initiated from the HP-IB interface, execute the HP-IB
CLEAR command or press the HP E1301A front panel “Clear Instr” or
“Reset Instr” key to return to the idle state.

• When the trigger system is initiated from the HP E1301A front panel, execute
*RST over the HP-IB interface or press the HP E1301A front panel “Clear Instr”
or “Reset Instr” key to return to the idle state.

• Related Commands: INITiate, TRIGger:SOURce

• *RST Condition: After a *RST, the multimeter acts as though an ABORt has
occurred.

Example Aborting a Measurement

CONF:VOLT:DC (@100:104) !Function: DC voltage on specified
channels.
TRIG:SOUR HOLD !Suspend triggering; wait for TRIG:IMM
command.
INIT !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state.
ABOR !Place multimeter in the idle state.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 122

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CALibration

The CALibration command subsystem selects the multimeter’s line reference

frequency (CALibration:LFRequency) and enables/disables the autozero mode
(CALibration:ZERO:AUTO).

Subsystem Syntax CALibration

:LFRequency <frequency>
:LFRequency? [MIN | MAX]
:ZERO:AUTO <mode>
:ZERO:AUTO?

:LFRequency
CALibration:LFRequency <frequency> selects the line reference frequency used
by the multimeter’s analog-to-digital converter.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<frequency> numeric 50 | 60 | MIN | MAX hertz

Comments • MIN selects the minimum line reference frequency (50 Hz). MAX selects the
maximum line reference frequency (60 Hz).

• The line reference frequency is set to 60 Hz at the factory. The setting is stored in
non-volatile mainframe memory and is changed only when CAL:LFR is executed.

• For a line frequency of 400 Hz, the 50 Hz reference frequency is used; however,
since 50 Hz is a subharmonic of 400 Hz, it provides normal mode rejection of
power line related noise.

• *RST Condition: The selected line reference frequency remains unchanged

since it is stored in non-volatile mainframe memory.

Example Selecting the Line Frequency Reference

CAL:LFR 50 !Reference frequency is 50 Hz.

:LFRequency?
CALibration:LFRequency? [MIN | MAX] returns one of the following numbers to
the output buffer:

• The present line reference frequency ("50" or "60") if MINimum or MAXimum is

not specified.

• The minimum line reference frequency ("50") if MIN is specified.

• The maximum line reference frequency ("60") if MAX is specified.

123 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example Querying the Line Reference Frequency
CAL:LFR 50 !Reference frequency is 50 Hz.
CAL:LFR? !Query for reference frequency.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

:ZERO:AUTO
CALibration:ZERO:AUTO <mode> enables or disables the autozero mode for DC
voltage and resistance measurements.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<mode> boolean OFF | 0 | ON | 1 | ONCE none

Comments • You can substitute decimal values for the OFF ("0") and ON ("1") parameters.

• When autozero is ON, the multimeter makes a zero measurement (measurement

with input disabled) following every measured reading and subtracts the zero
measurement from the reading. This doubles the time required per reading.

• When autozero is OFF, the multimeter makes one zero measurement and subtracts
this from all subsequent measurements. A new zero measurement is made
whenever the function is changed. Notice that the mode parameters OFF and
ONCE have the same effect.

• An autozero measurement is not made following a range change whether autozero

is ON or OFF.

• Autozero cannot be used when a 10 µs aperture time is specified.

• The CONFigure and MEASure commands turn autozero ON.

• *RST Condition: CAL:ZERO:AUTO ON

Example Turning Autozero OFF

CAL:ZERO:AUTO OFF !Disable autozero.

:ZERO:AUTO?
CALibration:ZERO:AUTO? returns a number to show whether the autozero mode
is enabled or disabled: "1" = ON, "0" = OFF or ONCE.
The number is sent to the output buffer.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 124

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example Querying the Autozero Mode
CAL:ZERO:AUTO OFF !Disable autozero.
CAL:ZERO:AUTO? !Query multimeter to return autozero mode
("0").
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

125 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CONFigure

The CONFigure command subsystem configures the multimeter to perform the

specified measurement with the given range and resolution. CONFigure does not
make the measurement after setting the configuration. Use the INITiate command to
place the multimeter in the wait-for-trigger state and store readings in mainframe or
command module memory. Or, use the READ? command to make the measurement
and send the readings to the output buffer when the trigger is received.

Executing CONFigure is equivalent to configuring the multimeter with the low-level

commands shown in the following table.

Command Setting

VOLTage:RANGe As specified, or autorange.

RESistance:RANGe

VOLTage:RESolution As specified, or as a function of range, integration time,

RESistance:RESolution or aperture time.

VOLTage:APERture 16.7 ms (60 Hz) or 20 ms (50 Hz), or based on specified

RESistance:APERture resolution.

VOLTage:NPLC 1 PLC, or based on specified resolution.

RESistance:NPLC

CALibration:ZERO:AUTO ON (autozero is performed after every measurement).

RESistance:OCOMpensated OFF (applies to resistance measurements only).

TRIGger:SOURce IMM (trigger signal is always true).

TRIGger:COUNt 1
TRIGger:DELay AUTO (DC volts/resistance: 0 s, AC volts: 0.5 s).

SAMPle:COUNt 1
SAMPle:SOURce IMM

Subsystem Syntax CONFigure

:FRESistance [<range>[,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>]
:RESistance [<range>[,<resolution>]] ,<channel_list>
:TEMPerature <transducer>,<type> ,<channel_list>
:VOLTage:AC [<range> [,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>]
:VOLTage[:DC] [<range> [,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>]

NOTE: If range and resolution are not specified (that is, if you use the default
values), use a space rather than a comma before the channel_list parameter.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 126

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 :FRESistance
CONFigure:FRESistance [<range>[,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>] selects the
4-wire ohms function and allows you to specify the measurement range and
resolution. If you specify a channel list, those multiplexer channels are scanned.

For a complete listing of range and resolution values available, see

Table 5-1 on page 120.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<range> numeric 232 Ω | 1861 Ω | 14894 Ω | ohms

119156 Ω | 1048576 Ω |
AUTO | DEF | MIN | MAX

<resolution> numeric resolution (see Table 5-1) | ohms

DEF | MIN | MAX

<channel_list> numeric cc00-cc15 (E1345A/E1347A) none

Comments • To select a standard measurement range, specify range as the input signal’s
maximum expected resistance. The multimeter then selects the correct range.

• The AUTO and DEFault options for the range parameter have the same effect
(enable autorange). The DEF option for the resolution parameter defaults the
integration time to 1 PLC.

• The MIN and MAX parameters select the minimum or maximum values for range
and resolution:

For range: MIN = 232 Ω; MAX = 1048576 Ω

For resolution: MIN selects the best resolution (the smallest value from Table 5-1) for
the selected range. MAX selects the worst resolution (the largest value from Table 5-1)
for the selected range.

• The channel list is of the form (@ccnn), (@ccnn,ccnn), or (@ccnn:ccnn), where

cc = card number and nn = channel number (105 is channel 05 of card number 1,
for example).

• Four-wire resistance measurements use channel pairs. For example, on the HP

E1345A multiplexer, channels 0 and 8, 1 and 9, 2 and 10, etc. are paired. The
lower channel in each pair (0, 1, 2, ...7) is the sense channel. Use channel_list to
specify the "sense" channels.

• To select autorange, specify AUTO (or DEF) for range or do not specify a value
for the parameter. In the autorange mode, the multimeter samples the input signal
before each measurement and selects the appropriate range.

• To specify a MIN or MAX resolution while autoranging, you must specify

CONF:FRES AUTO or CONF:FRES DEF (you cannot omit the range parameter).
This prevents the MIN or MAX resolution from being interpreted as a range setting.

• The fastest aperture time available when autoranging is 100 µs. In order to specify an
aperture time of 10 µs, you must select a fixed range.

127 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Related Commands: FETCh?, INITiate, READ?

Example Making 4-Wire Ohms Measurements

CONF:FRES 1560,MAX,(@100:103) !Function: 4-wire ohms;
range selected: 1861Ω;
MAX resolution: 125 mΩ;
specify sense channel list.
TRIG:COUN 3 !Scan channel list 3 times (take 4 readings
per trigger); trigger source is IMMediate by
default.
READ? !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state and
make measurements;
send readings to output buffer.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

:RESistance
CONFigure:RESistance [<range>[,<resolution>]] , <channel_list>
selects the 2-wire ohms function and allows you to specify the range and resolution.
Two-wire resistance measurements can only be made using the scanning multimeter
(a channel list is required).

For a complete listing of range and resolution values available, see

Table 5-1 on page 120.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<range> numeric 232 Ω | 1861 Ω | 14894 Ω | ohms

119156 Ω | 1048576 Ω |
AUTO | DEF | MIN | MAX

<resolution> numeric resolution (see Table 5-1) | ohms

DEF | MIN | MAX

<channel_list> numeric Refer to the multiplexer user’s manual for none

a list of channels available.

Comments • To select a standard measurement range, specify range as the input signal’s
maximum expected resistance. The multimeter then selects the correct range.

• The AUTO and DEFault options for the range parameter have the same effect
(enable autorange). The DEF option for the resolution parameter defaults the
integration time to 1 PLC.

• The MIN and MAX parameters select the minimum or maximum values for range
and resolution:

For range: MIN = 232 Ω; MAX = 1048576 Ω

For resolution: MIN selects the best resolution (the smallest value from Table 5-1) for
the selected range. MAX selects the worst resolution (the largest value from Table 5-1)
for the selected range.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 128

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The channel list is of the form (@ccnn), (@ccnn,ccnn), or (@ccnn:ccnn), where
cc = card number and nn = channel number (105 is channel 05 of card number 1,
for example).

• To select autorange, specify AUTO (or DEF) for range or do not specify a value
for the parameter. In the autorange mode, the multimeter samples the input signal
before each measurement and selects the appropriate range.

• To specify a MIN or MAX resolution while autoranging, you must specify

CONF:RES AUTO or CONF:RES DEF (you cannot omit the range parameter).
This prevents the MIN or MAX resolution from being interpreted as a range setting.

• The fastest aperture time available when autoranging is 100 µs. In order to specify an
aperture time of 10 µs, you must select a fixed range.

• Related Commands: FETCh?, INITiate, READ?

Example Making 2-Wire Ohms Measurements

CONF:RES 1320,MAX,(@105:109) !Function: 2-wire ohms;
range selected: 1861 Ω;
MAX resolution: 125 mΩ;
specify channel list.
TRIG:COUN 3 !Scan channel list 3 times
(take 4 readings per trigger).
INIT !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state;
store readings in mainframe memory; trigger
source is IMMediate by default.
FETC? !Place readings in output buffer.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

:TEMPerature
CONFigure:TEMPerature <transducer>,<type> ,<channel_list>
selects the temperature function. All measurements are returned in degrees celsius.
The following transducers can be measurements using the multimeter:

Thermocouples

Thermistors (2-wire or 4-wire measurement)

RTDs (2-wire or 4-wire measurement)

Two-wire temperature measurements can only be made using the scanning

multimeter (a channel list is required).

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<transducer> discrete TCouple | THERmistor | none

FTHermistor | RTD | FRTD

129 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 <type> discrete TC: B, E, J, K, N14, N28, R, S, or T none

numeric THER/FTH:2252 | 5000 | 10000 ohms

numeric RTD/FRTD: 85 | 92 alpha

<channel_list> numeric Refer to the multiplexer user’s manual for none

a list of channels available.

Comments • The HP E1344A, E1347A, E1353A, or E1476A multiplexer is required for

thermocouple measurements. These module’s have built-in thermocouple
compensation circuitry on the terminal module.

• The channel list is of the form (@ccnn), (@ccnn,ccnn), or (@ccnn:ccnn), where

cc = card number and nn = channel number (105 is channel 05 of card number 1,
for example).

• Four-wire temperature measurements use channel pairs. For example, on the HP

E1345A multiplexer, channels 0 and 8, 1 and 9, 2 and 10, etc. are paired. The lower
channel in each pair (0, 1, 2, ...7) is the sense channel. Use channel_list to specify the
"sense" channels.

• You can measure RTD types 85 (alpha = 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C)

and 92 (alpha = 0.00392 Ω/Ω/°C). The values 385, 0.00385, 392, 0.00392 are
also accepted for the type parameter.

• Thermistor types are 2252, 5000, and 10000. Use thermistors that match the
Omega 440xx series temperature response curves.

• Related Commands: FETCh?, INITiate, READ?

Example Making Thermocouple Measurements

CONF:TEMP TC,J,(@100:107) !Measure J-type thermocouples (scan the 8
channels once); trigger source is IMMediate
by default.
READ? !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state and
make measurements; send readings to output
buffer.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

:VOLTage:AC
CONFigure:VOLTage:AC [<range>[,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>] selects the
AC-coupled RMS voltage function and allows you to specify the range and
resolution. If you specify a channel list, those multiplexer channels are scanned.

For a complete listing of range and resolution values available, see

Table 5-1 on page 120.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<range> numeric 0.0795 V | 0.63V | 5.09 V | volts

40.7 V | 300 V | AUTO | DEF |
MIN | MAX

Chapter 5 Command Reference 130

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 <resolution> numeric resolution (see Table 5-1) | volts
DEF | MIN | MAX

<channel_list> numeric Refer to the multiplexer user’s manual for none

a list of channels available.

Comments • To select a standard measurement range, specify range as the input signal’s
maximum expected voltage. The multimeter then selects the correct range.

• The AUTO and DEFault options for the range parameter have the same effect
(enable autorange). The DEF option for the resolution parameter defaults the
integration time to 1 PLC.

• The MIN and MAX parameters select the minimum or maximum values for range
and resolution:

For range: MIN = 0.0795 V; MAX = 300 V.

For resolution: MIN selects the best resolution (the smallest value from Table 5-1) for
the selected range. MAX selects the worst resolution (the largest value from Table 5-1)
for the selected range.

• The channel list is of the form (@ccnn), (@ccnn,ccnn), or (@ccnn:ccnn), where

cc = card number and nn = channel number (105 is channel 05 of card number 1,
for example).

• To select autorange, specify AUTO (or DEF) for range or do not specify a value
for the parameter. In the autorange mode, the multimeter samples the input signal
before each measurement and selects the appropriate range.

• To specify a MIN or MAX resolution while autoranging, you must specify

CONF:VOLT:AC AUTO or CONF:VOLT:AC DEF (you cannot omit the range
parameter). This prevents the MIN or MAX resolution from being interpreted as a
range setting.

• The fastest aperture time available when autoranging is 100 µs. In order to specify an
aperture time of 10 µs, you must select a fixed range.

Example Making AC Voltage Measurements

CONF:VOLT:AC 0.54,MAX,(@100:103) !Function: AC volts;
range selected: 0.63V;
MAX resolution: 61.035 µV; specify
channel list.
TRIG:COUN 3 !Scan channel list 3 times (take 4 readings
per trigger); trigger source is IMMediate by
default.
READ? !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state and
make measurements; send readings to output
buffer.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

131 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 :VOLTage[:DC]
CONFigure:VOLTage[:DC] [<range>[,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>] selects the
DC voltage function and allows you to specify the range and resolution. If you
specify a channel list, those multiplexer channels are scanned.

For a complete listing of range and resolution values available, see

Table 5-1 on page 120.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<range> numeric 0.113 V | 0.91 V | 7.27 V | volts

58.1 V | 300 V | AUTO | DEF |
MIN | MAX

<resolution> numeric resolution (see Table 5-1) | volts

DEF | MIN | MAX

<channel_list> numeric Refer to the multiplexer user’s manual for none

a list of channels available.

Comments • The :DC parameter is optional. Both of the following command statements select
the DC voltage function:

CONF:VOLT:DC or CONF:VOLT

• To select a standard measurement range, specify range as the input signal’s

maximum expected voltage. The multimeter then selects the correct range.

• The AUTO and DEFault options for the range parameter have the same effect
(enable autorange). The DEF option for the resolution parameter defaults the
integration time to 1 PLC.

• The MIN and MAX parameters select the minimum or maximum values for range
and resolution:

For range: MIN = 0.113 V; MAX = 300 V.

For resolution: MIN selects the best resolution (the smallest value from Table 5-1) for
the selected range. MAX selects the worst resolution (the largest value from Table 5-1)
for the selected range.

• The channel list is of the form (@ccnn), (@ccnn,ccnn), or (@ccnn:ccnn), where

cc = card number and nn = channel number (105 is channel 05 of card number 1,
for example).

• To select autorange, specify AUTO (or DEFault) for range or do not specify a
value for the parameter. In the autorange mode, the multimeter samples the input
signal before each measurement and selects the appropriate range.

• To specify a MIN or MAX resolution while autoranging, you must specify

CONF:VOLT:DC AUTO or CONF:VOLT:DC DEF (you cannot omit the range

Chapter 5 Command Reference 132

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 parameter). This prevents the MIN or MAX resolution from being interpreted as a
range setting.

• The fastest aperture time available when autoranging is 100 µs. In order to specify an
aperture time of 10 µs, you must select a fixed range.

• Related Commands: FETCh?, INITiate, READ?

Example Making DC Voltage Measurements

CONF:VOLT 0.825,MAX,(@100:103) !Function: DC voltage;
range selected: 0.91 V;
MAX resolution: 61.035 µV; specify
channel list.
TRIG:COUN 3 !Scan channel list 3 times
(take 4 readings per trigger).
INIT !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state;
store readings in mainframe memory; trigger
source is IMMediate by default.
FETC? !Place readings in output buffer.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

133 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 CONFigure?

The CONFigure? command queries the multimeter to return the configuration set by
the most recent CONFigure or MEASure command.
It returns a quoted string to the output buffer in the following format:

“<function> <parameter>,<parameter>”

Subsystem Syntax CONFigure?

Comments • When the multimeter is configured for voltage or resistance measurements,

CONFigure? returns the function followed by the selected range and resolution.
For example:

“FRES 2.320000E+002,6.103516E-005”
“RES 1.489400E+004,1.562500E-002”
“VOLT:AC 5.090000E+000,7.629395E-006”
“VOLT 7.270000E+000,7.629395E-006”

• Since you cannot set the range or resolution for temperature measurements,
CONFigure? returns "TEMP" followed by the specified transducer and type. For
example:

“TEMP FRTD,385”
“TEMP THER,2252”

• If you specify AUTO, DEF, MIN, or MAX for the range or resolution parameters in
CONFigure or MEASure, the CONFigure? command returns the selected value.

• Related Commands: CONFigure, MEASure

Example Querying the Multimeter Configuration

dimension string array !Dimension computer array to store string.
CONF:FRES 1560,MAX,(@100:103) !Function: 4-wire ohms;
range selected: 1861 Ω;
MAX resolution: 125 mΩ.
CONF? !Query configuration.
enter statement !Enter string into computer.

String Returned:

“FRES 1.861000E+003,1.250000E-001”

Chapter 5 Command Reference 134

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DIAGnostic

The DIAGnostic command subsystem provides control of the FET multiplexers.

Subsystem Syntax DIAGnostic

:FETS <mode>
:FETS?

:FETS
DIAGnostic:FETS <mode> selects either external digital bus or backplane control
of the FET multiplexers.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<mode> boolean OFF | 0 | ON | 1 none

Comments • 0 or OFF = backplane control; 1 or ON = digital bus control.

• The channels on FET multiplexers (HP E1351A, E1352A, E1353A, E1357A, and
E1358A) that are part of the voltmeter virtual instrument can be closed using
either the VXI backplane or by the external digital bus connected to the modules.
The digital bus should be used when maximum scanning speed is required.

• When only FET multiplexers are present in a system, the digital bus is
automatically used. When a relay multiplexer is present, then the digital bus to
the FET multiplexers is not used. Instead, all switching of channels is done using
backplane control.

• When the digital bus is used to communicate with FET multiplexers, a scan list is
downloaded to the FET multiplexer and then the digital bus routes the "Voltmeter
Complete" signal from the voltmeter to the FET multiplexer. The falling edge on
the Voltmeter Complete signal causes the FET multiplexer to advance to the next
channel.

• The command DIAG:FETS 0 sets the mode to be backplane control. This mode
must be used if both FET and relay multiplexers are in a scan list.

• The command DIAG:FETS 1 sets the mode to be digital bus control. This mode
must be used to obtain the maximum speed from FET multiplexers. This mode
can not be used if any relay multiplexer channels are in the scan list.

:FETS?
DIAGnostic:FETS? is used to query which mode of operation is in effect. The
returned number has the following meaning:

0 = backplane control

1 = digital bus control

135 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DISPlay

The DISPlay command subsystem monitors the state of the selected multiplexer
channel within the scanning multimeter. This command is useful only with
mainframes that have a front panel display, such as the HP 75000 Series B
Mainframe (Model HP E1301A).

Subsystem Syntax DISPlay

:MONitor
:CHANnel <channel>
:CHANnel?
[:STATe] <mode>
[:STATe]?

:MONitor:CHANnel
DISPlay:MONitor:CHANnel <channel> selects a single multiplexer channel to be
monitored. Use the DISPlay:MONitor:STATe command to enable and disable the
monitor mode.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<channel> numeric Refer to the multiplexer user’s manual for none

a list of channels available.

Comments • Use the channel parameter to specify a single multiplexer channel within the
scanning multimeter. The channel list is of the form (@ccnn), where cc = card
number and nn = channel number
(105 is channel 05 of card number 1, for example).

• Use AUTO in place of channel to display measurements from the most recent
channel to receive a CONFigure or MEASure command. The channel number and
measurement are updated as the scan progresses. You may want to add a small
delay to the scan or use a slow, externally paced scan in order to view each
channel from the mainframe’s front panel.

• The following example shows the multimeter’s monitor mode display on the HP
E1301A front panel.

VOLTMTR_8: Chan: 101 +1.465302E-01

mon volt

• Related Commands: DISPlay:MONitor:STATe

• *RST Condition: DISP:MON:CHAN AUTO

Chapter 5 Command Reference 136

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example Monitoring a Channel
DISP:MON:CHAN (@101) !Select channel 101 for monitor mode.
DISP:MON ON !Enable monitor mode.

:MONitor:CHANnel?
DISPlay:MONitor:CHANnel? returns one of the following strings to the output
buffer:

The multiplexer channel number selected to be monitored using DISP:MON:CHAN.

For example, (@100).

If DISP:MON:CHAN AUTO is specified, (@0) is returned.

Example Querying the Monitor Mode Channel

DISP:MON:CHAN (@101) !Select channel 101 for monitor mode.
DISP:MON ON !Enable monitor mode.
DISP:MON:CHAN? !Query monitor mode channel.
enter statement !Enter string into computer.

:MONitor[:STATe]
DISPlay:MONitor[:STATe] <mode> enables or disables the monitor mode.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<mode> boolean OFF | 0 | ON | 1 none

Comments • The [:STATe] parameter is optional; therefore, either of the following command
statements is valid:

DISP:MON:STAT ON or DISP:MON ON

• You can substitute decimal values for the OFF ("0") and ON ("1") parameters.

• When the monitor mode is ON, the status of the multiplexer channel selected by
DISPlay:MONitor:CHANnel is displayed. When the monitor mode is OFF, the
instrument menu for the multimeter is displayed.

• *RST Condition: DISP:MON:STAT OFF

Example Turning Monitor Mode ON

DISP:MON:CHAN (@101) !Select channel 101 for monitor mode.
DISP:MON ON !Enable monitor mode.

137 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 :MONitor[:STATe]?
DISPlay:MONitor[:STATe]? returns a number to show whether the monitor mode
is enabled or disabled: "1" = ON, "0" = OFF. The number is sent to the output
buffer.

Comments • This command is valid only when executed from your computer over the interface
bus. The monitor mode is automatically disabled, if you attempt to execute the
command from the mainframe’s front panel.

• The [:STATe] parameter is optional; therefore, either of the following command

statements is valid:

DISP:MON:STAT? or DISP:MON?

Example Querying the Monitor Mode

DISP:MON:CHAN (@101) !Select channel 101 for monitor mode.
DISP:MON ON !Enable monitor mode.
DISP:MON? !Query monitor mode.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 138

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FETCh?

The FETCh? command retrieves measurements stored in mainframe/

command module memory by the most recent INITiate command and places them in
the output buffer. This command is most commonly used with CONFigure.

Subsystem Syntax FETCh?

Comments • Execute INITiate before sending the FETCh? command to place the multimeter in
the wait-for-trigger state. If the multimeter is in the idle state (that is, if INITiate
has not been executed), FETCh? will generate the “Data corrupt or stale” error.

• Each reading sent to the output buffer consists of 15 bytes (characters) in Real
ASCII format:

±1.234567E±123 LF

• Each measurement is terminated with a Line Feed (LF). The HP-IB

End-or-Identify (EOI) signal is sent with the last byte transferred. If multiple
readings are returned, the readings are separated by commas and EOI is sent only
with the last byte.

• The output buffer capacity is 128 bytes. Therefore, eight readings (15 bytes each)
can be transferred to the output buffer at a time. The mainframe remains "busy"
until you begin removing readings from the output buffer using your computer’s
enter statement.

• This command causes the stored readings in the mainframe RAM to be retrieved
and sent over the HP-IB bus. Readings are not output until all readings are taken
and stored in RAM.

• Readings can be received and placed into RAM at any reading rate up to 13K.
The maximum number of readings is limited by the amount of RAM in the
mainframe (HP E1300, for example). Each reading is four bytes long.

• Related Commands: CONFigure, INITiate, READ?

• *RST Condition: Since *RST places the multimeter in the idle state, executing
FETCh? after a *RST generates the “Data corrupt or stale” error.

Example Transferring Stored Readings to Output Buffer

dimension array !Dimension computer array to store 100
readings.
CONF:VOLT:DC !Function: DC voltage; stand-alone
multimeter.
SAMP:COUN 100 !100 readings per trigger (stand-alone
multimeter only).
INIT !Store readings in mainframe memory;
trigger source is IMMediate by default.
FETC? !Place readings in output buffer.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

139 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FORMat

The FORMat subsystem sets the format for data transferred from the multimeter to
the computer using the MEASure?, READ?, and FETCh? commands.

Subsystem Syntax FORMat

[:DATA] <type>[,<length>]

[:DATA]
FORMat[:DATA] <type>[,<length>] selects the data format and length.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<type> discrete ASCii | REAL none

<length> numeric 32 | 64 none

Comments • ASCII readings are transferred in the form ± 1.234567E ± 123. Each reading is
followed by a comma(,). A line feed (LF) and End-Or-
Identify (EOI) follow the last reading. Each reading is 15 bytes.

• REAL reading lengths are 32- and 64-bits. The readings are transferred in the
IEEE 488.2-1987 Definite Length Arbitrary Block format. The readings are
preceded by an Arbitrary Block header which consists of:

# <non-zero digit> <block length>

<non-zero digit> indicates the number of digits representing

<block length>, and <block length> indicates the number of 8-bit data bytes
which follow the header. Examples of the header are shown below:

REAL,32 #240 <40 bytes> 10 readings

REAL,64 #18 <8 bytes> 1 reading

• *RST Condition: ASCii

Example Setting the Data Format

FORMAT REAL,64 !Format is set to REAL 64.
CONF:VOLT:DC 58.1

Chapter 5 Command Reference 140

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 FORMat?

FORMat? returns one of the following to the output buffer:

• ASC,+7 seven significant digits

• REAL,+32 REAL 32 format

• REAL,+64 REAL 64 format

141 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INITiate

The INITiate command subsystem places the multimeter in the wait-for-trigger state.
This command is most commonly used with CONFigure.

Subsystem Syntax INITiate

[:IMMediate]

[:IMMediate]
INITiate[:IMMediate] places the multimeter in the wait-for-trigger state. When a
trigger is received, readings are placed in mainframe/command module memory.

Comments • After the trigger system is initiated using INITiate, use the TRIGger command
subsystem to control the behavior of the trigger system.

• If TRIGger:SOURce is IMMediate, the measurement starts and readings are stored

in mainframe/command module memory as soon as INITiate is executed.
Readings stored in memory from previous commands are replaced by the new
readings.

• To transfer readings from memory to the output buffer, use the FETCh? command.

• If the multimeter is in the wait-for-trigger state, the ABORt command places the
multimeter in its idle state and terminates any measurement in progress.

• Each multimeter module is allocated enough mainframe memory to store 100

readings. Each reading stored is four bytes long. Since readings are stored in a
four-byte format, INITiate is faster than sending readings directly to the output buffer
using the READ? command. If more than 100 readings are requested, and memory is
available, the mainframe allocates additional memory to the multimeter.

• The READ? command executes INITiate implicitly. The MEASure command

executes READ? implicitly.

• Related Commands: ABORt, CONFigure, FETCh?, READ?

• *RST Condition: *RST places the multimeter in the idle state.

Example Placing Multimeter in Wait-For-Trigger State

CONF:VOLT:DC (@100:104) !Function: DC voltage; specify channel list.
TRIG:SOUR EXT !Trigger source is external BNC on
multimeter front panel.
INIT !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state;
store readings in memory when trigger is
received.
FETC? !Place readings in output buffer.
INIT !You must reinitiate the wait-for-trigger
state after each trigger cycle.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 142

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MEASure

The MEASure command subsystem configures the multimeter to perform the

specified measurement with the given range and resolution. When the multimeter is
triggered, MEASure makes the measurement and sends the readings to the output
buffer.

Executing MEASure is equivalent to configuring the multimeter with the low-level

commands shown in the following table.

Command Setting

VOLTage:RANGe As specified, or autorange.

RESistance:RANGe

VOLTage:RESolution As specified, or as a function of range, integration time,

RESistance:RESolution or aperture time.

VOLTage:APERture 16.7 ms (60 Hz) or 20 ms (50 Hz), or based on specified

RESistance:APERture resolution.

VOLTage:NPLC 1 PLC, or based on specified resolution.

RESistance:NPLC

CALibration:ZERO:AUTO ON (autozero is performed after every measurement).

RESistance:OCOMpensated OFF (applies to resistance measurements only).

TRIGger:SOURce IMM (trigger signal is always true).

TRIGger:COUNt 1
TRIGger:DELay AUTO (DC volts/resistance: 0 s, AC volts: 0.5 s).

SAMPle:COUNt 1
SAMPle:SOURce IMM

Subsystem Syntax MEASure

:FRESistance? [<range>[,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>]
:RESistance? [<range>[,<resolution>]] ,<channel_list>
:TEMPerature? <transducer>,<type> [,<channel_list>]
:VOLTage:AC? [<range>[,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>]
:VOLTage[:DC]? [<range>[,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>]

NOTE: If range and resolution are not specified (that is, if you use the default
values), use a space rather than a comma before the channel_list parameter.

143 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 :FRESistance?
MEASure:FRESistance? [<range>[,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>] selects the
4-wire ohms function and allows you to specify the range and resolution. If you
specify a channel list, those multiplexer channels are scanned.

For a complete listing of range and resolution values available, see

Table 5-1 on page 120.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<range> numeric 232 Ω | 1861 Ω | 14894 Ω | ohms

119156 Ω | 1048576 Ω |
AUTO | DEF | MIN | MAX

<resolution> numeric resolution (see Table 5-1) | ohms

DEF | MIN | MAX

<channel_list> numeric cc00-cc15 (E1345A/E1347A) none

Comments • To select a standard measurement range, specify range as the input signal’s
maximum expected resistance. The multimeter then selects the correct range.

• The AUTO and DEFault options for the range parameter have the same effect
(enable autorange). The DEF option for the resolution parameter defaults the
integration time to 1 PLC.

• The MIN and MAX parameters select the minimum or maximum values for range
and resolution:

For range: MIN = 232 Ω; MAX = 1048576 Ω

For resolution: MIN selects the best resolution (the smallest value from Table 5-1) for
the selected range. MAX selects the worst resolution (the largest value from Table 5-1)
for the selected range.

• The channel list is of the form (@ccnn), (@ccnn,ccnn), or (@ccnn:ccnn), where

cc = card number and nn = channel number (105 is channel 05 of card number 1,
for example).

• Four-wire resistance measurements use channel pairs. For example, on the HP

E1345A multiplexer, channels 0 and 8, 1 and 9, 2 and 10, etc. are paired. The
lower channel in each pair (0, 1, 2, ...7) is the "sense" channel. Use channel_list
to specify the sense channels.

• To select autorange, specify AUTO (or DEF) for range or do not specify a value
for the parameter. In the autorange mode, the multimeter samples the input signal
before each measurement and selects the appropriate range.

• To specify a MIN or MAX resolution while autoranging, you must specify

MEAS:FRES? AUTO or MEAS:FRES? DEF must be specified (you cannot omit
the range parameter). This prevents the MIN or MAX resolution from being
interpreted as a range setting.

• The fastest aperture time available when autoranging is 100 µs. In order to specify an
aperture time of 10 µs, you must select a fixed range.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 144

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example Making 4-Wire Ohms Measurements
MEAS:FRES? 1560,MAX,(@100:103) !Function: 4-wire ohms;
range selected: 1861 Ω;
MAX resolution: 125 mΩ;
specify sense channel list (scan 4 channels
once); trigger source is IMMediate by
default.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

:RESistance?
MEASure:RESistance? [<range>[,<resolution>]] , <channel_list>
selects the 2-wire ohms function and allows you to specify the range and resolution.
Two-wire ohms measurements can only be made using the scanning multimeter (a
channel list is required).

For a complete listing of range and resolution values available, see

Table 5-1 on page 120.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<range> numeric 232 Ω | 1861 Ω | 14894 Ω | ohms

119156 Ω | 1048576 Ω |
AUTO | DEF | MIN | MAX

<resolution> numeric resolution (see Table 5-1) | ohms

DEF | MIN | MAX

<channel_list> numeric Refer to the multiplexer user’s manual for none

a list of channels available.

Comments • To select a standard measurement range, specify range as the input signal’s
maximum expected resistance. The multimeter then selects the correct range.

• The AUTO and DEFault options for the range parameter have the same effect
(enable autorange). The DEF option for the resolution parameter defaults the
integration time to 1 PLC.

• The MIN and MAX parameters select the minimum or maximum values for range
and resolution:

For range: MIN = 232 Ω; MAX = 1048576 Ω

For resolution: MIN selects the best resolution (the smallest value from Table 5-1)
for the selected range. MAX selects the worst resolution (the largest value from
Table 5-1) for the selected range.

• The channel list is of the form (@ccnn), (@ccnn,ccnn), or (@ccnn:ccnn), where

cc = card number and nn = channel number (105 is channel 05 of card number 1,
for example).

• To select autorange, specify AUTO (or DEF) for range or do not specify a value
for the parameter. In the autorange mode, the multimeter samples the input signal
before each measurement and selects the appropriate range.

145 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • To specify a MIN or MAX resolution while autoranging, you must specify
MEAS:RES? AUTO or MEAS:RES? DEF must be specified (you cannot omit the
range parameter). This prevents the MIN or MAX resolution from being
interpreted as a range setting.

• The fastest aperture time available when autoranging is 100 µs. In order to specify an
aperture time of 10 µs, you must select a fixed range.

Example Making 2-Wire Ohms Measurements

MEAS:RES? 1320,MAX,(@105:109) !Function: 2-wire ohms;
range selected: 1861 Ω;
MAX resolution: 125 mΩ;
specify channel list (scan the 5 channels
once); trigger source is IMMediate by
default.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

:TEMPerature?
MEASure:TEMPerature? <transducer>,<type> [,<channel_list>]
selects the temperature function. All measurements are returned in Degrees Celsius.
The following transducers can be measured using the multimeter:

Thermocouples

Thermistors (2-wire or 4-wire measurement)

RTDs (2-wire or 4-wire measurement)

Two-wire temperature measurements can only be made using the scanning

multimeter (a channel list is required).

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<transducer> discrete TCouple | THERmistor | none

FTHermistor | RTD | FRTD

<type> discrete TC: B, E, J, K, N14, N28, R, S, or T none

numeric THER/FTH:2252 | 5000 | 10000 ohms

numeric RTD/FRTD: 85 | 92 alpha

<channel_list> numeric Refer to the multiplexer user’s manual for none

a list of channels available.

Comments • The HP E1344A, E1347A, E1353A, or E1476A multiplexer is required for

thermocouple measurements. Theses modules have built-in thermocouple
compensation circuitry on the terminal module.

• To measure the temperature of the reference thermistor on the HP E1347A, send:

MEAS:TEMP? THER,5000,(@cc93)

Chapter 5 Command Reference 146

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 where “cc” is the multiplexer (card) number.

• The channel list is of the form (@ccnn), (@ccnn,ccnn), or (@ccnn:ccnn), where

cc = card number and nn = channel number (105 is channel 05 of card number 1,
for example).

• Four-wire temperature measurements use channel pairs. On the HP E1345A

multiplexer, for example, channels 0 and 8, 1 and 9, 2 and 10, etc. are paired. The
lower channel in each pair (0, 1, 2, ...7) is the "sense" channel. Use channel_list to
specify the sense channels.

• You can measure RTD types 85 (alpha=0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C) and 92

(alpha=0.00392 Ω/Ω/°C). The values 385, 0.00385, 392, 0.00392 are also
accepted for the type parameter.

• Thermistor types are 2252, 5000, and 10000. Use thermistors that match the
Omega 440xx series temperature response curves.

Example Making Thermocouple Measurements

MEAS:TEMP? TC,J,(@100:107) !Measure J-type thermocouples (scan the 8
channels once); trigger source is IMMediate
by default.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

:VOLTage:AC?
MEASure:VOLTage:AC? [<range>[,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>] selects the
AC-coupled RMS voltage function and allows you to specify the range and
resolution. If you specify a channel list, those multiplexer channels are scanned.

For a complete listing of range and resolution values available, see

Table 5-1 on page 120.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<range> numeric 0.0795 V | 0.63V | 5.09 V | volts

40.7 V | 300 V | AUTO | DEF |
MIN | MAX

<resolution> numeric resolution (see Table 5-1) | volts

DEF | MIN | MAX

<channel_list> numeric Refer to the multiplexer user’s manual for none

a list of channels available.

Comments • To select a standard measurement range, specify range as the input signal’s
maximum expected voltage. The multimeter then selects the correct range.

• The AUTO and DEFault options for the range parameter have the same effect
(enable autorange). The DEF option for the resolution parameter defaults the
integration time to 1 PLC.

147 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The MIN and MAX parameters select the minimum or maximum values for range
and resolution:

For range: MIN = 0.0795 V; MAX = 300 V.

For resolution: MIN selects the best resolution (the smallest value from Table 5-1) for
the selected range. MAX selects the worst resolution (the largest value from Table 5-1)
for the selected range.

• The channel list is of the form (@ccnn), (@ccnn,ccnn), or (@ccnn:ccnn), where

cc = card number and nn = channel number (105 is channel 05 of card number 1,
for example).

• To select autorange, specify AUTO (or DEF) for range or do not specify a value
for the parameter. In the autorange mode, the multimeter samples the input signal
before each measurement and selects the appropriate range.

• To specify a MIN or MAX resolution while autoranging, you must specify

MEAS:VOLT:AC? AUTO or MEAS:VOLT:AC? DEF (you cannot omit the range
parameter). This prevents the MIN or MAX resolution from being interpreted as a
range setting.

• The fastest aperture time available when autoranging is 100 µs. In order to specify an
aperture time of 10 µs, you must select a fixed range.

Example Making AC Voltage Measurements

MEAS:VOLT:AC? 0.54,MAX,(@100) !Function: AC volts;
range selected: 0.63 V;
MAX resolution: 61.035 µV; specify single
channel; trigger source is IMMediate by
default.
enter statement !Enter reading into computer.

:VOLTage[:DC]?
MEASure:VOLTage[:DC]? [<range>[,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>] selects the
DC voltage function and allows you to specify the range and resolution. If you
specify a channel list, those multiplexer channels are scanned.

For a complete listing of range and resolution values available, see

Table 5-1 on page 120.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<range> numeric 0.113 V | 0.91 V | 7.27 V | volts

58.1 V | 300 V | AUTO | DEF |
MIN | MAX

<resolution> numeric resolution (see Table 5-1) | volts

DEF | MIN | MAX

<channel_list> numeric Refer to the multiplexer user’s manual for none

a list of channels available.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 148

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Comments • The [:DC] parameter is optional. Both of the following command statements
select the DC voltage function:

MEAS:VOLT:DC? or MEAS:VOLT?

• To select a standard measurement range, specify range as the input signal’s

maximum expected voltage. The multimeter then selects the correct range.

• The AUTO and DEFault options for the range parameter have the same effect
(enable autorange). The DEF option for the resolution parameter defaults the
integration time to 1 PLC.

• The MIN and MAX parameters select the minimum or maximum values for range
and resolution:

For range: MIN = 0.113 V; MAX = 300 V.

For resolution: MIN selects the best resolution (the smallest value from Table 5-1)
for the selected range. MAX selects the worst resolution (the largest value from
Table 5-1) for the selected range.

• The channel list is of the form (@ccnn), (@ccnn,ccnn), or (@ccnn:ccnn), where

cc = card number and nn = channel number (105 is channel 05 of card number 1,
for example).

• To select autorange, specify AUTO (or DEF) for range or do not specify a value
for the parameter. In the autorange mode, the multimeter samples the input signal
before each measurement and selects the appropriate range.

• To specify a MIN or MAX resolution while autoranging, you must specify

MEAS:VOLT:DC? AUTO or MEAS:VOLT:DC? DEF (you cannot omit the range
parameter). This prevents the MIN or MAX resolution from being interpreted as a
range setting.

• The fastest aperture time available when autoranging is 100 µs. In order to specify an
aperture time of 10 µs, you must select a fixed range.

Example Making DC Voltage Measurements

MEAS:VOLT:DC? 0.825,MAX,(@100) !Function: DC voltage;
range selected: 0.91 V;
MAX resolution: 61.035 µV; specify single
channel; trigger source is IMMediate by
default.
enter statement !Enter reading into computer.

149 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MEMory

The MEMory command subsystem enables you to store multimeter readings in

shared memory (an external VME memory card).

Subsystem Syntax MEMory

:VME:ADDRess <address>
:VME:ADDRess? [MIN | MAX]
:VME:SIZE <bytes>
:VME:SIZE? [MIN | MAX]
:VME:STATe <mode>
:VME:STATe?

MEMory The multimeter sends readings to an external VME memory card in IEEE-754
SubsystemData 32-bit notation (this is the IEEE standard for binary floating-point representation).
Format

:VME:ADDRess
MEMory:VME:ADDRess <address> sets the address of the external memory board
in A24 memory address space.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<address> numeric 2097152 - 14680060 none

#H200000 - #HDFFFFC

Comments • You can specify the address location in decimal or hexadecimal (#H....).

• MIN sets the address to 2097152 (#H200000). MAX sets the address to 14680060
(#HDFFFFC) - to store one reading.

• The VME address specified is based on the memory card configuration. Refer to the
memory card manual for configuration information.

• *RST Condition: MEM:VME:ADDR #H200000

Example Setting the VME Memory Address

MEM:VME:ADDR #H800000 !Set memory address location.

:VME:ADDRess?
MEMory:VME:ADDRess? [MIN | MAX] returns one of the following numbers to
the output buffer:

The present decimal address selected if MINimum or MAXimum are not specified.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 150

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The lowest decimal address available (2097152) if MIN is specified.

The highest decimal address available (14680060) if MAX is specified.

Example Querying the VME Memory Address

MEM:VME:ADDR #H800000 !Set memory address location.
MEM:VME:ADDR? !Query multimeter to return memory
address (in decimal).
enter statement !Enter into computer.

:VME:SIZE
MEMory:VME:SIZE <bytes> sets the size, in bytes, of the external VME memory
card.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<bytes> numeric 0 - 12582912 bytes

0 - #HC00000

Comments • You can specify the memory size in decimal or hexadecimal (#H....).

• MINimum sets the memory size to 0 bytes. MAXimum sets the memory size to
12582912 (#HC00000) bytes.

• The memory address (MEM:VME:ADDR) plus memory size (MEM:VME:SIZE)

must not exceed 14680064 (#HE00000).

• Since each reading requires 4 bytes of memory, the sample count multiplied by
the trigger count must be less than or equal to MEM:VME:SIZE/4.

• *RST Condition: MEM:VME:SIZE 0

Example Setting the VME Memory Size

MEM:VME:SIZE 100000 !Set memory size to 100 kBytes.

:VME:SIZE?
MEMory:VME:SIZE? [MIN | MAX] returns one of the following numbers to the
output buffer:

The present memory size (in decimal) selected if MINimum or MAXimum are not
specified.

The smallest memory size available (0) if MIN is specified.

The largest memory size available (12582912) if MAX is specified.

151 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example Querying the VME Memory Size
MEM:VME:SIZE 100000 !Set memory size to 100 kBytes.
MEM:VME:SIZE? !Query multimeter to return memory size.
enter statement !Enter string into computer.

:VME:STATe
MEMory:VME:STATe <mode> enables or disables use of an external VME
memory card for reading storage.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<mode> boolean OFF | 0 | ON | 1 none

Comments • You can substitute decimal values for the OFF ("0") and ON ("1") parameters.

• *RST Condition: MEM:VME:STAT OFF

Example Enabling VME Memory

MEM:VME:ADDR #H800000 !Set memory address location.
MEM:VME:SIZE #H100000 !Set memory size to 100 kBytes.
MEM:VME:STAT ON !Direct readings to memory card.
CONF:VOLT:DC 58.1 !Configure the multimeter.
SAMP:COUN 10000 !Set a burst of 10,000 readings.
INIT !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state;
store readings on memory card; trigger
source is IMMediate by default.

:VME:STATe?
MEMory:VME:STATe? returns a number to show whether use of the external VME
memory card is enabled or disabled: "1" = ON, "0" = OFF. The number is sent to
the output buffer.

Example Querying the VME Memory State

MEM:VME:STAT ON !Direct readings to external memory card.
MEM:VME:STAT? !Query multimeter to return external
memory state ("1").
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 152

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OUTPut

The OUTPut command subsystem enables you to route the multimeter’s voltmeter
complete signal to the VXIbus TTL trigger lines.

Subsystem Syntax OUTPut

:TTLTrgn[:STATe] <mode>
:TTLTrgn[:STATe]?

:TTLTrgn[:STATe]
OUTPut:TTLTrgn[:STATe] <mode> enables or disables routing of the voltmeter
complete signal to the specified VXIbus trigger line (TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7)
on the backplane P2 connector.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

n discrete 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7 none

<mode> boolean OFF | 0 | ON | 1 none

Comments • The OUTPut subsystem applies to the HP E1411B multimeter only.

• You can substitute decimal values for the OFF ("0") and ON ("1") parameters.

• The voltmeter complete signal is always routed to the E1411B multimeter’s front
panel "VM Complete" BNC connector. When enabled (ON), the OUTPut
command also routes voltmeter complete to the specified trigger line on connector
P2. When disabled (OFF), voltmeter complete is routed only to the multimeter’s
front panel connector.

• The multimeter generates the voltmeter complete signal after it has sampled the input
for each reading. The length of time this low-going TTL signal is true (low) depends
on the aperture time and on the autozero mode as shown below.

Voltmeter Complete low

Aperture Time Autozero ON Autozero OFF
320 ms (50 Hz) 350 ms 350 µs
267 ms (60 Hz) 370 µs 370 µs
20 ms (50 Hz) 20.5 ms 370 µs
16.7 ms (60 Hz) 17.2 ms 390 µs
2.5 ms (400 Hz) 3.1 ms 430 µs
100 µs 520 µs 250 µs
10 µs NA
70 µs

• The VXIbus trigger lines are open-collector TTL lines that remain in a
non-asserted (high) state until the voltmeter complete signal is sent.

• *RST Condition: OUTP:TTLTn OFF

153 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example Routing Voltmeter Complete to Trigger Line
OUTP:TTLT7 ON !Route signal to trigger line 7.

:TTLTrgn[:STATe]?
OUTPut:TTLTrgn[:STATe]? returns a number to show whether VXIbus trigger line
routing of the voltmeter complete signal is enabled or disabled: "1" = ON, "0" =
OFF. The number is sent to the output buffer.

Example Querying Voltmeter Complete Destination

OUTP:TTLT7 ON !Route signal to trigger line 7.
OUTP:TTLT7? !Query multimeter to return trigger line
mode.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 154

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 READ?

The READ? command is most commonly used with CONFigure to:

Place the multimeter in the wait-for-trigger state (executes the INITiate command).

Transfer the readings directly to the output buffer when the trigger is received (same
action as FETCh? but the readings are not stored in memory).

Subsystem Syntax READ?

Comments • The READ? command is slower than the INITiate command since readings are
formatted and sent to the output buffer as they are taken. However, the sample
count and trigger count are not limited with READ? since memory is not used.

• This command causes the multimeter to start taking readings as soon as its trigger
requirements are met (this is the same as the INIT command).

• Each reading sent to the output buffer is terminated with a Line Feed (LF). The
HP-IB End-or-Identify (EOI) signal is sent with the last byte transferred. If
multiple readings are returned, the readings are separated by commas and EOI is
sent only with the last byte.

• The output buffer capacity is 128 bytes. When the buffer fills, the multimeter
remains "busy" until you begin removing readings from the buffer.

• Readings are placed directly in the output buffer; therefore, mainframe RAM is not
allocated for the readings. You may want to use this mode of operation when
readings need to be taken at a continuous rate.

• The rate the controller removes the readings need to match the multimeter to keep
from causing an overflow condition.

controller output buffer 128 characters

multimeter FIFO 512 words

for example, 10 µs aperture equals 1 word per reading; all other apertures equals 2
words per reading.

• Related Commands: CONFigure, FETCh?, INITiate

Example Transferring Readings Directly to Output Buffer

dimension array !Dimension computer array to store 100
readings.
CONF:VOLT:DC !Function: DC voltage; stand-alone
multimeter.
SAMP:COUN 100 !Specify 100 readings per trigger
(stand-alone multimeter only).

155 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 READ? !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state and
make measurements; send readings to output
buffer; trigger source is IMMediate by
default.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 156

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SAMPle

The SAMPle command subsystem operates with the TRIGger command subsystem.
The SAMPle subsystem:

Designates the number of readings made for each trigger signal received
(SAMPle:COUNt).

Selects the pacing source for the sample period (SAMPle:SOURce).

Sets the sample period when the sample count is greater than one (SAMPle:TIMer).

Subsystem Syntax SAMPle

:COUNt <number>
:COUNt? [MIN | MAX]
:SOURce <source>
:SOURce?
:TIMer <period>
:TIMer? [MIN | MAX]

:COUNt
SAMPle:COUNt <number> designates the number of readings per trigger.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<number> numeric 1 - 16,777,215 | MIN | MAX none

Comments • MINimum sets 1 reading per trigger. MAXimum sets 16,777,215 readings per
trigger.

• If MAX or 16,777,215 is specified for number, an “Out of memory” error is

generated to show that memory is exceeded. However, you can execute READ?
to return the readings to the output buffer.

• CONFigure and MEASure set the sample count to 1.

• *RST Condition: SAMP:COUN 1

Example Setting the Sample Count

CONF:VOLT:DC !Function: DC voltage; stand-alone
multimeter.
TRIG:SOUR EXT !Trigger source is external BNC on
multimeter front panel.
SAMP:COUN 10 !Specify 10 readings per trigger.

157 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 READ? !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state;
make measurement when external trigger is
received; send readings to output buffer.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

:COUNt?
SAMPle:COUNt? [MIN | MAX] returns one of the following numbers to the output
buffer:

The present sample count (1 through 16,777,215) if MINimum or MAXimum is not

specified.

The minimum sample count (1) if MIN is specified.

The maximum sample count (16,777,215) if MAX is specified.

Example Querying the Sample Count

SAMP:COUN 10 !Specify 10 readings per trigger.
SAMP:COUN? !Query multimeter to return sample count.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

:SOURce
SAMPle:SOURce <source> selects the pacing source for the sample period when
SAMPle:COUNt is greater than 1. The sources available are:

IMM: initiate reading whenever multimeter is not busy.

TIMer: specify sample period using the SAMPle:TIMer command.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<source> discrete IMM | TIMer none

Comments • CONFigure and MEASure set the sample source to IMM.

• Related Commands: SAMPle:COUNt

• *RST Condition: SAMP:SOUR IMM

Example Setting the Pacing Source

CONF:VOLT:DC !Function: DC voltage; stand-alone
multimeter.
SAMP:COUN 10 !Specify 10 readings per trigger.
SAMP:SOUR TIM !Sample source is SAMPle:TIMer command.
SAMP:TIM 0.065 !Set 65 ms sample period.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 158

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 READ? !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state and
make measurements; send readings to output
buffer.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

:SOURce?
SAMPle:SOURce? returns "IMM" or "TIM" to show the present pacing source.
The quoted string is sent to the output buffer.

Example Querying the Pacing Source

SAMP:SOUR TIM !Sample source is SAMPle:TIMer command.
SAMP:SOUR? !Query multimeter to return pacing source
setting.
enter statement !Enter string into computer.

:TIMer
SAMPle:TIMer <period> defines the period between readings in a burst
(stand-alone multimeter) or defines the period between FET multiplexer channels in
the scan list (scanning multimeter).

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<period> numeric 76 µs - 65.534 ms | MIN | MAX seconds

Comments • MIN sets the time to 76 µs. MAX sets the time to 65.534 ms.

• When using SAMP:TIM, the first measurement occurs without the specified
period. However, you can insert a time interval before the first measurement
using the TRIGger:DELay command.

• To achieve specific sample periods, the aperture time must be set accordingly (see
the [SENSe:] subsystem). The following table shows the minimum sample period
for each available aperture time setting. The aperture times and sample periods
shown assume a fixed range and autozero off. Reading rates are for the DC
voltage function with readings stored mainframe/command module memory.

Aperture Time Minimum Sample Period Maximum Reading Rate

(SAMPle:TIMer) (Readings/second)
10 µs 76 µs 13,150

100 µs 0.32 ms 3,000

2.5 ms 2.8 ms 350
16.7 ms 16.9 ms 58
20 ms 20.3 ms 49
267 ms IMM 2
320 ms IMM 1.9

• The sample period must be longer than the specified aperture time.

159 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Related Commands: SAMPle:COUNt, SAMPle:SOURce, SENSe

• *RST Condition: SAMPle:TIMer 50E-3 seconds

Example Setting the Sample Period

CONF:VOLT:DC !Function: DC voltage; stand-alone
multimeter.
SAMP:COUN 10 !Specify 10 readings per trigger.
SAMP:SOUR TIM !Sample source is SAMPle:TIMer command.
SAMP:TIM 0.065 !Set 65 ms sample period.
READ? !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state and
make measurements; send readings to output
buffer.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

:TIMer?
SAMPle:TIMer? [MIN | MAX] returns one of the following numbers to the output
buffer:

The present sample period (76 µs through 65.534 ms) if MINimum or MAXimum is
not specified.

The minimum sample period available (76 µs) if MIN is specified.

The maximum sample period available (65.534 ms) if MAX is specified.

Example Querying the Sample Period

SAMP:SOUR TIM !Sample source is SAMPle:TIMer command.
SAMP:TIM MAX !Set sample period to maximum.
SAMP:TIM? !Query multimeter to return sample period.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 160

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [SENSe:]

The [SENSe:] command subsystem is most commonly used with CONFigure to

change specific "low-level" measurement parameters. Normally when you execute
CONFigure, the multimeter operates using predefined settings. [SENSe:] enables
you to change the following measurement parameters without completely
reconfiguring the multimeter:

Function

Range

Resolution

Aperture and Integration Time

Autozero

Offset Compensation

Subsystem Syntax [SENSe:]

FUNCtion[:<function>]
FUNCtion?
RESistance
:APERture <time>
:APERture? [MIN | MAX]
:NPLC <number>
:NPLC? [MIN | MAX]
:OCOMpensated <mode>
:OCOMpensated?
:RANGe:AUTO <mode>
:RANGe:AUTO?
:RANGe <range>
:RANGe? [MIN | MAX]
:RESolution <resolution>
:RESolution? [MIN | MAX]
VOLTage
:AC:RANGe <range>
:AC:RANGe? [MIN | MAX]
:APERture <time>
:APERture? [MIN | MAX]
[:DC]:RANGe <range>
[:DC]:RANGe? [MIN | MAX]
:NPLC <number>
:NPLC? [MIN | MAX]
:RANGe:AUTO <mode>
:RANGe:AUTO?

161 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 :RESolution <resolution>
:RESolution? [MIN | MAX]

Note The root command [SENSe:] is an implied command and can be omitted.

FUNCtion
[SENSe:]FUNCtion[:<function>] selects the measurement function. You can
select 4-wire resistance, AC voltage, or DC voltage.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<function> discrete :FRESistance | none

:VOLTage:AC |
:VOLTage[:DC]

Comments • The :DC parameter is optional. Both of the following command statements select
the DC voltage function:

FUNC:VOLT:DC or FUNC:VOLT

• *RST Condition: SENS:FUNC:VOLT:DC

Example Changing Measurement Function

CONF:VOLT:DC !Function: DC voltage; stand-alone
multimeter.
FUNC:FRES !Change function to 4-wire resistance.
READ? !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state and
make measurement; send reading to output
buffer.
enter statement !Enter reading into computer.

FUNCtion?
[SENSe:]FUNCtion? returns one of the following quoted strings to the output
buffer: “FRES”, “VOLT:AC”, or “VOLT”.

Example Querying the Measurement Function

FUNC:FRES !Function: 4-wire ohms; stand-alone
multimeter.
FUNC? !Query multimeter to return selected
function.
enter statement !Enter quoted string into computer.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 162

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 RESistance:APERture
[SENSe:]RESistance:APERture <time> sets the aperture (integration time) in
seconds. Values are rounded up to the nearest aperture time shown in the following
table.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<time> numeric 10 µs | 100 µs | 2.5 ms | seconds

16.7 ms | 20 ms | 267 ms |
320 ms | MIN | MAX

Comments • MINimum sets the aperture time to 10 ms. MAXimum sets the aperture time to
320 ms.

• The fastest aperture time available when autoranging is 100 µs. In order to specify an
aperture time of 10 µs, you must select a fixed range.

• Setting the aperture time also sets the integration time in power line cycles (PLCs)
and the resolution. For example, an aperture time of 16.7 ms (60 Hz line frequency)
sets an integration time of 1 PLC. The corresponding resolution depends on the
function and range you select.

• The RES:APER command overrides the results of previously executed

RESistance:NPLC and RESistance:RESolution commands (the last command
executed has priority).

• The greater the aperture time, the greater the normal mode rejection (and the
lower the reading rate).

• For a 50 Hz line frequency, only the 20 ms and 320 ms settings provide normal
mode rejection of power line related noise. For a 60 Hz line frequency, only the
16.7 ms and 267 ms settings provide normal mode rejection of power line related
noise.

• *RST Condition: 16.7 ms (60 Hz) or 20 ms (50 Hz)

Example Setting the Aperture Time

RES:APER 2.67E-01 !Aperture time is 267 ms.

163 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 RESistance:APERture?
[SENSe:]RESistance:APERture? [MIN | MAX] returns one of the following
numbers to the output buffer:

The present aperture time in seconds if MIN or MAX is not specified.

The minimum aperture time available (10 µs) if MIN is specified.

The maximum aperture time available (320 ms) if MAX is specified.

Example Querying the Aperture Time

RES:APER 2.67E-01 !Aperture time is 267 ms.
RES:APER? !Query multimeter to return aperture time.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

RESistance:NPLC
[SENSe:]RESistance:NPLC <number> sets the integration time in power line
cycles (PLCs). Values are rounded up to the nearest number of PLCs shown in the
following table.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<number> numeric 0.0005 | 0.005 | 0.125 | 1 | 16 | PLCs

MIN | MAX

Comments • MINimum selects 0.0005 PLCs. MAXimum selects 16 PLCs. Setting the
integration time in power line cycles (PLCs) also sets the aperture time and the
resolution. For example, 16 PLCs (60 Hz line frequency) sets an aperture time of
267 ms. The corresponding resolution depends on the function and range you
select.

• The RES:NPLC command overrides the results of previously executed

RESistance:APERture and RESistance:RESolution commands (the last command
executed has priority).

• The greater the number of PLCs, the greater the normal mode rejection (and the
lower the reading rate).

• Only the 1 PLC and 16 PLC settings provide normal mode rejection of 50 Hz or
60 Hz power line related noise.

• *RST Condition: 1 PLC

Example Setting the Integration Time in PLCs

RES:NPLC 16 !Integration time is 16 PLCs.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 164

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 RESistance:NPLC?
[SENSe:]RESistance:NPLC? [MIN | MAX] returns one of the following numbers to
the output buffer:

The present integration time in PLCs if MINimum or MAXimum

is not specified.

The minimum integration time available (0.0005) if MIN is specified.

The maximum integration time available (16) if MAX is specified.

Example Querying the Integration Time

RES:NPLC 16 !Integration time is 16 PLCs.
RES:NPLC? !Query multimeter to return integration time.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

RESistance:OCOMpensated
[SENSe:]RESistance:OCOMpensated <mode> enables or disables the offset
compensated ohms function.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<mode> boolean OFF | 0 | ON | 1 none

Comments • You can substitute decimal values for the OFF ("0") and ON ("1") parameters.

• You can use offset compensation for 2-wire or 4-wire resistance measurements on
any measurement range.

• With offset compensation enabled, the multimeter measures the offset voltage
before each resistance measurement and subtracts it from the following reading.
This prevents the offset voltage from affecting the resistance but doubles the time
required per reading.

• *RST Condition: RES:OCOM OFF

Example Enabling Offset Compensation

RES:OCOM ON !Enable offset compensation.

RESistance: OCOMpensated?
[SENSe:]RESistance:OCOMpensated? returns a number to show whether offset
compensation is enabled or disabled: "1" = ON, "0" = OFF. The number is sent to
the output buffer.

165 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example Querying the Offset Compensation Mode
RES:OCOM ON !Enable offset compensation.
RES:OCOM? !Query multimeter to return offset
compensation mode.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

RESistance:RANGe
[SENSe:]RESistance:RANGe <range> selects the range for 2-wire and 4-wire
resistance measurements.

For a complete listing of range and resolution values available, see

Table 5-1 on page 120.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<range> numeric 256 Ω | 2048 Ω | 16384 Ω | ohms

131072 Ω | 1048576 Ω |
MIN | MAX

Comments • To select a standard measurement range, specify range as the input signal’s
maximum expected resistance. The multimeter then selects the correct range.

• MIN selects the minimum range available with the RESistance:RANGe command
(256 Ω). MAX selects the maximum range available (1048576 Ω).

• You must select a range using RESistance:RANGe before specifying resolution.

Also, in order to specify an aperture time of 10 µs, you must select a fixed range.

• Specifying a fixed range disables the autorange mode set by the

RES:RANG:AUTO command.

• The RES:RANG command overrides the range setting from a previous CONFigure
command on the same function. The multimeter uses the same aperture time to
set the resolution on the new range as was selected by CONFigure.

• *RST Condition: RES:RANG 16384 Ω

Example Changing the Range

CONF:RES 1320,MAX,(@105:109) !Function: 2-wire ohms;
range selected: 1861 Ω;
MAX resolution: 125 Ω;
specify channel list.
RES:RANG 220 !Range selected: 256 Ω;
MAX resolution: 15.625 mΩ.
READ? !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state and
make measurements; send readings to output
buffer.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 166

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 RESistance:RANGe?
[SENSe:]RESistance:RANGe? [MIN | MAX] returns one of the following numbers
to the output buffer:

The present resistance range is selected if MIN or MAX is not specified. Only the ranges
available with the RANGe command are returned. For example, if CONFigure selects
the 232 Ω range,
256 Ω is the range returned.

The minimum resistance range available (256 Ω) if MIN is specified.

The maximum resistance range available (1048576 Ω) if MAX is specified.

Example Querying the Measurement Range

RES:RANG 256 !Select 256 Ω range.
RES:RANG? !Query multimeter to return the present
range.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

RESistance:RANGe :AUTO
[SENSe:]RESistance:RANGe:AUTO <mode> enables or disables the autorange
function for resistance measurements.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<mode> boolean OFF | 0 | ON | 1 none

Comments • You can substitute decimal values for the OFF ("0") and ON ("1") parameters.

• When autoranging is ON, the multimeter samples the input before each
measurement and selects the appropriate range.

• If you explicitly select a range using RESistance:RANGe, autoranging is turned OFF.

• In order to specify an aperture time of 10 µs, you must select a fixed range
(RESistance:RANGe:AUTO OFF, for example).

• Related Commands: CONFigure, RESistance:RANGe

• *RST Condition: RES:RANG:AUTO ON

Example Disabling Autoranging

RES:RANG:AUTO OFF !Disable autorange.

167 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 RESistance:RANGe:AUTO?
[SENSe:]RESistance:RANGe:AUTO? returns a number to show whether the
autorange mode is enabled or disabled: "1" = ON, "0" = OFF. The number is sent to
the output buffer.

Example Querying the Autorange Mode

RES:RANG:AUTO OFF !Disable autorange.
RES:RANG:AUTO? !Query multimeter to return autorange
mode.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

RESistance:RESolution
[SENSe:]RESistance:RESolution <resolution> selects the resolution for 2-wire
and 4-wire resistance measurements.

For a complete listing of range and resolution values available, see

Table 5-1 on page 120.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<resolution> numeric resolution (see Table 5-1) | ohms

MIN | MAX

Comments • MINimum selects the best resolution (the smallest value from
Table 5-1) for the selected range. MAXimum selects the worst resolution (the
largest value from Table 5-1) for the selected range.

• You must select a range using RESistance:RANGe before specifying resolution.

Also, only specify a resolution when making measurements on a fixed range.
Otherwise, the resolution will change to correspond with the range selected during
autoranging.

• If autoranging is required, set the resolution using the MIN or MAX parameters or
select a specific aperture time using RESistance:APERture.

• If necessary to achieve the specified resolution, the multimeter will increase the
integration time as needed. This command overrides the results of previously
executed RESistance:APERture and RESistance:NPLC commands (the last
command executed has priority).

• The RES:RES command overrides the resolution setting from a previous

CONFigure command on the same function.

• Related Commands: CONFigure, RESistance:APERture, RESistance:NPLC

• *RST Condition: Based on the *RST values for the RESistance:APERture and
RESistance:NPLC commands.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 168

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example Changing the Resolution
CONF:FRES 1560,MAX,(@100:103) !Function: 4-wire ohms;
range selected: 1861 Ω;
MAX resolution: 125 mΩ;
specify sense channel list.
RES:RANG 220 !Range selected: 256 Ω;
MAX resolution: 15.626 mΩ.
RES:RES 2.44E-04 !Set resolution to 244 µΩ;
selects 16.7 ms aperture time
(60 Hz line frequency).
READ? !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state and
make measurements;
send readings to output buffer.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

RESistance:RESolution?
[SENSe:]RESistance:RESolution? [MIN | MAX] returns one of the following
numbers to the output buffer.

The present resolution selected if MIN or MAX are not specified. Only the resolution
values available on ranges set by the RANGe command are returned.

The resolution with the smallest value (the best resolution) for the selected range if
MIN is specified.

The resolution with the largest value (the worst resolution) for the selected range if
MAX is specified.

Example Querying the Resolution

RES:RES 2.44E-04 !Set resolution to 244 µΩ.
RES:RES? !Query multimeter to return the present
resolution.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

VOLTage:AC:RANGe
[SENSe:]VOLTage:AC:RANGe <range> selects the range for AC-coupled RMS
voltage measurements.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<range> numeric 0.0875 V | 0.7 V | 5.6 V | 44.8 V | volts

300 V | MIN | MAX

Comments • To select a standard measurement range, specify range as the input signal’s
maximum expected voltage. The multimeter then selects the correct range.

169 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • MIN selects the minimum range available with the VOLTage:AC:RANGe
command: 0.0875V. MAX selects the maximum range available: 300 V.

• You must select a range using VOLTage:AC:RANGe before specifying resolution.

Also, in order to specify an aperture time of 10 µs, you must select a fixed range.

• Specifying a fixed range disables the autorange mode set by the

VOLT:RANG:AUTO command.

• The VOLT:AC:RANG command overrides the range setting from a previous

CONFigure command specifying the same function. With the new range, a new
resolution is also selected. However, this resolution is based on the aperture time
set by CONFigure.

• Changing the AC range changes the DC voltage range to a corresponding value

(the AC range is 7⁄10 of the DC range).

• *RST Condition: VOLT:AC:RANG 5.6V

Example Changing the Range

CONF:VOLT:AC 0.54,MAX,(@100:103) !Function: AC volts;
range selected: 0.63 V;
MAX resolution: 61.035 µV;
specify channel list.
VOLT:AC:RANG 0.5 !Range selected: 0.7 V;
MAX resolution: 61.035 µV.
READ? !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state and
make measurement;
send readings to the output buffer.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

VOLTage:AC: RANGe?
[SENSe:]VOLTage:AC:RANGe? [MIN | MAX] returns one of the following
numbers to the output buffer.

The present voltage range selected if MIN or MAX is not specified. Only the ranges
available with the RANGe command are returned. For example, if CONFigure selects
the 0.63 V range, 0.7 V is the range returned.

The minimum voltage range available with the VOLTage:AC:RANGe command

(0.0875 V) if MIN is specified.

The maximum voltage range available with the VOLTage:AC:RANGe command

(300 V) if MAX is specified.

Example Querying the Measurement Range

VOLT:AC:RANG 0.7 !Select 0.7 V range.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 170

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 VOLT:AC:RANG? !Query multimeter to return the present
range.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

VOLTage:APERture
[SENSe:]VOLTage:APERture <time> sets the aperture (integration time) in
seconds. Values are rounded up to the nearest aperture time shown in the following
table.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<time> numeric 10 µs | 100 µs | 2.5 ms | seconds

16.7 ms | 20 ms | 267 ms |
320 ms | MIN | MAX

Comments • MIN sets the aperture time to 10 µs. MAX sets the aperture time to 320 ms.

• The fastest aperture time available when autoranging is 100 ms. In order to specify an
aperture time of 10 ms, you must select a fixed range.

• Setting the aperture time also sets the integration time in power line cycles (PLCs)
and the resolution. For example, an aperture time of 16.7 ms (60 Hz line frequency)
sets an integration time of 1 PLC. The corresponding resolution depends on the
function and range you select.

• The VOLT:APER command overrides the results of previously executed

VOLTage:NPLC and VOLTage:RESolution commands
(the last command executed has priority).

• The greater the aperture time, the greater the normal mode rejection (and the
lower the reading rate).

• For a 50 Hz line frequency, only the 20 ms and 320 ms settings provide normal mode
rejection of power line related noise. For a 60 Hz line frequency, only the 16.7 ms
and 267 ms settings provide normal mode rejection of power line related noise.

• *RST Condition: 16.7 ms (60 Hz) or 20 ms (50 Hz)

Example Setting the Aperture Time

VOLT:APER 2.67E-01 !Aperture time is 267 ms.

VOLTage:APERture?
[SENSe:]VOLTage:APERture? [MIN | MAX] returns one of the following numbers
to the output buffer:

The present aperture time in seconds if MIN or MAX is not specified.

The minimum aperture time available (10 µs) if MIN is specified.

The maximum aperture time available (320 ms) if MAX is specified.

171 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example Querying the Aperture Time
VOLT:APER 2.67E-01 !Aperture time is 267 ms.
VOLT:APER? !Query multimeter to return aperture time.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

VOLTage[:DC]:RANGe
[SENSe:]VOLTage[:DC]:RANGe <range> selects the range for DC voltage
measurements.

For a complete listing of range and resolution values available, see

Table 5-1 on page 120.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<range> numeric 0.125 V | 1.0 V | 8.0 V | volts

64.0 V | 300 V | MIN | MAX

Comments • The [:DC] parameter is optional. Both of the following command statements
select a DC voltage range:

VOLT:DC:RANG <range> or VOLT:RANG <range>

• To select a standard measurement range, specify range as the input signal’s

maximum expected voltage. The multimeter then selects the correct range.

• MIN selects the minimum range available with the VOLTage[:DC]:RANGe command:
0.125 V. MAX selects the maximum DC voltage range available: 300 V.

• You must select a range using VOLTage[:DC]:RANGe before specifying

resolution. Also, in order to specify an aperture time of 10 µs, you must select a
fixed range.

• Specifying a fixed range disables the autorange mode set by the

VOLT:RANG:AUTO command.

• The VOLT[:DC]:RANG command overrides the range setting from a previous

CONFigure command on the same function. With the new range, a new
resolution is also selected. However, this resolution is based on the aperture time
set by CONFigure.

• Changing the DC range changes the AC voltage range to a corresponding value

(the AC range is 7⁄10 of the DC range).

• *RST Condition: VOLT:RANG:DC 8.0V

Example Changing the Range

CONF:VOLT:DC 0.85,MAX,(@100:103) !Function: DC volts;
range selected: 0.91 V;
MAX resolution: 61.035 µV; specify
channel list.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 172

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 VOLT:DC:RANG 0.9 !Range selected 1 V;
MAX resolution: 61.035 µV.
READ? !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state and
make measurements;
send readings to output buffer.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

VOLTage[:DC]:RANGe?
[SENSe:]VOLTage[:DC]:RANGe? [MIN | MAX] returns one of the following
numbers to the output buffer.

The present voltage range selected if MIN or MAX are not specified. Only the ranges
available with the RANGe command are returned. For example, if CONFigure
selects the 0.91 V range, 1.0 V is the range returned.

The minimum voltage range available with the VOLTage:DC:RANGe command

(0.125 V) if MIN is specified.

The maximum voltage range available with the VOLTage:DC:RANGe command

(300 V) if MAX is specified.

Example Querying the Measurement Range

VOLT:DC:RANG 1.0 !Select 1 V range.
VOLT:DC:RANG? !Query multimeter to return the present
range.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

VOLTage:NPLC
[SENSe:]VOLTage:NPLC <number> sets the integration time in power line cycles
(PLCs). Values are rounded up to the nearest number of PLCs shown in the
following table.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<number> numeric 0.0005 | 0.005 | 0.125 | 1 | 16 | PLCs

MIN | MAX

Comments • MIN selects 0.0005 PLCs. MAX selects 16 PLCs. Setting the integration time in
PLCs also sets the aperture time and the resolution. For example, 16 PLCs (60 Hz
line frequency) sets an aperture time of 267 ms. The corresponding resolution
depends on the function and range you select.

• The VOLT:NPLC command overrides the results of previously executed

VOLTage:APERture and VOLTage:RESolution commands (the last command
executed has priority).

173 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The greater the number of PLCs, the greater the normal mode rejection (and the
lower the reading rate).

• Only the 1 PLC and 16 PLC settings provide normal mode rejection of 50 Hz or
60 Hz power line related noise.

• *RST Condition: 1 PLC

Example Setting the Integration Time in PLCs

VOLT:NPLC 16 !Integration time is 16 PLCs.

VOLTage:NPLC?
[SENSe:]VOLTage:NPLC? [MIN | MAX] returns one of the following numbers to
the output buffer:

The present integration time in PLCs if MIN or MAX is not specified.

The minimum integration time available (0.0005) if MIN is specified.

The maximum integration time available (16) if MAX is specified.

Example Querying the Integration Time

VOLT:NPLC 16 !Integration time is 16 PLCs.
VOLT:NPLC? !Query multimeter to return integration time.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO
[SENSe:]VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO <mode> enables or disables the autorange
function for voltage measurements.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<mode> boolean OFF | 0 | ON | 1 none

Comments • You can substitute decimal values for the OFF ("0") and ON ("1") parameters.

• When autoranging is ON, the multimeter samples the input before each
measurement and selects the appropriate range.

• If you explicitly select a range using VOLTage:AC:RANGe or

VOLTage:DC:RANGe, autoranging is turned OFF.

• In order to specify an aperture time of 10 µs, you must select a fixed range
(VOLT:RANG:AUTO OFF, for example).

Chapter 5 Command Reference 174

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Related Commands: CONFigure, VOLTage:RANGe

• *RST Condition: VOLT:RANG:AUTO ON

Example Disabling Autoranging

VOLT:RANG:AUTO OFF !Disable autorange.

VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO?
[SENSe:]VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO? returns a number to show whether the
autorange mode is enabled or disabled: "1" = ON, "0" = OFF. The value is sent to
the output buffer.

Example Querying the Autorange Mode

VOLT:RANG:AUTO OFF !Disable autorange.
VOLT:RANG:AUTO? !Query multimeter to return autorange
mode.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

VOLTage:RESolution
[SENSe:]VOLTage:RESolution <resolution> selects the resolution for AC and DC
voltage measurements.

For a complete listing of range and resolution values available, see

Table 5-1 on page 120.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<resolution> numeric resolution (see Table 5-1) | volts

MIN | MAX

Comments • MINimum selects the best resolution (the smallest value from Table 5-1) for the
selected range. MAXimum selects the worst resolution (the largest value from
Table 5-1) for the selected range.

• You must select a range using VOLTage:RANGe before specifying resolution.

Also, only specify a resolution when making measurements on a fixed range.
Otherwise, the resolution will change to correspond with the range selected during
autoranging.

• If autoranging is required, set the resolution using the MIN or MAX parameters or
select a specific aperture time using VOLT:APERture.

• To achieve the specified resolution, the multimeter will increase the integration
time as needed. This command overrides the results of previously executed
VOLTage:APERture and VOLTage:NPLC commands (the last command executed
has priority).

175 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • The VOLT:RANG command overrides the range setting from a previous
CONFigure command on the same function. The multimeter uses the same
aperture time to set the resolution on the new range as was selected by CONFigure.

• Related Commands: CONFigure, VOLTage:APERture, VOLTage:NPLC

• *RST Condition: Based on the *RST values for the VOLTage:APERture and
VOLTage:NPLC commands.

Example Changing the Resolution

CONF:VOLT:DC 6.25,MAX,(@100:103) !Function: DC volts;
range selected: 7.27 V;
MAX resolution: 488.281 µV; specify
channel list.
VOLT:DC:RANG 0.95 !Range selected: 0.125 V;
MAX resolution: 7.629 µV.
VOLT:RES 1.19E-07 !Set resolution to 0.119 µV;
selects 16.7 ms aperture time
(60 Hz line frequency).
READ? !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state and
make measurements;
send readings to output buffer.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

VOLTage:RESolution?
[SENSe:]VOLTage:RESolution? [MIN | MAX] returns one of the following
numbers to the output buffer.

The present resolution selected if MIN or MAX is not specified. Only the resolution
values available on ranges set by the RANGe command are returned.

The resolution with the smallest value (the best resolution) for the selected range if
MIN is specified.

The resolution with the largest value (the worst resolution) for the selected range if
MAX is specified.

Example Querying the Resolution

VOLT:RES 1.19E-07 !Set resolution to 0.119 µV.
VOLT:RES? !Query multimeter to return the present
resolution.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 176

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SYSTem

The SYSTem command subsystem returns error numbers and messages in the error
queue. For the scanning multimeter configuration only, SYSTem can also return the
module type and description.

Subsystem Syntax SYSTem

:CDEScription? <card_number>
:CTYPe? <card_number>
:ERRor?

:CDEScription?
SYSTem:CDEScription? <card_number> returns a description of the selected
multiplexer module within the scanning multimeter. The command returns one of
the following strings to the output buffer:

• “16 Channel Relay Mux” (HP E1345A)

• “48 Channel Single-Ended Relay Mux” (HP E1346A)

• “16 Channel Relay Mux with T/C” (HP E1347A)

• “64 Channel Relay Mux” (HP E1460A)

• “No Card”

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<card_number> numeric 1 - 99 none

The card number relates only to the multiplexer modules within the scanning
multimeter. The multiplexer with the lowest logical address is always card number
1. The multiplexer with the next successive logical address is card number 2, and so
on.

Example Reading Description of Card 1

SYST:CDES? 1 !Query module description.

:CTYPe?
SYSTem:CTYPe? <card_number> returns the card type of the selected multiplexer
module within the scanning multimeter. The command returns one of the following
strings to the output buffer:

• HEWLETT-PACKARD,E1345A,0,A.01.00

• HEWLETT-PACKARD,E1346A,0,A.01.00

177 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • HEWLETT-PACKARD,E1347A,0,A.01.00

• HEWLETT-PACKARD,E1460A,0,A.01.00

• NONE,NONE,0,0

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<card_number> numeric 1 - 99 none

The card number relates only to the multiplexer modules within the scanning
multimeter. The multiplexer with the lowest logical address is always card number
1. The multiplexer with the next successive logical address is card number 2, and so
on.

Example Reading Card Type of Card 1

SYST:CTYP? 1 !Query card type.

:ERRor?
SYSTem:ERRor? returns the error numbers and corresponding error messages in
the error queue. Errors generated from the HP E1301A front panel are not stored in
the error queue. See Appendix B in this manual for a listing of the error numbers
and messages.

Comments • When an error is generated by the multimeter, it stores an error number and
corresponding message in the error queue.

• One error is removed from the error queue each time the SYSTem:ERRor?
command is executed. The errors are cleared in a first-in, first-out order. This
means that if several errors are waiting in the queue, each SYSTem:ERRor? query
returns the oldest (not the most recent) error. That error is then removed from the
queue.

• When the error queue is empty, subsequent SYSTem:ERRor? queries return

+0, “No error”. To clear all errors from the queue, execute the *CLS command.

• The error queue has a maximum capacity of 30 errors. If the queue overflows, the
last error is replaced with -350, “Too many errors”. No additional errors are
accepted by the queue until space becomes available.

Example Reading the Error Queue

SYST:ERR? !Query the error queue.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 178

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 TRIGger

The TRIGger command subsystem controls the behavior of the trigger system. The
subsystem can control:

The number of triggers to occur before the multimeter returns to the idle state
(TRIGger:COUNt).

The delay between trigger and measurement (TRIGger:DELay).

An immediate internal trigger (TRIGger:IMMediate).

The source of the trigger (TRIGger:SOURce).

Subsystem Syntax TRIGger

:COUNt <number>
:COUNt? [MIN | MAX]
:DELay <period>
:DELay? [MIN | MAX]
:DELay:AUTO <mode>
:DELay:AUTO?
[:IMMediate]
:SOURce <source>
:SOURce?

:COUNt
TRIGger:COUNt <number> sets the number of triggers issued or the number of
scans through the channel list.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<number> numeric 1 - 16,777,215 | MIN | MAX none

Comments • MIN selects 1 trigger (stand-alone multimeter) or 1 scan through the channel list
(scanning multimeter). MAX selects 16,777,215 triggers or scans through the
channel list.

• If MAX or 16,777,215 is specified for the number parameter, an

“Out of memory” error occurs to show that this generates too many readings to
store in memory. However, you can use the READ? command to return the
readings to the output buffer.

• In the scanning multimeter configuration, TRIGger:COUNt specifies the number of

scans through the channel list. To take several readings on a particular channel, the
multimeter must be programmed to scan only one channel (see SAMPle:COUNt), or
scan the channel list multiple times.

179 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • CONFigure and MEASure set the trigger count to 1.

• *RST Condition: TRIG:COUN 1

Examples Setting the Trigger Count (Scanning Multimeter)

CONF:VOLT:DC (@100:104) !Function: DC voltage;
specify channel list.
TRIG:SOUR EXT !Trigger source is external BNC on
multimeter front panel.
TRIG:COUN 10 !Multimeter will accept 10 external triggers
(5 channels will be scanned with each
trigger).
READ? !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state;
make measurement when external trigger is
received; send readings to output buffer.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

Setting the Trigger Count (Stand-Alone Multimeter)

CONF:VOLT:DC !Function: DC voltage; stand-alone
multimeter.
TRIG:SOUR EXT !Trigger source is external BNC on
multimeter front panel.
TRIG:COUN 10 !Multimeter will accept 10 external triggers
(one measurement is taken with each
trigger).
READ? !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state;
make measurement when external trigger is
received; send readings to output buffer.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

:COUNt?
TRIGger:COUNt? [MIN | MAX] returns one of the following numbers to the output
buffer:

The present trigger count (1 through 16,777,215) if MIN or MAX are not specified.

The minimum trigger count available (1) if MIN is specified.

The maximum trigger count available (16,777,215) if MAX is specified.

Example Querying the Trigger Count

TRIG:COUN 10 !Multimeter will accept 10 external triggers.
TRIG:COUN? !Query multimeter to return trigger count.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 180

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 :DELay
TRIGger:DELay <period> sets the delay period between receipt of the trigger and
the start of the measurement.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<period> numeric 0 - 16.777215 | seconds

MIN | MAX

Comments • MIN selects the minimum delay of 0 seconds for DC voltage and resistance
measurements or 0.5 seconds for AC voltage measurements. MAX selects the
maximum delay of 16.777215 seconds for all functions.

• For the stand-alone multimeter, the trigger delay is inserted between the trigger
and the first measurement of a burst. For the scanning multimeter, the trigger
delay is inserted between the trigger and the first channel in each scan.

• If a trigger delay is specified using the TRIG:DEL <period>,

TRIGger:DELay:AUTO is turned OFF.

• You can set a delay between measurements in a burst using the SAMPle:TIMer
command.

• *RST Condition: DC volts/resistance: 0 seconds;

AC volts: 0.5 seconds.

Example Setting the Trigger Delay

TRIG:DEL 2 !Wait 2 seconds between trigger and start of
scan.

:DELay?
TRIGger:DELay? [MIN | MAX] returns one of the following numbers to the output
buffer:

The present trigger delay (0 through 16.777215 seconds) if MIN or MAX is not
specified.

The minimum trigger delay available (0 seconds for DC volts/

resistance; 0.5 seconds for AC volts) if MIN is specified.

The maximum trigger delay available (16.777215 seconds) if MAX is specified.

Example Querying the Trigger Delay

TRIG:DEL 2 !Wait 2 seconds between trigger and start of
measurement.
TRIG:DEL? !Query multimeter to return trigger count.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

181 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 :DELay:AUTO
TRIGger:DELay:AUTO <mode> enables or disables a trigger delay based on the
present function, range, and integration time. The trigger delay specifies the period
between the trigger signal and the start of the measurement.

Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<mode> boolean OFF | 0 | ON | 1 none

Comments • You can substitute decimal values for the OFF ("0") and ON ("1") parameters.

• When TRIG:DEL:AUTO is ON, the trigger delay is 0 seconds for DC voltage and
resistance measurements or 0.5 seconds for AC voltage measurements.

• For the stand-alone multimeter, the trigger delay is inserted between the trigger
and the first measurement of a burst. For the scanning multimeter, the trigger
delay is inserted between the trigger and the first channel in each scan.

• If a trigger delay is specified using the TRIGger:DELay <period> command,

TRIG:DEL:AUTO is turned OFF.

• You can set a delay between measurements in a burst using the SAMPle:TIMer
command.

• *RST Condition: TRIG:DEL:AUTO ON

Example Disabling Automatic Trigger Delay

TRIG:DEL:AUTO OFF !Disable automatic trigger delay.

:DELay:AUTO?
TRIGger:DELay:AUTO? returns a number to show whether the automatic trigger
delay mode is on or off: "1" = ON, "0" = OFF. The number is sent to the output
buffer.

Example Querying the Trigger Delay Mode

TRIG:DEL:AUTO OFF !Disable automatic trigger delay.
TRIG:DEL:AUTO? !Query multimeter to return trigger delay
mode.
enter statement !Enter value into computer.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 182

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 [:IMMediate]
TRIGger[:IMMediate] causes a trigger to occur immediately provided the
multimeter is in the wait-for-trigger state (see the INITiate subsystem). The trigger
source must be TRIGger:SOURce BUS or TRIGger:SOURce HOLD.

Comments • The [:IMMediate] parameter is optional. Both of the following command

statements are valid:

TRIG:IMM or TRIG

• When the TRIG:IMM command is executed, the readings are stored in

mainframe/command module memory. Use FETCh? to place the readings in the
output buffer.

• The TRIGger:SOURce BUS or TRIGger:SOURce HOLD commands remain in

effect after the TRIG:IMM command is executed.

• Related Commands: FETCh?, INITiate, TRIGger:SOURce

Example Sending an Immediate Trigger

CONF:VOLT:DC !Function: DC voltage; stand-alone
multimeter.
TRIG:SOUR HOLD !Suspend triggering.
INIT !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state;
store reading in memory when trigger is
received.
TRIG !Trigger the multimeter.
FETC? !Place reading in output buffer.
enter statement !Enter reading into computer.

:SOURce
TRIGger:SOURce <source> configures the trigger system to respond to the
specified source. The following sources are available:

BUS: Group Execute Trigger (GET) bus command or *TRG common command.

EXT: The multimeter’s External Trigger BNC connector.

HOLD: Suspend triggering. Only the TRIGger:IMMediate command will trigger the
multimeter.

IMMediate: The trigger system is always true (continuous triggering). The only
valid trigger sources with IMMediate are TRIGger:SOURce BUS and
TRIGger:SOURce HOLD.

TTLTrg0 - TTLTrg7: Trigger source is VXIbus trigger line 0 through 7. These trigger
sources are available with the HP E1411B multimeter only.

183 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units

<source> discrete BUS | EXT | HOLD | IMMediate | none

TTLTrg0 - TTLTrg7

Comments • The TRIGger:SOURce command only selects the trigger source. You must use
the INITiate command to place the multimeter in the wait-for-trigger state. (The
MEASure command automatically executes an INITiate command.)

• TRIGger:SOURce EXT uses the multimeter’s External Trigger BNC connector as

the trigger source. The multimeter triggers on the falling (negative-going) edge of
a TTL input signal.

• TRIGger:IMMediate causes a trigger to occur immediately provided the

multimeter is placed in the wait-for-trigger state using INITiate.

• When TRIGger:SOURce BUS is selected, ABORt returns the multimeter to the

idle state. When a Group Execute Trigger (GET) bus command or *TRG common
command is executed, the “Trigger ignored” error is generated.

• When TRIGger:SOURce HOLD is selected, ABORt returns the multimeter to the

idle state. All subsequent single triggers sent using TRIGger:IMMediate are
ignored and the “Trigger ignored” error is generated.

• The CONFigure and MEASure command subsystems automatically set the trigger
source to TRIG:SOUR IMM.

• The READ? command cannot be used if the trigger source is TRIG:SOUR BUS or
TRIG:SOUR HOLD.

• Related Commands: ABORt, INITiate, TRIGger:IMMediate

• *RST Condition: TRIG:SOUR IMM

Example Setting the Sample Source

CONF:VOLT:DC (@100:104) !Function: DC voltage;
specify channel list.
TRIG:SOUR EXT !Trigger source is external BNC on
multimeter front panel.
TRIG:COUN 10 !Multimeter will accept 10 external triggers
(5 channels will be scanned with each
trigger).
READ? !Place multimeter in wait-for-trigger state;
make measurements when external trigger is
received; send readings to output buffer.
enter statement !Enter readings into computer.

:SOURce?
TRIGger:SOURce? returns “BUS”, “EXT”, “HOLD”, or “IMM” to show the present
trigger source. The quoted string is sent to the output buffer.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 184

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example Querying the Trigger Source
TRIG:SOUR EXT !Trigger source is external BNC on
multimeter front panel.
TRIG:SOUR? !Query multimeter to return trigger source
setting.
enter statement !Enter quoted string into computer.

185 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 IEEE 488.2 Common Command Reference

The following table lists the IEEE 488.2 Common (*) Commands that can be
executed by the HP E1326B and HP E1411B 51⁄2-Digit Multimeters.

Category Command Title Description

System Data *IDN? Identification Returns the identification string of multimeter.
Internal *RST Reset Resets the multimeter and associated multiplexers to:
Operations FUNC:VOLT:DC
VOLT:RANG 8 V
RES:RANG 16384 Ω
RANGE:AUTO ON
VOLT:RES 7.629 µV
RES:RES 15.6 mΩ
APER 16.7 ms | 20 ms
NPLC 1
RES:COMP OFF
CAL:ZERO:AUTO ON
TRIG:COUN 1
TRIG:DELAY:AUTO ON
TRIG:SOUR IMM
SAMP:COUN 1
SAMP:SOUR IMM
SAMP:TIM 200 µs
*TST? Self-Test Should return 0. If code 1, 2, 3, or 4 occurs, return
multimeter to Hewlett-Packard for repair.
Synchronization *OPC Operation Complete Operation complete command
*OPC? Operation Complete Query Operation complete query
*WAI Wait to Complete Wait-to-continue command
Status & Event *CLS Clear Status Clear status command
*ESE Event Status Enable Standard event status enable command
*ESE? Event Status Enable Query Standard event status enable query
*ESR? Event Status Register Query Standard event status register query
*SRE Service Request Enable Service request enable command
*SRE? Service Request Enable Query Service request enable query
*STB? Read Status Byte Query Read status byte query
Bus *TRG Bus Trigger When the multimeter is in the wait-for-trigger state and the
Operation trigger source is TRIGger:SOURce BUS, use *TRG to
trigger the multimeter.
Instrument *RCL Recall Instrument State Recall instrument state command
*SAV Store Instrument State Store (save) instrument state command
Macros *DMC Define Macro Define macro command
*EMC Enable Macro Enable macro command
*EMC? Enable Macro Query Enable macro query
*GMC? Get Macro Contents Query Get macro contents query
*LMC? Learn Macro Query Learn macro query
*PMC Purge Macros Purge all macros command
*RMC Remove Individual Macro Remove individual macro command

NOTE: These commands apply to many instruments and are not documented here in detail. See your
command module or controller manual, and the ANSI/IEEE Standard 488.2-1987 for more information.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 186

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Command Quick Reference

The following tables summarize SCPI commands for the HP E1326B and
HP E1411B 51⁄2-Digit Multimeters.

Command Description

ABORt Place multimeter in idle state.

CALibration :LFRequency 50 | 60 | MIN | MAX Change line reference frequency.

:LFRequency? [MIN | MAX] Query line reference frequency.
:ZERO:AUTO OFF | 0 | ON | 1 Enable/disable autozero mode.
:ZERO:AUTO? Query autozero mode.

CONFigure :FRESistance [<range>[,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>] Configure multimeter for 4-wire ohms.

:RESistance [<range>[,<resolution>]] , <channel_list> Configure multimeter for 2-wire ohms.
:TEMPerature <transducer>,<type>,<channel_list> Configure multimeter for temperature.
:VOLTage:AC [<range> [,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>] Configure multimeter for AC voltage.
:VOLTage[:DC] [<range> [,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>] Configure multimeter for DC voltage.

CONFigure? Query multimeter configuration.

DIAGnostic :FETS <mode> Selects control of FET multiplexers.

:FETS? Query mode of operation.

DISPlay :MONitor:CHANnel <channel> | AUTO Monitor multiplexer channel.

:MONitor:CHANnel? Query monitor channel.
:MONitor[:STATe] OFF | 0 | ON | 1 Enable/disable monitor mode.
:MONitor[:STATe]? Query monitor mode.

FETCh? Place stored readings in output buffer.

FORMat [:DATA] <type>[,<length>] Select output data format and length.

FORMat? Query format.

INITiate [:IMMediate] Place multimeter in wait-for trigger state.

MEASure :FRESistance? [<range>[,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>] Make 4-wire ohms measurements.

:RESistance? [<range>[,<resolution>]], <channel_list> Make 2-wire ohms measurements.
:TEMPerature? <transducer>,<type> [,<channel_list>] Make temperature measurements.
:VOLTage:AC? [<range> [,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>] Make AC voltage measurements.
:VOLTage[:DC]? [<range> [,<resolution>]] [,<channel_list>] Make DC voltage measurements.

MEMory :VME:ADDRess <address> Set address of memory on VME card.

:VME:ADDRess? [MIN | MAX] Query VME memory location (address).
:VME:SIZE <bytes> Amount of memory used on VME card.
:VME:SIZE? [MIN | MAX] Query amount of VME memory used.
:VME:STATe <mode> Direct readings to VME memory card.
:VME:STATe? Query VME memory mode.

OUTPut :TTLTrg0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 [:STATe] OFF | 0 | ON | 1 Send voltmeter complete to VXIbus trigger lines.
Query voltmeter complete destination.
:TTLTrg0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 [:STATe]?

READ? Place multimeter in wait-for trigger state;

place readings in output buffer.

187 Command Reference Chapter 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Command Description

SAMPle :COUNt 1-16777215 | MIN | MAX Set number of readings per trigger.
:COUNt? [MIN | MAX] Query number of readings per trigger.
:SOURce IMM | TIM Set pacing source.
:SOURce? Query pacing source.
:TIMer 76 µs-65.534 ms | MIN | MAX Define period between readings.
:TIMer? [MIN | MAX] Query period between readings.

[SENSe:] FUNCtion[:<function>] Select measurement function.

FUNCtion? Query measurement function.
RESistance:APERture <time> | MIN | MAX Set aperture (integration) time in seconds.
RESistance:APERture? [MIN | MAX] Query aperture (integration) time.
RESistance:NPLC <number> | MIN | MAX Set integration time in PLCs.
RESistance:NPLC? [MIN | MAX] Query integration time.
RESistance:OCOMpensated OFF | 0 | ON | 1 Enable/disable offset compensation.
RESistance:OCOMpensated? Query offset compensation mode.
RESistance:RANGe <range> | MIN | MAX Select range.
RESistance:RANGe? [MIN | MAX] Query range.
RESistance:RANGe:AUTO OFF | 0 | ON | 1 Enable/disable autorange function.
RESistance:RANGe:AUTO? Query autorange mode.
RESistance:RESolution <resolution> | MIN | MAX Specify resolution.
RESistance:RESolution? [MIN | MAX] Query resolution.
VOLTage:AC:RANGe <range> | MIN | MAX Select measurement range.
VOLTage:AC:RANGe? [MIN | MAX] Query range.
VOLTage:APERture <time> | MIN | MAX Set aperture (integration) time in seconds.
VOLTage:APERture? [MIN | MAX] Query aperture (integration) time.
VOLTage[:DC]:RANGe <range> | MIN | MAX Select range.
VOLTage[:DC]:RANGe? [MIN | MAX] Query range.
VOLTage:NPLC <number> | MIN | MAX Set integration time in PLCs.
VOLTage:NPLC? [MIN | MAX] Query integration time.
VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO OFF | 0 | ON | 1 Enable/disable autoranging.
VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO? Query autorange mode.
VOLTage:RESolution <resolution> Specify resolution.
VOLTage:RESolution? [MIN | MAX] Query resolution.

SYSTem :CDEScription? <card_number> Return description of multiplexer in scanning

multimeter.
:CTYPe? <card_number> Return card type of multiplexer in scanning
multimeter.
:ERRor? Return error number/message from error queue.

TRIGger :COUNt 1-16777215 | MIN | MAX Set number of triggers or scans.

:COUNt? [MIN | MAX] Query trigger count.
:DELay 0-16.777215 | MIN | MAX Set delay between trigger and start of
measurement.
:DELay? [MIN | MAX] Query trigger delay.
:DELay:AUTO OFF | 0 | ON | 1 Enable/disable automatic trigger delay.
:DELay:AUTO? Query automatic trigger delay mode.
[:IMMediate] Trigger immediately.
:SOURce BUS | EXT | HOLD | IMM | TTLTrg0-TTLTrg7 Specify trigger source.
:SOURce? Query trigger source.

Chapter 5 Command Reference 188

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix A
E1326B/E1411B Multimeter
Specifications

General Specifications
Reading Rate Conditions: Autozero off, fixed range, default trigger delay, offset comp off, Sample
Source “TIMER’ for rates > 15 readings/second.

Aperture
320 ms 267 ms 20 ms 16.7 ms 2.5 ms 100 µs 10 µs
Typical Reading Rates (rdgs/sec)
DC voltage 3 3.5 49 59 365 3125 13000
Four-wire resistance 3 3.5 49 59 365 3125 13000
AC voltage 1.3 1.4 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9
Resolution (bits/digits)
Binary bits ±22 ±22 ±20 ±20 ±18 ±15 ±14
Decimal digits 6.5 6.5 6 6 5.5 4.5 4
Noise Rejection (dB) for DC Voltage and Resistance Functions
Noise Rejection Conditions: Common Mode Rejection (CMR) measured with 1kohms in both HIGH and LOW leads with a 10%
imbalance, LOW connected to COMMON at source, measured with respect to earth ground. Normal Mode Rejection (NMR) is for
specified frequencies ±0.1%.

DC CMR 150 dB 150 dB 150 dB 150 dB 150 dB 150 dB 150 dB

AC CMR (DC-400Hz) 70 dB 70 dB 70 dB 70 dB 70 dB 70 dB 70 dB

50 Hz: Power line cycles (NPLCs) 16 -- 1 -- -- -- --

Normal Mode Rejection 84 dB 0 dB 60 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB
Effective common mode rejection (ECMR)* 154 dB 70 dB 130 dB 70 dB 70 dB 70 dB 70 dB

60 Hz: Power line cycles (NPLCs) -- 16 -- 1 -- -- --

Normal Mode Rejection 0 dB 84 dB 0 dB 60 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB
ECMR* 70 dB 154 dB 70 dB 130 dB 70 dB 70 dB 70 dB

400 Hz: Power line cycles (NPLCs) 128 -- 8 -- 1 -- --

Normal Mode Rejection 84 dB 0 dB 84 dB 0 dB 60 dB 0 dB 0 dB
ECMR* 154 dB 70 dB 154 dB 70 dB 130 dB 70 dB 70 dB

*64 and 300 volt ranges reduced by 36 dB

Input Characteristics: Maximum Nondestructive Input (volts)

Terminals DC AC RMS AC Peak

Hi to lo 300 300 450
Input amplifier bandwidth: 80 kHz
Hi to common 300 300 450
Autorange settling time: The multimeter autoranges and
Hi to chassis 300 300 450 settles faster than its minimum (fastest) sample rate.
Lo to common 15 10 15
Lo to chassis 300 300 450
Common to chassis 300 300 450

Appendix A 1326B/E1411B Multimeter Specifications 189

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 DC Voltage

Accuracy conditions for table below: Autozero on, one hour warmup. Temperature
within ±5°C of calibration temperature (module calibrated at 18°C to 28°C).

Resolution vs. Aperture (volts)

Input
Range Resistance 267/320 ms 16.7/20 ms 2.5 ms 100 µs 10 µs

125 mV >100 MΩ .03 µV .12 µV 0.5 µV 4.0 µV 7.6 µV

1V >100 MΩ .24 µV 1.0 µV 4.0 µV 30 µV 61 µV

8V >100 MΩ 2.0 µV 7.6 µV 30 µV 250 µV 488 µV

64 V 10 MΩ±5% 15 µV 61 µV 250 µV 2.0 mV 3.9 mV

300 V 10 MΩ±5% 122 µV 488 µV 2.0 mV 16 mV 31 mV

Accuracy conditions for table below: Autozero on, one hour warmup. Within 24 hours
and ±1°C of calibration temperature (module calibrated at 18°C to 28°C).

24-Hour Accuracy vs. Aperture ± (% of reading + volts)

Range 267/320 ms 16.7/20 ms 2.5 ms 100 µs 10 µs

125 mV .008% + 5.0 µV .008% + 5.0 µV .008% + 10 µV .05% + 30 µV .05% + 60 µV

1V .008% + 10 µV .008% + 15 µV .008% + 15 µV .05% + 100 µV .05% + 200 µV

8V .005% + 50 µV .005% + 50 µV .005% + 80 µV .05% + 750 µV .05% + 1.5 mV

64 V .01% + 1.0 mV .01% + 1.0 mV .01% + 1.0 mV .05% + 5.0 mV .05% + 20 mV

300 V .01% + 5.0 mV .01% + 5.0 mV .01% + 5.0 mV .05% + 30 mV .05% + 80 mV

Accuracy conditions for table below: Autozero on,, one hour warmup. Within 90 days
and ±5°C of calibration temperature (module calibrated at 18°C to 28°C).

90-Day Accuracy vs. Aperture ± (% of reading + volts)

Range 267/320 ms 16.7/20 ms 2.5 ms 100 µs 10 µs

125 mV .023% + 5.0 µV .023% + 5.0 µV .023% + 10 µV .065% + 30 µV .115% + 60 µV

1V .013% + 10 µV .013% + 15 µV .013% + 15 µV .055% + 100 µV .1% + 200 µV

8V .010% + 50 µV, .01% + 50 µV .01% + 80 µV .055% + 750 µV .1% + 1.5 mV

64 V .015% + 1.0 mV .015% + 1.0 mV .015% + 1.0 mV .055% + 5.0 mV .1% + 20 mV

300 V .015% + 5.0 mV .015% + 5.0 mV .015% + 5.0 mV .055% + 30 mV .1% + 80 mV

190 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Specifications Appendix A

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Accuracy conditions for table below: Autozero on, one hour warmup. Within 1 year and ±5°C of
calibration termperature (module calibrated at 18°C to 28°C).
1-Year Accuracy vs. Aperture ± (% of reading + volts)
Range 267/320 ms 16.7/20 ms 2.5 ms 100 µs 10 µs
125 mV .033% + 5 µV .033% + 5 µV .033% + 10 µV .075% + 30 µV .125% + 60 µV
1V .023% + 10 µV .023% + 15 µV .023% + 15 µV .065% + 100 µV .110% + 200 µV
8V .020% + 50 µV .020% + 50 µV .020% + 80 µV .065% + 750 µV .110% + 1.5 mV
64 V .025% + 1 mV .025% + 1 mV .025% + 1 mV .065% + 5 mV .110% + 20 mV
300 V .025% + 5 mV .025% + 5 mV .025% + 5 mV .065% + 30 mV .110% + 80 mV

Temperature Coefficient Autozero Off Offset Error

± (% of reading)/°C (volts)
Temperature 10µs Additional
Range Coeficient Aperture Range Offset Error
125 V 0.003 0.013 125 V 20 µV

1V 0.001 0.01 1V 20 µV

8V 0.001 0.01 8V 20 µV

64 V 0.001 0.01 64 V 1 mV

300 V 0.001 0.01 300 V 1 mV

Conditions: 0°C to (cal temp -5°C), (cal temp Conditions: Stable

+5°C) to 55°C environment, 24 hours, ± 1°C

Appendix A 1326B/E1411B Multimeter Specifications 191

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Four-Wire Resistance

Input Characteristics

Measurement Characteristics vs. Range

Maximum Maximum
Allowable Maximum Allowable Default
Current Allowable Offset Volts Range
Maximum Source Common For Offset Default Function
Source Open Circuit Lead Lead Compensated Measurement Change
Range Current Voltage Resistance Resistance Ohms Settling Time Settling
Time
256 Ω 488 µA 11.5 V 20 kΩ 150 Ω 12 mV 0 0
2 kΩ 488 µA 11.5 V 15 kΩ 150 Ω 100 mV 0 0
16 kΩ 61 µA 11.5 V 100 kΩ 2 kΩ 100 mV 0 0
131 kΩ 61 µA 11.5 V 20 kΩ 10 kΩ 0.8 V 0 2 ms
1 MΩ 7.6 µA 11.5 V 100 kΩ 100 kΩ 0.8 V 0 11 ms

Conditions: Settling times may need to be increased (programmably) if load capacitance is greater than 200 pF.

Resolution vs. Aperture (ohms)

Range 267/320 ms 16.7/20 ms 2.5 ms 100 µs 10 µs
256 Ω 0.06 mΩ 0.25 mΩ 1 mΩ 8 mΩ 15 mΩ
2 kΩ 0.5 mΩ 2 mΩ 8 mΩ 60 mΩ 125 mΩ
16 kΩ 4 mΩ 15 mΩ 60 mΩ 500 mΩ 1Ω
131 kΩ 30 mΩ 125 mΩ 500 mΩ 4Ω 8Ω
1 MΩ 0.25 mΩ 1Ω 4Ω 30 Ω 64 Ω

Accuracy conditions for table below: Autozero on, one-hour warmup. Within 24 hours and ±1°C of
calibration temperature (module calibrated at 18°C to 28°C).

24-Hour Accuracy vs. Aperture ± (% of reading + ohms)

Range 267/320 ms 16.7/20 ms 2.5 ms 100 µs 10 µs
256 Ω .015% + 10 mΩ .015% + 10 mΩ .015% + 10 mΩ .05% + 50 mΩ .05% + 50 mΩ
2 kΩ .015% + 20 mΩ .015% + 20 mΩ .015% + 20 mΩ .05% + 150 mΩ .05% + 200 mΩ
16 kΩ .015% + 200 mΩ .015% + 200 mΩ .015% + 200 mΩ .05% + 1 Ω .05% + 2 Ω
131 kΩ .015% + 1Ω .015% + 1Ω .015% + 1Ω .05% + 8 Ω .05% + 16 Ω
1 MΩ .015% + 10 Ω .015% + 10 Ω .015% + 10 Ω .05% + 60 Ω .05% + 120 Ω

192 1326B/E1411B Multimeter Specifications Appendix A

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Accuracy condition for table below: Autozero on, one-hour warmup. Within 90 days and ±5°C of
calibration temperature (module calibrated at 18°C to 28°C).
90-Day Accuracy vs. Aperture ± (% of reading + ohms)
Range 267/320 ms 16.7/20 ms 2.5 ms 100 µs 10 µs
256 Ω .035% + 10 mΩ .035% + 10 mΩ .035% + 10 mΩ .07% + 50 mΩ .12% + 50 mΩ
2 kΩ .025% + 20 mΩ .025% + 20 mΩ .025% + 20 mΩ .06% + 150 mΩ .10% + 200 mΩ
16 kΩ .025% + 200 mΩ .025% + 200 mΩ .025% + 200 mΩ .06% + 1 Ω .1% + 2 Ω
131 kΩ .025% + 1Ω .025% + 1Ω .025% + 1Ω .06% + 8 Ω .1% + 16 Ω
1 MΩ .025% + 10 Ω .025% + 10 Ω .025% + 10 Ω .06% + 60 Ω .1% + 120 Ω

Accuracy conditions for table below: Autozero on, one-hour warmup. Within 1 year and ±5°C of
calibration temperature (module calibrated at 18°C to 28°C).
1-Year Accuracy vs. Aperture ± (% of reading + ohms)
Range 267/320 ms 16.7/20 ms 2.5 ms 100 µs 10 µs
256 Ω .05% + 10 mΩ .05% + 10 mΩ .05% + 10 mΩ .085% + 50 mΩ .135% + 50 mΩ
2 kΩ .04% + 20 mΩ .04% + 20 mΩ .04% + 20 mΩ .075% + 150 mΩ .115% + 200 mΩ
16 kΩ .04% + 200 mΩ .04% + 200 mΩ .04% + 200 mΩ .075% + 1 Ω .115% + 2 Ω
131 kΩ .04% + 1Ω .04% + 1Ω .04% + 1Ω .075% + 8 Ω .115% + 16 Ω
1 MΩ .04% + 10 Ω .04% + 10 Ω .04% + 10 Ω .075% + 60 Ω .115% + 120 Ω

Temperature Coefficient Autozero Off Offset Error

± (% of reading)/°C (ohms)
Temperature 10µs Additional
Range Coeficient Aperture Range Offset Error
256 Ω 0.004 0.014 256 Ω 40 mΩ

2 kΩ 0.002 0.01 2 kΩ 40 mΩ

16 kΩ 0.002 0.01 16 kΩ 300 mΩ

131 kΩ 0.002 0.01 131 kΩ 300 mΩ

1 MΩ 0.002 0.01 1 MΩ 3Ω

Conditions: 0°C to (cal temp -5°C), (cal temp Conditions: Stable

+5°C) to 55°C environment, 24 hours, ± 1°C

Appendix A 1326B/E1411B Multimeter Specifications 193

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 True RMS AC Voltage (AC coupled)
Crest Factor: 7 at 10% full scale; 1.5 at full scale

DC to 60 Hz common mode rejection (CMR)

64 V and 300 V range 50 dB
All other ranges 86 dB
DC to 400 Hz common mode rejection (CMR)
64 V and 300 V range 34 dB
All other ranges 70 dB
Conditions: CMR and Effective Common Mode Rejection (ECMR) measured with 1 kΩ in each of HIGH and LOW leads, 10%
imbalance. LOW connected to COMMON at source. Measured with respect to earth ground.

Resolution vs. Aperture (volts)

Range Input Impedance 267/320 ms 16.7/20 ms 2.5 ms 100 µs 10 µs
87.5 mV >100 mΩ, <100pF 0.03 µV 0.12 µV 0.5 µV 4 µV 7.6 µV
700 mV >100 mΩ, <100pF 0.24 µV 1 µV 4 µV 30 µV 61 µV
5.6 V >100 mΩ, <100pF 2 µV 7.6 µV 30 µV 250 µV 488 µV
44.8 V 10 MΩ ±5%, <100pF 15 µV 61 µV 250µV 2 mV 3.9 mV
300 V 10 MΩ ±5%, <100pF 122 µV 488 µV 2 mV 16 mV 31 mV

Accuracy conditions for table below: Autozero on, one-hour warmup. Within 24 hours and ±1°C of
calibration temperature (module calibrated at 18°C to 28°C). Sine wave inputs >10% of full scale; DC
component <10% of AC component.
24-Hour Accuracy vs. Aperture ± (% of reading + volts)
Range Frequency 267/320 ms All other
apertures
87.5 mV 20 - 50 Hz 2% + 200 µV N/A
50 Hz - 1 kHz .5% + 200 µV .5% + 200 µV
1 - 5 kHz .5% + 200 µV .5% + 200 µV
5 - 10 kHz 3% + 200 µV 3% + 200 µV
700 mV 20 - 50 Hz 2% + 1.5 mV N/A
50 Hz - 1 kHz .5% + 1.5 mV .5% + 1.5 mV
1 - 5 kHz .5% + 1.5 mV .5% + 1.5 mV
5 - 10 kHz 3% + 1.5 mV 3% + 1.5 mV
5.6 V 20 - 50 Hz 2% + 15 mV N/A
50 Hz - 1 kHz .5% + 15 mV .5% + 15 mV
1 - 5 kHz .5% + 15 mV .5% + 15 mV
5 - 10 kHz 3% + 15 mV 3% + 15 mV
44.8 V 20 - 50 Hz 2% + 100 mV N/A
50 Hz - 1 kHz .5% + 100 mV .5% + 100 mV
1 - 5 kHz 1% + 100 mV 1% + 100 mV
5 - 10 kHz 10% + 100 mV 10% + 100 mV
300 V 20 - 50 Hz 2% + 500 mV N/A
50 Hz - 1 kHz .5% + 500 mV .5% + 500 mV
1 - 5 kHz 1% + 500 mV 1% + 500 mV
5 - 10 kHz 10% + 500 mV 10% + 500 mV

194 1326B/E1411B Multimeter Specifications Appendix A

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Accuracy conditions for table below: Autozero on, one-hour warmup. Within 90 days and ±5°C of
calibration temperature (module calibrated at 18°C to 28°C). Sine wave inputs >10% of full scale; DC
component <10% of AC component.
90-Day Accuracy vs. Aperture ± (% of reading + volts)
Range Frequency 267/320 ms All other
apertures
87.5 mV 20 - 50 Hz 2.175% + 200 µV N/A
50 Hz - 1 kHz .675% + 200 µV .675% + 200 µV
1 - 5 kHz .675% + 200 µV .675% + 200 µV
5 - 10 kHz 3.175% + 200 µV 3.175% + 200 µV
700 mV 20 - 50 Hz 2.125% + 1.5 mV N/A
50 Hz - 1 kHz .625% + 1.5 mV .625% + 1.5 mV
1 - 5 kHz .625% + 1.5 mV .625% + 1.5 mV
5 - 10 kHz 3.125% + 1.5 mV 3.125% + 1.5 mV
5.6 V 20 - 50 Hz 2.125% + 15 mV N/A
50 Hz - 1 kHz .625% + 15 mV .625% + 15 mV
1 - 5 kHz .625% + 15 mV .625% + 15 mV
5 - 10 kHz 3.125% + 15 mV 3.125% + 15 mV
44.8 V 20 - 50 Hz 2.125% + 100 mV N/A
50 Hz - 1 kHz .625% + 100 mV .625% + 100 mV
1 - 5 kHz 1.125% + 100 mV 1.125% + 100 mV
5 - 10 kHz 10.125% + 100 mV 10.125% + 100 mV
300 V 20 - 50 Hz 2.125% + 500 mV N/A
50 Hz - 1 kHz .625% + 500 mV .625% + 500 mV
1 - 5 kHz 1.125% + 500 mV 1.125% + 500 mV
5 - 10 kHz 10.125% + 500 mV 10.125% + 500 mV

Accuracy conditions for table below: Autozero on, one-hour warmup. Within one year and ±5°C of
calibration temperature (module calibrated at 18°C to 28°C). Sine wave inputs >10% of full scale; DC
component <10% of AC component.
1-Year Accuracy vs. Aperture ± (% of reading + volts) Temp. Coefficient ± (% of reading)/°C
Range Frequency 267/320 ms All other apertures Range Frequency Temp.
Coefficient
87.5 20 - 50 Hz 2.195% + 200 µV N/A 87.5 20 - 50 Hz 0.035
mV 50 Hz - 1 kHz .695% + 200 µV .695% + 200 µV mV 50 Hz - 1 kHz 0.035
1 - 5 kHz .695% + 200 µV .695% + 200 µV 1 - 5 kHz 0.035
5 - 10 kHz 3.195% + 200 µV 3.195% + 200 µV 5 - 10 kHz 0.035
700 mV 20 - 50 Hz 2.145% + 1.5 mV N/A 700 mV 20 - 50 Hz 0.025
50 Hz - 1 kHz .645% + 1.5 mV .645% + 1.5 mV 50 Hz - 1 kHz 0.025
1 - 5 kHz .645% + 1.5 mV .645% + 1.5 mV 1 - 5 kHz 0.025
5 - 10 kHz 3.145% + 1.5 mV 3.145% + 1.5 mV 5 - 10 kHz 0.025
5.6 V 20 - 50 Hz 2.145% + 15 mV N/A 5.6 V 20 - 50 Hz 0.025
50 Hz - 1 kHz .645% + 15 mV .645% + 15 mV 50 Hz - 1 kHz 0.025
1 - 5 kHz .645% + 15 mV .645% + 15 mV 1 - 5 kHz 0.025
5 - 10 kHz 3.145% + 15 mV 3.145% + 15 mV 5 - 10 kHz 0.025
44.8 V 20 - 50 Hz 2.145% + 100 mV N/A 44.8 V 20 - 50 Hz 0.025
50 Hz - 1 kHz .645% + 100 mV .645% + 100 mV 50 Hz - 1 kHz 0.025
1 - 5 kHz 1.145% + 100 mV 1.145% + 100 mV 1 - 5 kHz 0.025
5 - 10 kHz 10.140% + 100 mV 10.140% + 100 mV 5 - 10 kHz 0.025
300 V 20 - 50 Hz 2.145% + 500 mV N/A 300 V 20 - 50 Hz 0.025
50 Hz - 1 kHz .645% + 500 mV .645% + 500 mV 50 Hz - 1 kHz 0.025
1 - 5 kHz 1.145% + 500 mV 1.145% + 500 mV 1 - 5 kHz 0.025
5 - 10 kHz 10.140% + 500 mV 10.140% + 500 mV 5 - 10 kHz 0.025

Appendix A 1326B/E1411B Multimeter Specifications 195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Timer/Pacer Module Size/Device Type:
Timer Range: 76 µsec to 65.5 msec B, register-based (E1326B)
Resolution: 2 µs C, register-based (E1411B)
Accuracy: 0.01%
Connectors Used: P1

Programmable Delay No. Slots: 1 (standard terminal panel takes 2 slots)

Delay Range: 40 µsec to 16 sec
Resolution: 2 µsec
Accuracy: 0.01% VXIbus Interface Capability:
Slave, interrupter, A16, D16

External Trigger Interrupt Level: 1-7, selectable

Trigger Condition: negative edge
Minimum Pulse Width: 100 nsec Power Requirements:
Maximum Trigger Rate: 5 kHz Voltage +5 +12
(fixed range, 10 µsec aperture) Peak module
current, IPM (A): 0.20 0.55
Dyanmic module
current, IDM (A): 0.01 0.01

Typical Reading Storage Watts/Slot: 8.5 (E1411B) 4.2 (E1326B)

HP 75000 Number of
Mainframe Readings Cooling/Slot:
0.14 mm H2O @ 0.71 liter/sec (E1411B)
Series B with 0.07 mm H2O@ 0.35 liter/sec (E1326B)
standard memory 50,000
Humidity: 65% 0° to 40°C

Series B with Operating Temperature: 0° to 55°C

512 kB memory
(HP E1300/01A Opt. 010) 100,000 Storage Temperature: -40° to 75°C

Series B with
1 MB memory
(HP E1300/01A Opt. 011) 200,000

Series C with
Command Module
(HP E1406A) 100,000

Series C plus E1406A

with Opt. 010 200,000

196 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Specifications Appendix A

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix B
HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Error
Messages

The error messages associated with the HP E1326B/HP E1411B multimeter

are shown in this appendix.

Code Message Cause

- 101 Invalid character Unrecognized character in specified parameter.

- 102 Syntax error Command is missing a space or comma between parameters.

- 103 Invalid separator Command parameter is separated by a space rather than a comma.

- 104 Data type error The wrong data type (i.e., number, character, string, expression) was
used when specifying a parameter.

- 108 Parameter not allowed Parameter specified in a command which has only a command header.

- 109 Missing parameter No parameter specified in the command in which a parameter is

required.

- 113 Undefined header Command header was incorrectly specified.

- 124 Too many digits 257 digits were specified for a parameter.

- 128 Numeric data not allowed A number was specified for a parameter when a letter is required.

- 131 Invalid suffix Parameter suffix incorrectly specified (e.g., 5 K rather than 5 KOHM).

- 138 Suffix not allowed Parameter suffix is specified when one is not allowed.

- 141 Invalid character data The parameter type specified is not allowed
(e.g., MEAS:TEMP? TC,O - O is not a choice).

- 178 Expression data not allowed A parameter other than the channel list is enclosed in parentheses.

- 211 Trigger ignored Trigger occurred while the multimeter is in the idle state, or a trigger
occurred from a source other than the specified source.

- 213 INIT ignored An INIT command is received when the multimeter is already in the
wait-for-trigger state following TRIG:SOUR HOLD.

- 214 Trigger deadlock The multimeter is triggered from another source (e.g., READ?) after
the trigger source has been set to TRIG:SOUR BUS.

- 221 Settings conflict Multimeter parameters are set such that a measurement cannot be
made (e.g., specifying a fixed resolution while autoranging).

- 222 Data out of range The parameter value specified is too large or too small.

- 224 Illegal parameter value The numeric value specified is not allowed (e.g., MEAS:TEMP? RTD).

Appendix B HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Error Messages 197

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Code Message Cause

- 230 Data corrupt or stale Data in mainframe memory is fetched after a command
(e.g., MEASure, READ?) has returned data to the
output buffer.

- 231 Data questionable Resolution is too great for specified range.

Measurement is still taken.

- 240 Hardware error Hardware error detected during power-on cycle. Return
multimeter to Hewlett-Packard for repair.

- 270 Macro error Deleting a macro that does not exist.

- 273 Illegal macro label Macro name begins with a character other than a letter.

- 276 Macro recursion error The macro called is nested too deep within other macro
calls.

- 277 Macro redefinition not allowed A macro with that label already exists.

- 300 Device specific error Severe overload, protection relay is opening (caused
by fixed range and severe overload or COM not
connected to Lo). To fix, use autorange, higher range,
or connect COM to Lo.

- 310 System error Out of macro memory.

- 350 Too many errors The error queue is full as more than 30 errors have
occurred.

- 410 Query interrupted Data is not read from the output buffer before another
command is executed.

- 420 Query unterminated Command which generates data not able to finish
executing due to a multimeter configuration error.

- 430 Query deadlocked Command execution cannot continue since the

mainframe’s command input

+ 1000 Out of memory Not enough memory to store the number of

measurements requested.

+ 2000 Invalid card number There is no multiplexer which corresponds to the card
number specified in the channel list.

+ 2001 Invalid channel number The channel or range of channels specified for the
(@channel list) parameter does not exist.

+ 2008 Scan list not initialized Occurs when INIT is executed after error 2000 or 2001
occurred.

+ 2009 Too many channels in channel list The number of channels in the specified channel list is
larger than the number of channels on the
multiplexer(s).

+ 2012 Invalid channel range Specifying a channel range such as (@115:100).

+ 2600 Function not supported on this card Function specified cannot be measured (specifying a
2-wire resistance measurement without a multiplexer,
for example).

+ 2601 Channel list required Measurement function specified requires a channel list
(specifying a thermocouple measurement without a
multiplexer, for example).

+ 2602 Timer too fast Aperture time is longer than sample rate.

198 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Error Messages Appendix B

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix C
HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter
Register-Based Programming

About This Appendix

The HP E1326B and HP E1411B 51⁄2-Digit Multimeters are register-based
modules which do not support the VXIbus word serial protocol. When a
SCPI command is sent to the multimeter, the HP E1406A Command
Module (Series C) or HP E1300/01 Mainframe (Series B) parses the
command and programs the multimeter at the register level.

Register-based programming is a series of reads and writes directly to the

multimeter registers. This increases throughput speed since it eliminates
command parsing and allows the use of an embedded controller. Also, if
slot 0 and resource manager functionality are provided by the embedded
controller, use of the command module is not required.

This appendix contains the information you need for register-based

programming. The contents include:

• Register Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 199

• Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 203
• Program Timing and Execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 210
• Register Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 217
• Programming Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 220
• Useful Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 262

Register Addressing
Register addresses for register-based devices are located in the upper 25%
of VXI A16 address space. Every VXI device (up to 256) is allocated a 64
byte block of addresses. With seven registers, the HP E1326B/E1411B
Multimeters use seven of the 64 addresses allocated.

Figure C-1 shows the register address location within A16. Figure C-2
shows the location of A16 address space in the HP E1406A Command
Module and HP E1300A/01A Mainframe.

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 199

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Base Address When you are reading or writing to a multimeter register, a hexadecimal or
decimal register address is specified. This address consists of a base
address plus a register offset.

The base address used in register programming depends on whether the A16
address space is outside or inside the HP E1406A Command Module or HP
E1300A/01A Mainframe.

A16 Address Space When the command module or mainframe is not part of your VXIbus
Outside the Command system (Figure C-1), the multimeter’s base address is computed as:
Module or Mainframe C00016 + (LADDR * 64)16
or
49,152 + (LADDR * 64)

where C00016 (49,152) is the starting location of the register addresses,

LADDR is the multimeter’s logical address, and 64 is the number of
address bytes per VXI device. For example, the multimeter’s factory set
logical address is 24. If this address is not changed, the multimeter will
have a base address of:
C00016 + (24 * 64)16 C00016 + 60016 = C60016
or (decimal)
49,152 + (24 * 64) = 49,152 + 1536 = 50,688

Figure C-1. Multimeter Registers within A16 Address Space

200 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Finding the Base When using an embedded controller such as the HP RADI-EPC7 with the
Address in an Standard Instrument Command Library (SICL) for DOS, the A16 base
Embedded Controller address is obtained using the imap function:
imap(INST id, int mapspace, unsigned int pagestart, unsigned int
pagecnt, char *suggestedaddress);

and using I_MAP_VXIDEV as the constant for mapspace. The C language

example programs at the end of this appendix use imap to get the
E1411B/E1326B base address.

A16 Address Space When the A16 address space is inside the command module or mainframe
Inside the Command (Figure C-2), the multimeter’s base address is computed as:
Module or Mainframe 1FC00016 + (LADDR * 64)16
or
2,080,768 + (LADDR * 64)

where 1FC00016 (2,080,768) is the starting location of the VXI A16

addresses, LADDR is the multimeter’s logical address, and 64 is the
number of address bytes per register-based device. Again, the multimeter’s
factory set logical address is 24. If this address is not changed, the
multimeter will have a base address of:
1FC00016 + (24 * 64)16 = 1FC00016 + 60016 = 1FC60016
or
2,080,768 + (24 * 64) = 2,080,768 + 1536 = 2,082,304

Figure C-2. Mainframe/Command Module A16 Address Space

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 201

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Register Offset The register offset is the register’s location in the block of 64 address bytes.
For example, the multimeter’s Command Register has an offset of 0816.
When you write a command to this register, the offset is added to the base
address to form the register address:
C60016 + 0816 = C60816
1FC60016 + 0816 = 1FC60816
or
50,688 + 8 = 50,696
2,082,304 + 8 = 2,082,312

Accessing the Table C-1 summarizes several of the programming methods used to access
Registers the E1326B/E1411B multimeter registers.

Table C-1. Accessing the Multimeter Registers

Computer Programming Method Base Address

E1300/01 IBASIC

(Absolute Addressing) READIO (-9826, Base_addr + offset) Base_addr = 1FC00016 + (LADDR * 64)16
WRITEIO -9826, Base_addr + offset; data or
= 2,080,768 + (LADDR * 64)
(positive select code = byte read or write offset = register offset (Figure C-2)
negative select code = word read or write)
(Select Code 8)
READIO (8, Base_addr + reg number) Base_addr = LADDR * 256
WRITEIO 8, Base_addr + reg number; data reg number = register offset (Figure C-2)/2

External Computer VXI:READ? logical_address, offset module logical address setting (LADDR)
VXI:WRITE logical_address, offset, data offset = register offset (Figure C-2)
(over HP-IB to
E1300A/E1301A Base_addr = 1FC00016 + (LADDR * 64)16
Mainframe or E1406A or
Command Module) DIAG:PEEK? Base_addr + offset, width = 2,080,768 + (LADDR * 64)
DIAG:POKE Base_addr + offset, width, data offset = register offset (Figure C-2)

V/382 Embedded READIO (-16, Base_addr + offset) Base_addr = C00016 + (LADDR * 64)16
Computer WRITEIO -16, Base_addr + offset; data or
(C-Size system) = 49,152 + (LADDR * 64)

(positive select code = byte read or write offset = register offset (Figure C-1)
negative select code = word read or write)

HP RADI-EPC7 iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr + offset)) INST device_name;

Embedded Computer device_name = iopen (“vxi, logical address”);
with SICL iwpoke((unsigned short *) base_addr = imap
(base_addr + offset),data) (device_name, I_MAP_VXIDEV,0,1,NULL);

LADDR: E1326B/E1411B logical address = 24

(LADDR * 64)16: Multiply quantity then convert to a hexadecimal number (e.g. (24 * 64)16 = 60016)
When using DIAG:PEEK? and DIAG:POKE, the width (number of bits) is either 8 or 16.

202 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Register Descriptions
There are three WRITE and five READ registers on the multimeter. This
section contains a description and a bit map of each register.

The WRITE The following WRITE registers are located on the multimeter.
Registers – Control Register (base + 0416)
– Command Register (base + 0816)
– Parameter Register (base + 0A16)

The Control The Control Register is used to reset the multimeter, to disable the
Register multimeter from driving the SYSFAIL line, and to initiate multimeter
measurements.

Address 15 - 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
base + 0416 Not Used X X X X X MM SYS Reset
Samp FAIL

Resetting the Multimeter. Writing a one (1) to bit 0 resets the multimeter.
Writing a zero (0) turns the reset function off. While bit 0 is 1, the
multimeter continually resets.

De-asserting SYSFAIL. Writing a one (1) to bit 1 prevents the multimeter

from driving the SYSFAIL line. Writing a zero (0) allows the multimeter to
drive SYSFAIL.

The multimeter drives the SYSFAIL line during a self-test, and the line
remains asserted if the self-test fails. If the multimeter fails its power on
self-test, the Resource Manager de-asserts SYSFAIL and resets the
multimeter to take the device off-line. If a self-test fails during
register-based programming, you must write a "1" to bit 1 to de-assert
SYSFAIL and then reset the multimeter to take it off-line.

The “Programming Examples” section beginning on page 220 shows how to

reset the multimeter.

Control Register Sampling. When the multimeter is in the wait-for-trigger

state and the sample source is set to "Control Register", the multimeter will
make a measurement when a one (1) is written to Control register bit 2.

Note This sampling method is available on the HP E1326B/E1411B

multimeters only. Refer to the “Control Register Sampling” section on
page 219 for information on setting up the multimeter to take samples using
this method.

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 203

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Command and Commands and their parameters are opcodes written to the Command and
Parameter Registers Parameter Registers.

Address 15 - 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
base + 0816 Not Used Command Opcode

Address 15 - 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
base + 0A16 Not Used Parameter Opcode

Command Structure. Multimeter commands consist of a command

opcode and a parameter opcode (which may be optional). The opcodes
must be in 2’s complement binary format when written to the registers.

An example of how to write to the Command and Parameter Registers is

shown in the following statements. The statements set the multimeter
function (command opcode 4) to DC voltage (parameter opcode 0):
!Write command
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x08),4)
!Write parameter
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x0A),0)

When the command and parameter are received, the multimeter processor
checks for the proper syntax and range. If an error is found, the NOERR bit in
the Status Register is cleared (0), and operation continues (if it is possible).

Note When you are writing (sending) commands and parameters, the multimeter
needs time to process the current command before the next command is sent.

204 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The READ Registers The following READ registers are located on the multimeter.
– ID Register (base + 0016)
– Device Type Register (base + 0216)
– Status Register (base + 0416)
– Query Response Register (base + 0816)
– Data Buffer (base + 0C16)

The ID Register The multimeter’s ID Register indicates the classification, addressing mode,
and the manufacturer of the device.

Address 15 14 13 12 11 - 0
base + 0016 Device Address Manufacturer ID
Class Mode

Device Classification. Bits 15 and 14 classify the device:

0 0 memory device
0 1 extended device
1 0 message-based device
1 1 register-based device

The HP E1326B/E1411B multimeter is a register-based device.

Addressing Mode. Bits 13 and 12 indicate the addressing mode:

0 0 A16/A24 address mode
0 1 A16/A32 address mode
1 0 RESERVED
1 1 A16 address mode

The HP E1326B/E1411B multimeter uses the A16 address mode.

Manufacturer ID. Bits 11 through 0 identify the manufacturer of the

device. Hewlett-Packard’s ID number is 4095, which corresponds to
bits 11 - 0 being set to "1".

Given the device classification, addressing space, and manufacturer of the

HP E1326AB/E1411B multimeters, reading the ID Register returns FFFF16.

The “Programming Examples” section on beginning on page 220 shows

how to read the ID Register.

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 205

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Device Type The Device Type Register contains a model code which identifies the
Register device.

Address 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
base + 0216 Model Code

Model Code. The following model codes identify the HP E1326B and
E1411B multimeters:

FF3816 - HP E1411B 51⁄2 Digit Multimeter

FF4016 - HP E1326B 51⁄2 Digit Multimeter

The “Programming Examples” section on beginning on page 220 shows

how to read the Device Type Register.

The Status Register Register-based programs are regulated by the Status Register. This register
is continually monitored to determine when to send a command, when a
measurement is complete, when data is available, etc.

Address 15 - 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
base + 0416 FF16 DONE NOERR MM Data Extended Passed Q.Resp Cmd/
Comp Ready Ready Parm
Ready

DONE. A zero (0) in bit 7 indicates the multimeter is processing a

command and its parameters. Bit 7 is set to one (1) by the multimeter when
it is finished. The validity of this bit is determined by bit 0, and in turn, bit
7 determines the validity of bits 6, 5, 4, and 1. See “Status Bit Precedence”
on page 207 for more information.

NOERR. A zero (0) in bit 6 indicates a programming error has occurred.

Bit 6 is set to one (1) when the next command opcode is received. The error
code, however, is stored until it is read from the Query Response Register or
until it is overwritten by another error.

MULTIMETER COMPLETE. A one (1) in bit 5 indicates the

analog-to-digital conversion is in progress. Bit 5 stays set to "1" for
approximately 400 µs. If autozero is on, the bit is set for the specified
aperture time (except for the 267/320 ms aperture time in which the bit is
set for 400 µs). It is often necessary to turn autozero on to detect when the
bit is set.

Data Ready. A one (1) in bit 4 indicates that a reading is available in the
multimeter’s Data Buffer. The bit is cleared (0) when the data is read from
the buffer. The bit is also cleared when the data is no longer valid (that is,
following a command which changes the measurement function).

Extended. A zero (0) in bit 3 and a one (1) in bit 2 indicates the multimeter
is performing an extended self-test.

206 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Passed. A zero (0) in bit 2 indicates the multimeter is executing a reset, or
is executing or failed its self-test. A one (1) indicates the reset is finished or
the self-test passed.

Q.Resp Ready. A one (1) in bit 1 indicates data returned by a query is in

the Query Response Register. The bit is cleared (0) when the response is
read from the register.

Cmd/Parm Ready. A one (1) in bit 0 indicates a command or parameter

can be written to the Command or Parameter Registers. The bit is cleared
(0) when the command or parameter is received. Bit 0 also determines the
validity of bit 7. See “Status Bit Precedence” for more information.

Status Bit Precedence In addition to the conditions the bits monitor, certain status bits indicate the
validity of other bits in the Status Register. This solves race situations
between selected bits.

When bit 0 is zero (0), bit 7 is invalid. This allows the multimeter to clear
bit 7 (set it to zero (0)) to indicate that a command or parameter is being
processed.

When Bit 7 is zero (0), bits 6, 5, 4, and 1 are invalid. This allows the
multimeter time to set those bits to the correct states based on the conditions
they represent.

The Query When the multimeter is queried as to its configuration (that is, function,
Response Register range, aperture time) or when an error code is requested, the reply is sent to
the Query Response Register.

Address 15 - 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
base + 0816 FF16 Query Response

Query Response. The response returned to the register is an error code or a

parameter opcode. For example, if the measurement function is AC
voltage, 0116 is returned when the function is queried.

When multimeter parameters such as the trigger count, trigger delay, sample
count, and sample rate are queried, a 16-bit or 24-bit unsigned number is
returned. Thus, the Query Response Register must be read two or three
consecutive times in order to retrieve the upper byte and lower byte or to
retrieve the high byte, middle byte, and low byte.

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 207

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The Data Buffer Measurements are returned to the Data Buffer. The buffer is a
first-in-first-out (FIFO) buffer capable of storing 256 four-byte readings, or
up to 512 two-byte readings.

Address 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
base + 0C16 16-bit word

Four-Byte Reading For aperture times of:

Mode
100 µs (opcode 0516)
2.5 ms (opcode 0416)
16.7 ms (opcode 0116)
20 ms (opcode 0316)
267 ms (opcode 0016)
320 ms (opcode 0216)

Each reading is a four-byte number arranged as follows:

Reading = effoprrr dddddddd dddddddd dddddddd
e = error bit. Set if an overrange, input overload, or sample rate
error occurs.
ff = function code (DCV, ACV, OHMS)
o = input overload bit. Set in conjunction with the error (e) bit. The
bit is cleared when a new range is set. (This also clears the NOERR
bit in the Status Register.)
p = sample rate overrun bit. Set in conjunction with the error (e) bit
when the sample rate is too fast for the specified aperture time.
(This also clears the NOERR bit in the Status Register.)
rrr = range code (power of 8 multiplier for reading).
dd = multimeter measurement in 2’s complement binary.

Readings are returned as two 16-bit words, with the upper word returned
first. Thus, for each reading, the data buffer must be read twice. The
“Programming Examples” section contains examples on retrieving
four-byte readings.

Two-Byte Reading For the aperture time of:

Mode
10 µs (opcode 0616)

Each reading is a two-byte number arranged as follows:

Reading = dddddddd ddddddde
e = error bit. Set if an overrange, input overload, or sample rate
error occurs.
dd ... = multimeter measurement in 2’s complement binary.

Readings are returned as one 16-bit word. Thus, for each reading, the data
buffer is read once. The “Programming Examples” section contains
examples on retrieving two-byte readings.

208 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Converting Four-Byte Four-byte readings and two-byte readings are converted to voltages and
and Two-Byte Readings resistances as follows.

Four-Byte Readings

1. The four-byte reading should be arranged into a single 32-bit

variable. The upper two bytes from the first Data Register read must
be the most significant word, the lower two bytes from the second
Data Register read must be the least significant word.

2. The 32-bit quantity is then shifted 8 bits to the left to remove the
eight reading header bits (effoprrr). Note that this header is used to
determine overrange conditions, and contains the function and range
opcodes.

3. The reading is calculated as:

converted_reading = (range * shifted_reading)/0x7FFFFF00

where range is the multimeter’s voltage or resistance range and

0x7FFFFF00 is the full scale reading for the given range in hexadecimal.

The “Programming Examples” section contains examples for

converting four-byte readings.

Two-Byte Readings

1. After the two-byte reading is retrieved from the Data Register, the
reading is shifted one bit to the right to remove the error bit. Note
that this bit is used to determine overrange conditions.

2. The reading is calculated as:

converted_reading = (range * shifted_reading)/0x3FFF

where range is the multimeter’s voltage or resistance range

and 0x3FFF is the full scale reading for the given range in hexadecimal.

The “Programming Examples” section contains examples for

converting two-byte readings.

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 209

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Program Timing and Execution
When programming the multimeter at the register level, the structure of the
program will generally be as follows:
– resetting the multimeter
– configuring the multimeter
– retrieving the measurements

This section contains generalized flowcharts and comments for performing

these and other procedures. The flowcharts identify the registers used and
the status bits monitored to ensure execution of the program.

Resetting the The multimeter is reset as indicated in Figure C-3.

Multimeter

Figure C-3. Resetting the Multimeter

Comments • The registers used are:

– Control Register (base + 0416)
– Status Register (base + 0416)
• Writing a "1" to bit 1 prevents the multimeter from asserting the
SYSFAIL line when the multimeter is reset. (If SYSFAIL is enabled
when a reset occurs, the multimeter is taken off-line by the system
Resource Manager.)
• Writing a "1" to bits 1 and 0 keeps SYSFAIL disabled and resets the
multimeter. This condition must remain for at least 2 µs for the reset
to complete. Writing a "0" to bit 0 turns the reset function off.

210 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 • Bit 2 of the Status Register is monitored to determine when the reset
is finished.
• Writing a "0" to bit 1 re-enables SYSFAIL.

Configuring the Configuring the multimeter consists of:

Multimeter • Setting the multimeter’s analog-to-digital A/D parameters

– function
– range
– aperture time
– autozero mode
– offset compensation mode

• Setting up the multimeter trigger system

– trigger source
– trigger count
– trigger delay
– sample count
– sample source
– sample rate
– wait-for-trigger state

This process is accomplished as indicated by the flowchart in Figure C-4.

Comments • The registers used are:

– Status Register (base + 0416)
– Command Register (base + 0816)
– Parameter Register (base + 0A16)
• Status Register bit 0 is monitored to determine when a command and
parameters can be written to the Command and Parameter Registers.
• Status Register bit 7 is monitored to determine when the multimeter
has finished processing the current command and parameter(s).
• Repeated passes through the flowchart are made until the desired
configuration is set.

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 211

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Figure C-4. Configuring the Multimeter

212 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Retrieving Figure C-5 shows the conditions monitored to determine when measurements
Measurements are available in the data buffer.

Figure C-5. Retrieving Measurements

Comments • The registers used are:

– Status Register (base + 0416)
– Data Buffer (base + 0C16)
• Bit 4 is monitored to determine when a reading is in the Data Buffer.
• In the four-byte reading mode, the Data Buffer must be read two
times for each reading. The first time the buffer is read, the upper
16 bits are retrieved. The second time the buffer is read, the lower
16 bits are retrieved.
• In the two-byte reading mode (10 µs aperture time), the Data Buffer
is read one time for each reading.
• The process is repeated until all readings have been read from the buffer.

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 213

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Checking for Errors Error conditions are monitored and error codes are returned as indicated in
figure C-6.

Figure C-6. Checking for Errors

Comments • The registers used are:

– Status Register (base + 0416)
– Command Register (base + 0816)
– Query Response Register (base + 0816)
• Status Register bit 7 is monitored to determine when the previous
command has finished. Bit 6 is monitored to determine when a
configuration error has occurred.
• Once an error is detected, the error code is written to the Query
Response Register with the Send Error command (opcode 15).
• Status Register bit 1 is monitored to determine when the error code
can be read from the Query Response Register.

214 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Querying Multimeter parameters are queried as shown in Figure C-7.
Parameters

Figure C-7. Querying Multimeter Parameters

Comments • The registers used are:

– Status Register (base + 0416)
– Command Register (base + 0816)
– Query Response Register (base + 0816)
• Status bit 7 is monitored to determine when a query opcode
(command) can be written to the Command Register.
• Status bit 1 is monitored to determine when the response to the query
is in the Query Response Register.

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 215

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Using a Multiplexer Figure C-8 shows an example timing sequence between closing a multiplexer
with the Multimeter channel and triggering the multimeter.

Figure C-8. Using a Multiplexer with the Multimeter

Comments • The registers used are:

– multiplexer Status Register (base + 016)
– multimeter Status Register (base + 0416)
– multiplexer/multimeter Command Register (base + 0816)
• The multiplexer Status Register is monitored to determine when a
channel can be closed (or opened), and when a channel has finished
closing (or opening).
• Multimeter status bit 0 is monitored to determine when a trigger
opcode can be written to the Command Register (the flowchart
assumes the multimeter is already configured).
• Multimeter status bit 5 is monitored to determine when the
analog-to-digital (A/D) conversion is in progress, and thus, when to
advance the channel. This enables each channel to be measured before
the readings are read from the buffer.

The channel can also be advanced by monitoring bit 4 (Data Ready).

However, before measuring the next channel, readings from the
previous channel must be read from the buffer in order to clear the bit.
• Autozero is often turned on in order to detect when bit 5 is active
(see “The Status Register” on page 206).

216 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Register Triggering
This section reviews the multimeter’s trigger system from the register-based
standpoint. The section shows the triggering models used by the burst and
scanning measurement examples in the “Programming Examples” section.
Also shown is the triggering model used for Control Register sampling.

The Trigger System The operation of the multimeter trigger system is shown in Figure C-9.

Figure C-9. Multimeter Trigger System

Comments • The multimeter is configured while it is in the Idle state.

• When the Trigger Source is Hold, Trigger Arm moves the

multimeter from the Idle state to the Wait-for-trigger state. Trigger
Immediate or a trigger from another source moves the multimeter to
the Triggered state. The measurement that is taken is appended to
the other readings in the buffer.

• When the Trigger Source is Immediate, Trigger Arm moves the

multimeter directly to the Triggered State. The measurement
overwrites any data currently in the data buffer.

• The multimeter returns to the Wait-for-trigger state once the number

of measurements equals the specified sample count.

• The multimeter returns to the Idle state when any of the following
occurs:
– the number of triggers received equals the specified trigger count
– the multimeter is disarmed
– the multimeter configuration is changed
– there is a reading overrun (the buffer fills)

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 217

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Multimeter The following models suggest one method of triggering the multimeter
Triggering Model when it is used to make stand-alone or scanning measurements.

Figure C-10. Multimeter Triggering Model

Comments • For burst measurements, the number of times Trigger Immediate is

executed is equal to the number of bursts (trigger count) specified.

• For scanning measurements, the number of times Trigger Immediate

is executed is equal to the number of channels (trigger count)
specified.

• When the Trigger Source is Hold and the multimeter is placed in the
Wait-for-trigger state (Trigger Arm), triggering the multimeter
(Trigger Immediate) causes the readings to be appended (rather than
overwritten) in the buffer.

• When making burst or scanning measurements, a waiting period (not

shown) is usually inserted between each burst/scan trigger (Trigger
Immediate). This allows each measurement (in the burst or on the
channel) to complete before the next trigger is issued. The period is
determined by the number of readings and the aperture time.

For burst measurements, the waiting period enables all bursts to

occur before the readings are read from the data buffer. Status bit 4
(Data Ready) can be monitored between bursts; however, the data
must be read from the buffer before the next trigger is issued. This
clears the bit so that data from the next burst can be detected.

• For burst and scanning measurements, the sample source and sample
rates can be set as required.

218 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Control Register The following model shows how to make a measurement by writing to the
Sampling Control Register. This method of sampling is available with the HP E1326B or
E1411B multimeter only.

Figure C-11. Control Register Sampling

Comments • The first measurement of each burst occurs when the trigger signal
(Trigger Immediate) is received. Subsequent measurements in the
burst occur when Control Register bit 2 is cleared (0), and then set to
one (1).

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 219

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Programming Examples
The examples in this section demonstrate how to program the multimeter at
the register level. The programs follow the execution and timing models
covered in the previous section. The examples in this section include:

• Resetting the Multimeter

• Reading the ID Register
• Reading the Device Type Register
• Reading the Query Response Register
• Reading an Error Code
• Stand-Alone Multimeter Measurements
• Scanning Multimeter Measurements

System The HP BASIC/WS and C language example programs were developed

Configuration using the following system configurations:

HP BASIC/WS Programs Mainframe: HP 75000 Series C (HP E1401A)

Controller: HP V/382 (HP E1499B) w/HP E1481A drivers
and E1481L License to Use
Programming Language: HP BASIC/WS
Multimeter: HP E1411B (Logical address = 24)
Multiplexer: HP E1460A (Logical address = 25)

C Language Programs Mainframe: HP 75000 Series C (HP E1401A)

Controller: HP RADI-EPC7 486 Embedded Controller
w/Standard Instrument Control Library (SICL)
for DOS
Programming Language: C
Multimeter: HP E1411B (Logical address = 24)
Multiplexer: HP E1351A (Logical address = 25) w/HP E1403B
Adapter

220 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Resetting the The following program resets the multimeter.
Multimeter
HP BASIC/WS
10 !Map the A16 address space in the HP V/382 and store the multimeter base
20 !address in a variable.
30 CONTROL 16,25;2
40 COM Base_addr
50 Base_addr=DVAL("C600",16)
60 !Call the subprogram which resets the multimeter.
70 CALL Mm_rst
80 END
90 !This subprogram checks each bit in the multimeter Status register.
100 !The subprogram is called by subprogram Mm_rst to monitor status bit 2.
110 SUB Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Pass_fail)
120 COM Base_addr
130 Status=READIO(-16,Base_addr+4)
140 Rdy=BIT(Status,0)
150 Done=BIT(Status,7) AND Rdy
160 Indardy=BIT(Status,4) AND Done
170 Qryrdy=BIT(Status,1) AND Done
180 Noerr=NOT (NOT (BIT(Status,6)) AND Done)
190 Pass_fail=BIT(Status,2)
200 SUBEND
210 !This subprogram resets the multimeter by disabling the SYSFAIL bit,
220 !then writing a ’1’ to Control Register bit 0, and then writing a ’0’ to
230 !Control Register bit 0. Once the reset completes, SYSFAIL is re-enabled.
240 SUB Mm_rst
250 COM Base_addr
260 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+4;
270 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+4;3
280 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+4;2
290 REPEAT
300 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,
Qryrdy,Noerr,Pass_fail)
310 UNTIL Pass_fail
320 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+4;0
330 SUBEND

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 221

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 C Version
/* E1411_RS.CPP - This program resets the multimeter. */
#include <sicl.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <conio.h>
#define PASS_FAIL (iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0X04)) & 0x04)
/* Function prototypes */
void reset_mm(char *base_addr);

void main(void)
{
char *base_addr;

/* create and open a device session */

INST e1411b;
e1411b = iopen("vxi,24");

/* map the E1411B registers into user memory space */

base_addr = imap(e1411b, I_MAP_VXIDEV, 0, 1, NULL);

/* function call to reset the multimeter */

reset_mm(base_addr);

/* close session */
iclose(e1411b);
}
/******************************************************/
void reset_mm(char *base_addr)
{
/* This function resets the multimeter by disabling the Control register */
/* ’SYSFAIL’ bit (bit 1), and then by writing a ’1’ to bit 0 and then by */
/* writing a ’0’ to bit 0. After the reset, the ’SYSFAIL’ bit is re-enabled. */

iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x04),2); /* disable ’SYSFAIL’ */

iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x04),3);

iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x04),3); /* bit must be set for 2 us */
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x04),3);

iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x04),2);/* turn off reset */

while (!PASS_FAIL); /* wait for the reset to complete */
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x04),0);/* enable ’SYSFAIL’ */
}

222 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Reading the ID As mentioned previously, the ID Register indicates the classification,
Register addressing mode, and manufacturer of the device. This program reads the
ID Register and returns FFFF16.

HP BASIC/WS Version
10 !Map the A16 address space in the HP V /382 and store the multimeter
20 !base address in a variable.
30 CONTROL 16,25;2
40 COM Base_addr
50 Base_addr=DVAL("C600",16)
60 !Call the subprogram which reads the ID register.
70 CALL Id_read
80 END
90 !This subprogram reads the ID register and displays the result in hexadecimal.
100 SUB Id_read
110 COM Base_addr
120 Register=READIO(-16,Base_addr+0)
130 Hex$=IVAL$(Register,16)
140 PRINT Hex$
150 SUBEND

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 223

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Reading the Device The Device Type Register contains the model code of the device. The
Type Register HP E1326B model code is FF4016 and the HP E1411B model code is
FF3816.

HP BASIC/WS Version
10 !Map the A16 address space in the HP V/382 and store the multimeter
20 !base address in a variable.
30 CONTROL 16,25;2
40 COM Base_addr
50 Base_addr=DVAL("C600",16)
60 !Call the subprogram which reads the Device Type register.
70 CALL Dt_read
80 END
90 !This subprogram reads the Device type register and displays the result
100 !in hexadecimal.
110 SUB Dt_read
120 COM Base_addr
130 Register=READIO(-16,Base_addr+2)
140 Hex$=IVAL$(Register,16)
150 PRINT Hex$
160 SUBEND

224 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 C Version
/* E1411_ID.CPP - This program reads the multimeter’s ID and Device Type */
/* registers. */

#include <sicl.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <conio.h>

/* Function prototypes */
void read_registers(char *base_addr);

void main(void)
{
char *base_addr;

/* create and open a device session */

INST e1411b;
e1411b = iopen("vxi,24");
/* map the E1411B registers into user memory space */
base_addr = imap(e1411b, I_MAP_VXIDEV, 0, 1, NULL);
/* function call to read the ID and Device Type registers */
read_registers(base_addr);

/* close session */
iclose(e1411b);
}
/******************************************************/
void read_registers(char *base_addr)
{
/* This function reads the multimeter’s ID and Device Type registers. */
unsigned short id_reg, dt_reg;
/* clear the user screen */
clrscr( );
/* read the E1411B ID and Device Type registers */
id_reg = iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x00));
dt_reg = iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x02));
printf("ID register = 0x%4X\nDevice Type register = 0x%4X", id_reg, dt_reg);
exit(0);
}

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 225

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Reading the Query The following program sets the multimeter function to (2-wire) OHMS, and
Response Register then queries the function and reads it from the Query Response Register.
The number "2" is returned.

HP BASIC/WS Version
10 !Map the A16 address space in the HP V/382 and store the multimeter base
20 !address in a variable.
30 CONTROL 16,25;2
40 COM Base_addr
50 Base_addr=DVAL("C600",16)
60 !Call the subprogram which sets and queries the multimeter function.
70 CALL Func_qry
80 END
90 !This subprogram checks each bit in the multimeter Status register.
100 !The subprogram is called by subprograms Wait_not_bsy and Qry_ready
110 !to determine when a command and parameter can be written to the
120 !Command and Parameter registers, and when data is in the Query
130 !Response register.
140 SUB Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Pass_fail)
150 COM Base_addr
160 Status=READIO(-16,Base_addr+4)
170 Rdy=BIT(Status,0)
180 Done=BIT(Status,7) AND Rdy
190 Indardy=BIT(Status,4) AND Done
200 Qryrdy=BIT(Status,1) AND Done
210 Noerr=NOT (NOT (BIT(Status,6)) AND Done)
220 Pass_fail=BIT(Status,2)
230 SUBEND
240 !This subprogram calls Read_status to check status bit 0 to determine
250 !when a command or parameter can be sent.
260 SUB Wait_not_bsy
270 REPEAT
280 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Pass_fail)
290 UNTIL Rdy
300 SUBEND
310 !This subprogram calls Read_status to check status bit 1 to determine
320 !when data is in the Query Response register.
330 SUB Qry_ready
340 REPEAT
350 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Pass_fail)
360 UNTIL Qryrdy
370 SUBEND
Continued on Next Page

226 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 380 !This subprogram sets and queries the multimeter function.
390 SUB Func_qry
400 COM Base_addr
410 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+8;4
420 CALL Wait_not_bsy
430 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+10;2
440 CALL Wait_not_bsy
450 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+8;5
460 CALL Qry_ready
470 Register=READIO(-16,Base_addr+8)
480 Rslt=BINAND(Register,255)
490 PRINT Rslt
500 SUBEND

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 227

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 C Version
/* E1411_QY.CPP - This program sets the multimeter function to (4-wire) */
/* OHMS and then queries the function setting and reads it from the Query */
/* Response register. */

#include <sicl.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <conio.h>

#define READY (iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x04)) & 0x01)

#define DONE ((iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x04)) & 0x81) == 0x81)
#define QRYRDY ((iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x04)) & 0x83) == 0x83)

/* Function prototypes */
void set_function(char *base_addr);

void main(void)
{
char *base_addr;

/* clear the user screen */

clrscr();

/* create and open a device session */

INST e1411b;
e1411b = iopen("vxi,24");

/* map the E1411B registers into user memory space */

base_addr = imap(e1411b, I_MAP_VXIDEV, 0, 1, NULL);

/* function call to set the multimeter function */

set_function(base_addr);

/* close session */
iclose(e1411b);
}

/******************************************************/
void set_function(char *base_addr)
{

Continued on Next Page

228 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 /* this function sets the multimeter function to ohms */

unsigned short query; /* variable for data from query response reg */
/* write ’measurement function’ to command register, wait for */
/* ready bit = 1 */
while(!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x08),4);

/* write ’OHMS’ to parameter register, wait for ready bit = 1 */

while (!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x0A),2);
while (!DONE);

/* write ’measurement function query’ to command register, wait for */

/* qryrdy bit = 1 */
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x08),5);
while (!QRYRDY);

query = iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x08));

printf("Query register contents = %x", (query & 0xFF));

}

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 229

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Reading an Error This program generates an error and then reads the error code from the
Code Query Response Register.

HP BASIC/WS Version
10 !Map the A16 address space in the HP V/382 and store the multimeter base
20 !address in a variable.
30 CONTROL 16,25;2
40 COM Base_addr
50 Base_addr=DVAL("C600",16)
60 !Call the subprogram which sets an invalid parameter, thus generating an error.
70 CALL Error_gen
80 END
90 !This subprogram checks each bit in the multimeter Status register.
100 !The subprogram is called by subprograms Wait_not_bsy, Wait_done, and
110 !Qry_ready to determine when a command and parameter can be written to
120 !Command and Parameter registers, and when an error code is in the Query
130 !Response register.
140 SUB Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Pass_fail)
150 COM Base_addr
160 Status=READIO(-16,Base_addr+4)
170 Rdy=BIT(Status,0)
180 Done=BIT(Status,7) AND Rdy
190 Indardy=BIT(Status,4) AND Done
200 Qryrdy=BIT(Status,1) AND Done
210 Noerr=NOT (NOT (BIT(Status,6)) AND Done)
220 Pass_fail=BIT(Status,2)
230 SUBEND
240 !This subprogram calls Read_status to check status bit 0 to determine
250 !when a parameter can be sent.
260 SUB Wait_not_bsy
270 REPEAT
280 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Pass_fail)
290 UNTIL Rdy
300 SUBEND
310 !This subprogram calls Read_status to check status bit 7. This bit determines
320 !the validity of bits 6 and 1, and determines when a command is finished.
330 SUB Wait_done
340 REPEAT
350 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Pass_fail)
360 UNTIL Done
370 SUBEND

Continued on Next Page

230 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 380 !This subprogram calls Read_status to check status bit 1 to determine
390 !when an error code is in the Query Response register.
400 SUB Qry_ready
410 REPEAT
420 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Pass_fail)
430 UNTIL Qryrdy
440 SUBEND
450 !This subprogram calls Read_status to check status bit 6 to determine
460 !if an error has occurred. If there is an error, the code is written to the
470 !Query Response register and then is read from the register.
480 SUB Err_chk(Noerr)
490 COM Base_addr
500 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Pass_fail)
510 IF Noerr THEN Ok
520 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+8;15
530 CALL Qry_ready
540 Errcode=READIO(-16,Base_addr+8)
550 Errcode=BINAND(Errcode,255)
560 PRINT “Error Code:”;Errcode
570 Ok:SUBEND
580 !This subprogram generates an error by specifying a parameter opcode of 7
590 !for the function parameter. (This is a parameter out of range.)
600 SUB Error_gen
610 COM Base_addr
620 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+8;4
630 CALL Wait_not_bsy
640 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+10;7
650 CALL Wait_done
660 CALL Err_chk(Noerr)
670 SUBEND

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 231

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 C Version
/* E1411_EC.CPP - This program generates an error and then reads the */
/* error code from the Query Response Register. */

#include <sicl.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <conio.h>

#define READY (iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x04)) & 0x01)

#define DONE ((iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x04)) & 0x81) == 0x81)
#define QRYRDY ((iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x04)) & 0x83) == 0x83)
#define NOERR ((iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x04)) & 0xC1) == 0xC1)

/* Function prototypes */
void cause_error(char *base_addr);
void check_for_error(char *base_addr);

void main(void)
{
char *base_addr;

/* clear the user screen */

clrscr();
/* create and open a device session */
INST e1411b;
e1411b = iopen("vxi,24");

/* map the E1411B registers into user memory space */

base_addr = imap(e1411b, I_MAP_VXIDEV, 0, 1, NULL);

/* function call to cause a multimeter error */

cause_error(base_addr);
/* close session */
iclose(e1411b);
}

/*******************************************************/
void cause_error(char *base_addr)
{

Continued on Next Page

232 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 /* this function specifies a parameter opcode of 7 for the function */
/* parameter. This is a parameter out of range. */

/* write ’measurement function’ to command register, wait for */

/* ready bit = 1 */
while(!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x08),4);

/* write an opcode of 7 to parameter register, wait for ready bit = 1 */

while (!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x0A),7);
while (!DONE);

/* call function which reads the error if an error has occurred */

if(!NOERR) check_for_error(base_addr);

/*******************************************************/
void check_for_error(char *base_addr)
{
unsigned short error_code; /* variable for error code from the */
/* query response register */

/* write ’send error’ to command register, wait for */

/* qryrdy bit = 1 */
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x08),15);
while (!QRYRDY);

error_code = iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr + 0x08));

printf("Error code = %x", (error_code & 0xFF));
}

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 233

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Stand-Alone The following program makes measurements using the stand-alone
Multimeter multimeter. The configuration shown makes five bursts of five
measurements each, and displays the readings on a terminal.
Measurements
HP BASIC/WS Version
10 !Initialize program variables.
20 CONTROL 16,25;2
30 Base_addr=DVAL("C600",16) !logical address 24
40 Aper=0
50 Func=0
60 Rng=0
70 COM Base_addr,Aper,Func,Rng
80 !Initialize (reset) the multimeter.
90 CALL Mm_reset
100 !Configure the multimeter’s A/D converter.
110 !Set the function (DCV)
120 CALL Peek_meas(4,0)
130 !Set the range (8V)
140 CALL Peek_meas(2,2)
150 !Set the aperture time (16.7 ms)
160 CALL Peek_meas(0,1)
170 !Set the autozero mode (OFF)
180 CALL Peek_meas(8,1)
190 !Set the offset compensation mode (OFF)
200 CALL Peek_meas(36,0)
210 !Configure multimeter trigger system
220 !Set the trigger source (HOLD)
230 CALL Peek_meas(6,2)
240 !Set the trigger count (number of bursts) (5)
250 CALL Peek_meas(39,0,0,5)
260 !Set the trigger delay (0s)
270 CALL Peek_meas(23,0,0,0)
280 !Set the sample count (number of readings/burst) (5)
290 CALL Peek_meas(38,0,0,5)
300 !Set sample source (IMMEDIATE)
310 CALL Peek_meas(7,0)
320 !Set the sample rate (set if sample source is Timer) (1)
330 !CALL Peek_meas(10,0,70)
340 !Place (arm) the multimeter in the wait-for-trigger state
350 CALL Peek_meas(12,1)
Continued on Next Page

234 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 360 !Dimension a computer variable to store the measurements.
370 !(size = number of bursts * number of readings per burst.)
380 REAL Readings(1:25)
390 !Trigger the multimeter one time for each burst specified by the
400 !Trigger Count parameter. A wait period equal to the number of readings
410 !in the burst times the aperture time is inserted to allow the measurement
420 !computation(s) to complete. All bursts occur before the readings are read
430 !from the buffer.
440 FOR I=1 TO 5
450 CALL Peek_meas(13)
460 WAIT 5*.0167
470 NEXT I
480 !Retrieve the measurement(s) and convert the measured signal to volts,
490 !ohms, etc.
500 CALL Read_data(Readings(*))
510 END
520 !The timing of events within a register-based program is controlled by
530 !monitoring the Status register for conditions which indicate when an
540 !event is in progress or has finished. The following subprogram reads
550 !the Status register and is called by other subprograms to determine when
560 !an action can be performed.
570 SUB Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Pass_fail)
580 Read_status: !
590 COM Base_addr,Aper,Func,Rng
600 Status=READIO(-16,Base_addr+4)
610 Rdy=BIT(Status,0)
620 Done=BIT(Status,7) AND Rdy
630 Indardy=BIT(Status,4) AND Done
640 Qryrdy=BIT(Status,1) AND Done
650 Noerr=NOT (NOT (BIT(Status,6)) AND Done)
660 Pass_fail=BIT(Status,2)
670 SUBEND
680 !This subprogram calls the Read_status subprogram to check status bit 0
690 !(Cmd/Parm Rdy) to determine when a command or parameter can be sent.
700 SUB Wait_not_bsy
710 Wait_not_bsy: !
720 COM Base_addr,Aper,Func,Rng
730 REPEAT
740 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Pass_fail)
750 UNTIL Rdy
760 SUBEND

Continued on Next Page

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 235

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 770 !This subprogram calls Read_status to check the validity of status bit 7
780 !(DONE). This ensures the validity of status bits 6,5,4, and 1.
790 SUB Wait_done
800 Wait_done: !
810 COM Base_addr,Aper,Func,Rng
820 REPEAT
830 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Pass_fail)
840 UNTIL Done
850 SUBEND
860 !This subprogram calls Read_status to determine if an error has occurred
870 !(status bit 6). If an error has occurred, the error code is displayed.
880 SUB Err_chk(Noerr)
890 Err_chk: !
900 COM Base_addr,Aper,Func,Rng
910 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Pass_fail)
920 IF Noerr THEN Ok
930 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+8;15
940 CALL Qry_ready
950 Errcode=READIO(-16,Base_addr+8)
960 Errcode=BINAND(Errcode,255)
970 PRINT “Error Code:”;Errcode
980 STOP
990 Ok:SUBEND
1000 !This subprogram calls Read_status to determine when an error code or
1010 !a response to an instrument query is in the Query Response register
1020 !(status bit 1).
1030 SUB Qry_ready
1040 Qry_ready: !
1050 COM Base_addr,Aper,Func,Rng
1060 REPEAT
1070 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Pass_fail)
1080 UNTIL Qryrdy
1090 SUBEND
1100 !This subprogram calls Read_status to determine when measurement data
1110 !is available in the multimeter data buffer (status bit 4).
1120 SUB Data_ready
1130 Data_ready: !
1140 COM Base_addr,Aper,Func,Rng
1150 REPEAT
1160 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Pass_fail)
1170 UNTIL Indardy
1180 SUBEND
Continued on Next Page

236 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1190 !This subprogram writes commands and parameters to the Command
1200 !and Parameter registers. It calls Wait_not_bsy prior to writing the next
1210 !command or parameter. Once a command and its parameter(s) are written,
1220 !it calls Wait_done and Err_chk to check for any errors.
1230 !The subprogram also stores the measurement function, range, and aperture
1240 !time so that the right routine (in subprogram Read_data) is used to
1250 !convert the measured signal to the appropriate quantity.
1260 SUB Peek_meas(Cmd,OPTIONAL INTEGER Parm1,Parm2,Parm3)
1270 Peek_meas: !
1280 COM Base_addr,Aper,Func,Rng
1290 CALL Wait_not_bsy
1300 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+8;Cmd
1310 IF NPAR>1 THEN
1320 CALL Wait_not_bsy
1330 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+10;Parm1
1340 END IF
1350 IF NPAR>2 THEN
1360 CALL Wait_not_bsy
1370 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+10;Parm2
1380 END IF
1390 IF NPAR>3 THEN
1400 CALL Wait_not_bsy
1410 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+10;Parm3
1420 END IF
1430 IF Cmd=0 THEN Aper=Parm1
1440 IF Cmd=2 THEN Rng=Parm1
1450 IF Cmd=4 THEN Func=Parm1
1460 CALL Wait_done
1470 CALL Err_chk(Noerr)
1480 SUBEND
1490 !This subprogram retrieves the reading(s) from the multimeter’s data
1500 !buffer and converts it to the appropriate quantity (i.e. voltage,
1510 !resistance) based on the measurement function, range, and aperture time.
1520 !The subprogram calls Data_ready to determine when the readings are
1530 !in the data buffer.
1540 SUB Read_data(Readings(*))
1550 Read_data: !
1560 COM Base_addr,Aper,Func,Rng
1570 CALL Data_ready
1580 FOR I=1 TO 25 !Number of bursts * number of readings/burst
1590 IF Aper=6 THEN
1600 Lower_word=READIO(-16,Base_addr+12)
1610 Count=Lower_word/32768
Continued on Next Page

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 237

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1620 Header=BIT(Lower_word,0)*128+Rng
1630 Exp=BINAND(Header,7)
1640 ELSE
1650 Upper_word=READIO(-16,Base_addr+12)
1660 CALL Data_ready
1670 Lower_word=READIO(-16,Base_addr+12)
1680 Header=SHIFT(Upper_word,8)
1690 Count=65536.*BINAND(Upper_word,255)+2.*
SHIFT(Lower_word,1)
1700 Exp=BINAND(Header,7)
1710 IF Count>=8388608 THEN
1720 Count=(Count-16777216.)/8388608
1730 ELSE
1740 Count=Count/8388608
1750 END IF
1760 END IF
1770 IF Func=2 THEN
1780 Readings(I)=Count*256*8^(Exp)
1790 ELSE
1800 Readings(I)=Count*8^(Exp-1)
1810 END IF
1820 NEXT I
1830 PRINT Readings(*)
1840 SUBEND
1850 !This subprogram resets the multimeter by disabling the SYSFAIL bit,
1860 !then writing a ’1’ to Control register bit 0, and then writing a ’0’ to
1870 !Control register bit 0. Once the reset completes, SYSFAIL is re-enabled.
1880 SUB Mm_reset
1890 Mm_reset: !
1900 COM Base_addr,Aper,Func,Rng
1910 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+4;2
1920 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+4;3
1930 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+4;2
1940 REPEAT
1950 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Pass_fail)
1960 UNTIL Pass_fail
1970 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+4;0
1980 SUBEND

238 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 C Version
/* E1411_M.CPP - This program takes measurements on the front */
/* terminals of the E1411B multimeter. */

#include <sicl.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <conio.h>

/* define macros to monitor status register conditions */

#define READY (iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04)) & 0x01)

#define DONE ((iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04)) & 0x81) ==
0x81)
#define DATARDY ((iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04)) & 0x91)
== 0x91)
#define QRYRDY ((iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04)) & 0x83)
== 0x83)
#define NOERR ((iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04)) & 0xC1)
== 0xC1)
#define PASS_FAIL (iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0X04)) & 0x04

/* Function prototypes */

void configure_dmm(char *base_addr_dmm, int command, int parameter);

void set_sample_period(char *base_addr_dmm, int command, unsigned short
parameter);
void set_dmm_counts(char *base_addr_dmm, int command, long parameter);
void no_dmm_parameters(char *base_addr_dmm, int command);
void trigger_dmm(char *base_addr_dmm);
void check_for_error(char *base_addr_dmm);
void reset_mm(char *base_addr_dmm);

int aper, rng, func; /* global variables to contain the multimeter */

/* aperture time, range, and function; which are */
/* used to calculate the reading */

void main(void)
{
char *base_addr_dmm; /* pointer to multimeter base address */

clrscr(); /* clear the user screen */

/* create and open the device session */
INST e1411b;
e1411b = iopen("vxi,24");

Continued on Next Page

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 239

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 /* map the E1411B registers into user memory space */
base_addr_dmm = imap(e1411b, I_MAP_VXIDEV, 0, 1, NULL);

/* function call to reset the multimeter */

reset_mm(base_addr_dmm);

/* function calls to configure the multimeter; the parameters */

/* are the multimeter’s A16 base address, the command opcode, */
/* and the parameter opcode or value */

configure_dmm(base_addr_dmm,4,0); /* function = DCV */

configure_dmm(base_addr_dmm,2,2); /* range = 8V */

configure_dmm(base_addr_dmm,0,1); /* aperture time = 16.7 ms */

configure_dmm(base_addr_dmm,8,1); /* autozero = off */

configure_dmm(base_addr_dmm,36,0); /* offset compensation = off */

/* trigger system */
configure_dmm(base_addr_dmm,6,2); /* trigger source = HOLD */

configure_dmm(base_addr_dmm,7,0); /* sample source = IMMEDIATE */

/*set_sample_period(base_addr_dmm,10,76); sample rate = set when

source is TIMER */

set_dmm_counts(base_addr_dmm,39,5); /* trigger count = 5 */

set_dmm_counts(base_addr_dmm,23,0); /* trigger delay = 0 */

set_dmm_counts(base_addr_dmm,38,5); /* sample count = 5 */

configure_dmm(base_addr_dmm,12,1); /* arm the multimeter */

/* trigger the multimeter */

trigger_dmm(base_addr_dmm);

/* close the device session */

iclose(e1411b);
}

/******************************************************/
void configure_dmm(char *base_addr_dmm, int command, int parameter)
{
/* this function sets the multimeter measurement function, range, aperture */
/* time, autozero mode, offset compensation mode, trigger source, sample */
/* source, and trigger arm */

Continued on Next Page

240 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 /* write command to command register */
/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */

while(!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x08),command);

/* write parameter to parameter register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */
while (!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x0A),parameter);

/* save aperture time, range, and function for reading conversion */

if (command == 0)
aper = parameter;
else if (command == 2)
rng = parameter;
else if (command == 4)
func = parameter;

while(!DONE); /* wait until mm is done before sending the */

/* next command and parameters */

if(!NOERR) check_for_error(base_addr_dmm);
/* check for configuration errors */
}
/******************************************************/
void set_sample_period(char *base_addr_dmm, int command, unsigned
short parameter)
{
/* this function sets the multimeter sample period */
/* parameter variables */
unsigned short parm1 = 0, parm2 = 0;

/* convert parameter (sample period) to two bytes */

parm1 = parameter >> 8; /* upper byte */
parm2 = parameter & 0xFF; /* lower byte */

/* write command to command register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */
while(!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x08),command);

/* write upper byte to parameter register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */
while (!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x0A),parm1);

/* write lower byte to parameter register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */
while (!READY);

Continued on Next Page

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 241

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x0A),parm2);

while(!DONE); /* wait until mm is done before sending the */

/* next command and parameters */

if(!NOERR) check_for_error(base_addr_dmm);
/* check for configuration errors */
}

/*******************************************************/
void set_dmm_counts(char *base_addr_dmm, int command, long
parameter)
{
/* this function sets the multimeter trigger count, trigger delay, and */
/* sample count */

/* parameter variables */
unsigned short parm1 = 0, parm2 = 0, parm3 = 0;

/* convert count or delay to three bytes */

parm1 = parameter >> 16; /* upper byte */
parm2 = parameter >> 8; /* middle byte */
parm3 = parameter; /* lower byte */

/* write command to command register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */
while(!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x08),command);

/* write upper byte to parameter register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */
while (!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x0A),parm1);

/* write middle byte to parameter register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */
while (!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x0A),parm2);

/* write lower byte to parameter register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */
while (!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x0A),parm3);

while(!DONE); /* wait until mm is done before sending the */

/* next command and parameters */

if(!NOERR) check_for_error(base_addr_dmm);
/* check for configuration errors */
}

Continued on Next Page

242 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 /******************************************************/
void no_dmm_parameters(char *base_addr_dmm, int command)
{
/* this function sends those multimeter commands which do not have */
/* parameters; this includes trigger immediate and software sample. */

/* write command to command register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */
while(!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x08),command);

while(!DONE); /* wait until mm is done before sending the */

/* next command and parameters */

if(!NOERR) check_for_error(base_addr_dmm);
/* check for configuration errors */

/******************************************************/
void trigger_dmm(char *base_addr_dmm)
{
/* this function triggers the multimeter and retrieves and prints the readings */
/* from the data register */

int i, range_code;
short dmm_2byte = 0; /* 2-byte reading variable */
long dmm_4byte = 0, temp_4byte = 0; /* 4-byte reading variable */
float range, reading;

/* voltage range and resistance range tables */

float volt_range[5] = {0.125, 1.0, 8.0, 64.0, 300.0};
float ohm_range[5] = {256.0, 2048.0, 16384.0, 131000.0, 1048000.0};
for (i=0; i<25; i++) /* loop for 5 bursts of 5 readings */
{
no_dmm_parameters(base_addr_dmm,13);/* trigger the multimeter */
while(!DATARDY);

if (aper != 6)/* aperture time is NOT 10 us (4-byte readings) */

{
/* get upper word of reading from the data register, shift the */
/* word 16-bits to the left */
temp_4byte = (long) iwpeek((unsigned short *)
(base_addr_dmm + 0x0C));
dmm_4byte = (temp_4byte << 16);

while(!DATARDY); /* wait for lower word of reading */

Continued on Next Page

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 243

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 /* get lower word of reading from the data register, add the */
/* word to the reading upper word in the variable dmm_4byte, */
/* ensure upper word of temp_4byte is 00h */

temp_4byte = (long) iwpeek((unsigned short *)

(base_addr_dmm + 0x0C));
dmm_4byte = dmm_4byte + (temp_4byte & 0xFFFF);

/* check for reading overrange */

if (dmm_4byte & 0x80000000)

{
printf("\nReading Overrange");
}

else
{
/* get range code from reading, get range from */
/* the appropriate range table */

range_code = ((dmm_4byte >> 24) & 7);

if (func == 2)
range = ohm_range[range_code];
else
range = volt_range[range_code];

/* compute and print reading */

dmm_4byte = (dmm_4byte << 8);
reading = (range * dmm_4byte) / 0x7FFFFF00;
printf("\n%.5E", reading);
}
}
else /* aperture time is 10 us (2-byte readings) */
{
dmm_2byte = (short) iwpeek((unsigned short *)
(base_addr_dmm + 0x0C));

/* check for reading overrange */

if (dmm_2byte & 0x1)

{
printf("\nReading Overrange");
}

else
{
/* remove error bit from reading */

Continued on Next Page

244 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 dmm_2byte = (dmm_2byte >> 1);

/* get range code from rng variable, get range from */

/* the appropriate range table */
if (func == 2)
range = ohm_range[rng];
else
range = volt_range[rng]; /* voltage ranges */

/* compute and print reading */

reading = (range * dmm_2byte) / 0x3FFF;
printf("\n%.5E", reading);
}
}
}
}
/******************************************************/
void check_for_error(char *base_addr_dmm){
unsigned short error_code; /* variable for error code from the */
/* query response register */

/* write ’send error’ to command register, wait for */

/* Qryrdy bit = 1 */
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x08),15);
while (!QRYRDY);

error_code = iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x08));

printf("Error code = %x", (error_code & 0xFF));

exit(EXIT_FAILURE); /* exit program */}

/******************************************************/
void reset_mm(char *base_addr_dmm)
{
/* This function resets the multimeter by disabling the Control register */
/* ’SYSFAIL’ bit (bit 1), and then by writing a ’1’ to bit 0 and then by */
/* writing a ’0’ to bit 0. After the reset, the ’SYSFAIL’ bit is re-enabled. */

iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04),2);/* disable ’SYSFAIL’ */

iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04),3);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04),3);
/* bit must be set for 2 us */
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04),3);

iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04),2);/* turn off reset */

while (!PASS_FAIL); /* wait for the reset to complete */

iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04),0);/* enable ’SYSFAIL’ */

}

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 245

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Scanning The following program makes measurements using the multimeter and the
Multimeter HP E1460A 64-Channel Relay Module. The configuration makes one scan
through eight channels, and takes one measurement on each channel.
Measurements

HP BASIC/WS Version
10 !Initialize program variables.
20 CONTROL 16,25;2
30 Base_addr=DVAL("C600",16) !logical address 24
40 Base_addrm=DVAL("C640",16) !logical address 25
50 I=0
60 Aper=0
70 Func=0
80 Rng=0
90 !Number of channels being measured.
100 Nchan=8
110 COM I,Base_addr,Base_addrm,Aper,Func,Rng,Nchan,Chan_closed
120 !Initialize (reset) the multimeter.
130 CALL Mm_reset
140 !Open all multiplexer channels.
150 CALL Mux_reset
160 !Configure the multimeter’s A/D converter.
170 !Set the function (DCV)
180 CALL Peek_meas(4,0)
190 !Set the range(Autorange)
200 CALL Peek_meas(2,5)
210 !Set the aperture time (16.7 ms)
220 CALL Peek_meas(0,1)
230 !Set the autozero mode - to detect bit 5 (ON)
240 CALL Peek_meas(8,0)
250 !Set the offset compensation mode(OFF)
260 CALL Peek_meas(36,0)
270 !Configure multimeter trigger system
280 !Set the trigger source (HOLD)
290 CALL Peek_meas(6,2)
300 !Set the trigger count (number of channels to scan) (8)
310 CALL Peek_meas(39,0,0,8)
320 !Set the trigger delay(0s)
330 CALL Peek_meas(23,0,0,0)
340 !Set the readings per trigger (per channel) (1)
350 CALL Peek_meas(38,0,0,1)
Continued on Next Page

246 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 360 !Set the sample source(IMMEDIATE)
370 CALL Peek_meas(7,0)
380 !Set the sample rate (Set if sample source is Timer (1))
390 !CALL Peek_meas(10,0,70)
400 !Place (arm) the multimeter in the wait-for-trigger state
410 CALL Peek_meas(12,1)
420 !Dimension a computer variable to store the measurements.
430 !(size = number of channels * number of readings per channel*
440 !number of scans.)
450 REAL Readings(1:8)
460 !Step through the scan list; close the multiplexer channel, check that the
470 !channel is closed, trigger the multimeter, wait for the multimeter to
480 !complete the measurement(s), close the next channel ...
490 FOR I=1 TO 8 !One trigger for each channel
500 CALL Close_chan
510 CALL Peek_meas(13)
520 NEXT I
530 !Retrieve the measurement(s) and convert the measured signal to volts,
540 !ohms, etc.
550 CALL Read_data(Readings(*))
560 END
570 !The following subprogram reads the Status register and is called by
580 !other subprograms to determine when a particular action can be performed.
590 SUB Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Mmcomp, Pass_fail)
600 Read_status: !
610 COM I,Base_addr,Base_addrm,Aper,Func,Rng,Nchan,Chan_closed
620 Status=READIO(-16,Base_addr+4)
630 Rdy=BIT(Status,0)
640 Mmcomp=BIT(Status,5)
650 Done=BIT(Status,7) AND Rdy
660 Indardy=BIT(Status,4) AND Done
670 Qryrdy=BIT(Status,1) AND Done
680 Noerr=NOT (NOT (BIT(Status,6)) AND Done)
690 Pass_fail=BIT(Status,2)
700 SUBEND
710 !This subprogram calls the Read_status subprogram to check status bit 0
720 !(Cmd/Parm Rdy) to determine when a command or parameter can be sent.
730 SUB Wait_not_bsy
740 Wait_not_bsy: !
750 COM I,Base_addr,Base_addrm,Aper,Func,Rng,Nchan,Chan_closed
760 REPEAT
770 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Mmcomp, Pass_fail)
780 UNTIL Rdy
Continued on Next Page

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 247

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 790 SUBEND
800 !This subprogram calls Read_status to check the validity of bit 7 (DONE).
810 !This ensures the validity of bits 6,5,4, and 1.
820 SUB Wait_done
830 Wait_done: !
840 COM I,Base_addr,Base_addrm,Aper,Func,Rng,Nchan,Chan_closed
850 REPEAT
860 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Mmcomp, Pass_fail)
870 UNTIL Done
880 SUBEND
890 !This subprogram calls Read_status to determine if an error has occurred
900 !(status bit 6). This subprogram is called after Wait_done to ensure the
910 !validity of the Noerr bit. If an error has occurred, the error code is
920 !displayed.
930 SUB Err_chk(Noerr)
940 Err_chk: !
950 COM I,Base_addr,Base_addrm,Aper,Func,Rng,Nchan,Chan_closed
960 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Mmcomp, Pass_fail)
970 IF Noerr THEN Ok
980 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+8;15
990 CALL Qry_ready
1000 Errcode=READIO(-16,Base_addr+8)
1010 Errcode=BINAND(Errcode,255)
1020 PRINT “Error Code:”;Errcode
1030 STOP
1040 Ok:SUBEND
1050 !This subprogram calls Read_status to determine when an error code or
1060 !a response to an instrument query is in the Query Response register
1070 !(status bit 1).
1080 SUB Qry_ready
1090 Qry_ready: !
1100 COM I,Base_addr,Base_addrm,Aper,Func,Rng,Nchan,Chan_closed
1110 REPEAT
1120 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Mmcomp, Pass_fail)
1130 UNTIL Qryrdy
1140 SUBEND
1150 !This subprogram calls Read_status to determine when measurement data
1160 !is available in the multimeter data buffer (status bit 4).
1170 SUB Data_ready
1180 Data_ready: !
1190 COM I,Base_addr,Base_addrm,Aper,Func,Rng,Nchan,Chan_closed
1200 REPEAT
Continued on Next Page

248 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1210 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Mmcomp, Pass_fail)
1220 UNTIL Indardy
1230 SUBEND
1240 !This subprogram monitors bit 5 (MULTIMETER COMPLETE) in the
1250 !status register. When the bit is set, the A/D portion of the measurement is
1260 !in progress and the multiplexer channel is advanced. By advancing the
1270 !channel during this condition, each channel can be scanned
1280 !before the readings are read from the buffer.
1290 SUB Mm_comp
1300 Mm_comp: !
1310 COM I,Base_addr,Base_addrm,Aper,Func,Rng,Nchan,Chan_closed
1320 REPEAT
1330 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Mmcomp, Pass_fail)
1340 UNTIL Mmcomp
1350 SUBEND
1360 !This subprogram monitors the multiplexer Status register. It is called
1370 !by subprogram Chan_rdy to determine when a channel can be closed
1380 !(or opened), and to determine when a channel has finished closing (or
1390 !opening).
1400 SUB Mux_status
1410 Mux_status: !
1420 COM I,Base_addr,Base_addrm,Aper,Func,Rng,Nchan,Chan_closed
1430 M_status=READIO(-16,Base_addrm+4)
1440 Chan_closed=BIT(M_status,7)
1450 SUBEND
1460 !This subprogram closes the multiplexer channels.
1470 SUB Close_chan
1480 Close_chan: !
1490 COM I,Base_addr,Base_addrm,Aper,Func,Rng,Nchan,Chan_closed
1500 CALL Chan_rdy
1510 WRITEIO -16,Base_addrm+32;2^(I-1)
1520 CALL Chan_rdy
1530 SUBEND
1540 !This subprogram calls Mux_status to determine when a channel can be
1550 !closed and when a channel has finished closing.
1560 SUB Chan_rdy
1570 Chan_rdy: !
1580 COM I,Base_addr,Base_addrm,Aper,Func,Rng,Nchan,Chan_closed
1590 REPEAT
1600 CALL Mux_status
1610 UNTIL Chan_closed
1620 SUBEND

Continued on Next Page

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 249

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1630 !This subprogram writes commands and parameters to the Command and
1640 !Parameter registers. When a command is written, it calls Wait_not_bsy
1650 !before writing the parameter(s). Once a command and parameter are
1660 !written it calls Wait_done, and Err_chk to check for configuration
1670 !errors. The subprogram also stores the function, range, and aperture
1680 !time so that the right routine is used to convert the measured signal
1690 !to the appropriate quantity. When the trigger command is sent, subprogram
1700 !Mm_comp is called to monitor status bit 5 before the channel is
1710 !advanced. The waiting period allows multiple measurements to complete.
1720 SUB Peek_meas(Cmd,OPTIONAL INTEGER Parm1,Parm2,Parm3)
1730 Peek_meas: !
1740 COM I,Base_addr,Base_addrm,Aper,Func,Rng,Nchan,Chan_closed
1750 CALL Wait_not_bsy
1760 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+8;Cmd
1770 IF NPAR>1 THEN
1780 CALL Wait_not_bsy
1790 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+10;Parm1
1800 END IF
1810 IF NPAR>2 THEN
1820 CALL Wait_not_bsy
1830 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+10;Parm2
1840 END IF
1850 IF NPAR>3 THEN
1860 CALL Wait_not_bsy
1870 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+10;Parm3
1880 END IF
1890 IF Cmd=0 THEN Aper=Parm1
1900 IF Cmd=2 THEN Rng=Parm1
1910 IF Cmd=4 THEN Func=Parm1
1920 IF Cmd=13 THEN
1930 CALL Mm_comp
1940 WAIT 1*.0334 !Number of readings per channel
1950 ELSE
1960 CALL Wait_done
1970 CALL Err_chk(Noerr)
1980 END IF
1990 SUBEND

Continued on Next Page

250 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2000 !This subprogram reads the measurements (all channels) from the
2010 !data buffer. It converts the measured quantities to volts, ohms, etc.,
2020 !and displays them.
2030 SUB Read_data(Readings(*))
2040 Read_data: !
2050 COM I,Base_addr,Base_addrm,Aper,Func,Rng,Nchan,Chan_closed
2060 CALL Data_ready
2070 FOR R=1 TO 8 !# of channels * # of readings/channel * # of scans
2080 IF Aper=6 THEN
2090 Lower_word=READIO(-16,Base_addr+12)
2100 Count=Lower_word/32768
2110 Header=BIT(Lower_word,0)*128+Rng
2120 Exp=BINAND(Header,7)
2130 ELSE
2140 Upper_word=READIO(-16,Base_addr+12)
2150 CALL Data_ready
2160 Lower_word=READIO(-16,Base_addr+12)
2170 Header=SHIFT(Upper_word,8)
2180 Count=65536.*BINAND(Upper_word,255)+2.* SHIFT(Lower_word,1)
2190 Exp=BINAND(Header,7)
2200 IF Count>=8388608 THEN
2210 Count=(Count-16777216.)/8388608
2220 ELSE
2230 Count=Count/8388608
2240 END IF
2250 END IF
2260 IF Func=2 THEN
2270 Readings(R)=Count*256*8^(Exp)
2280 ELSE
2290 Readings(R)=Count*8^(Exp-1)
2300 END IF
2310 NEXT R
2320 PRINT Readings(*)
2330 SUBEND

Continued on Next Page

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 251

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2340 !This subprogram resets the multimeter by disabling the SYSFAIL bit,
2350 !then writing a "1" to Control register bit 0, and then writing a "0" to
2360 !Control register bit 0. Once the reset completes, SYSFAIL is re-enabled.
2370 SUB Mm_reset
2380 Mm_reset: !
2390 COM I,Base_addr,Base_addrm,Aper,Func,Rng,Nchan,Chan_closed
2400 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+4;2
2410 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+4;3
2420 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+4;2
2430 REPEAT
2440 CALL Read_status(Status,Rdy,Done,Indardy,Qryrdy,Noerr,Mmcomp, Pass_fail)
2450 UNTIL Pass_fail
2460 WRITEIO -16,Base_addr+4;0
2470 SUBEND
2480 !This subprogram opens all multiplexer channels and then closes the bank
2490 !99 relay on the HP E1460A multiplexer.
2500 SUB Mux_reset
2510 Mux_reset: !
2520 COM I,Base_addr,Base_addrm,Aper,Func,Rng,Nchan,Chan_closed
2530 WRITEIO -16,Base_addrm+32;0
2540 REPEAT
2550 CALL Mux_status
2560 UNTIL Chan_closed
2570 WRITEIO -16,Base_addrm+48;4
2580 REPEAT
2590 CALL Mux_status
2600 UNTIL Chan_closed
2610 SUBEND

252 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 C Version This program uses the E1411B multimeter and the E1351A FET
multiplexer to perform high-speed scanning. The program configures the
multimeter for high-speed measurements and downloads a scan list to the
FET multiplexer. The program requires that the analog bus and digital bus
cables be connected between the multimeter and the multiplexer.
/* E1411_SC.CPP - This program uses the E1411B to scan five E1351A FET */
/* multiplexer channels five times. */

#include <sicl.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <conio.h>
#include <dos.h>

/* define macros to monitor status register conditions */

#define READY (iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04)) & 0x01)

#define DONE ((iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04)) & 0x81) ==
0x81)
#define DATARDY ((iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04)) & 0x91)
== 0x91)
#define QRYRDY ((iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04)) & 0x83)
== 0x83)
#define NOERR ((iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04)) & 0xC1)
== 0xC1)
#define PASS_FAIL (iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0X04)) & 0x04)

/* Function prototypes */

void configure_dmm(char *base_addr_dmm, int command, int parameter);

void set_sample_period(char *base_addr_dmm, int command, unsigned
short parameter);
void set_dmm_counts(char *base_addr_dmm, int command, long parameter);
void no_dmm_parameters(char *base_addr_dmm, int command);
void set_scanlist(char *base_addr_fet);
void trigger_dmm(char *base_addr_dmm);
void check_for_error(char *base_addr_dmm);
void reset_mm(char *base_addr_dmm);
void reset_fet(char *base_addr_fet);

int aper, rng, func; /* global variables to contain the multimeter */

/* aperture time, range, and function; which are */
/* used to calculate the reading */

void main(void)
{

Continued on Next Page

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 253

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 char *base_addr_dmm; /* pointer to multimeter base address */
char *base_addr_fet; /* pointer to multiplexer base address */

clrscr( ); /* clear the user screen */

/* create and open device sessions */
INST e1411b;
e1411b = iopen("vxi,24");

INST e1351a;
e1351a = iopen("vxi,25");

/* map the E1411B and E1351A registers into user memory space */
base_addr_dmm = imap(e1411b, I_MAP_VXIDEV, 0, 1, NULL);

base_addr_fet = imap(e1351a, I_MAP_VXIDEV, 0, 1, NULL);

/* function calls to reset the multimeter and the multiplexer */

reset_mm(base_addr_dmm);

reset_fet(base_addr_fet);

/* function calls to configure the multimeter; the parameters */

/* are the multimeter’s A16 base address, the command opcode, */
/* and the parameter opcode or value */

configure_dmm(base_addr_dmm,4,0); /* function = DCV */

configure_dmm(base_addr_dmm,2,2); /* range = 8V */

configure_dmm(base_addr_dmm,0,6); /* aperture time = 10 us */

configure_dmm(base_addr_dmm,8,1); /* autozero = off */

configure_dmm(base_addr_dmm,36,0); /* offset compensation = off */

/* trigger system */

configure_dmm(base_addr_dmm,6,2); /* trigger source = HOLD */

configure_dmm(base_addr_dmm,7,1); /* sample source = TIMER */

set_sample_period(base_addr_dmm,10,76);/* sample rate = 76 us */

set_dmm_counts(base_addr_dmm,39,25);/* trigger count = 25 */

set_dmm_counts(base_addr_dmm,23,0);/* trigger delay = 0 */

set_dmm_counts(base_addr_dmm,38,1);/* sample count = 1 */

configure_dmm(base_addr_dmm,12,1); /* arm the multimeter */

Continued on Next Page

254 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 /* Download FET multiplexer scan list */
set_scanlist(base_addr_fet);
/* trigger the multimeter */
trigger_dmm(base_addr_dmm);

/* close the device sessions */

iclose(e1411b);
iclose(e1351a);
}

/*******************************************************/
void configure_dmm(char *base_addr_dmm, int command, int parameter)
{
/* this function sets the multimeter measurement function, range, aperture */
/* time, autozero mode, offset compensation mode, trigger source, sample */
/* source, and trigger arm */

/* write command to command register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */
while(!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x08),command);

/* write parameter to parameter register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */
while (!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x0A),parameter);

/* save aperture time, range, and function for reading conversion */

if (command == 0)
aper = parameter;
else if (command == 2)
rng = parameter;
else if (command == 4)
func = parameter;

while(!DONE); /* wait until mm is done before sending the */

/* next command and parameters */

if(!NOERR) check_for_error(base_addr_dmm);
/* check for configuration errors */
}

Continued on Next Page

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 255

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 /*******************************************************/
void set_sample_period(char *base_addr_dmm, int command, unsigned
short parameter)
{
/* this function sets the multimeter sample period */

/* parameter variables */
unsigned short parm1 = 0, parm2 = 0;

/* convert parameter (sample period) to two bytes */

parm1 = parameter >> 8; /* upper byte */
parm2 = parameter & 0xFF; /* lower byte */

/* write command to command register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */

while(!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x08),command);

/* write upper byte to parameter register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */

while (!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x0A),parm1);

/* write lower byte to parameter register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */
while (!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x0A),parm2);

while(!DONE); /* wait until mm is done before sending the */

/* next command and parameters */

if(!NOERR) check_for_error(base_addr_dmm);
/* check for configuration errors */
}

Continued on Next Page

256 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 /******************************************************/
void set_dmm_counts(char *base_addr_dmm, int command, long parameter)
{
/* this function sets the multimeter trigger count, trigger delay, and */
/* sample count */

/* parameter variables */
unsigned short parm1 = 0, parm2 = 0, parm3 = 0;

/* convert count or delay to three bytes */

parm1 = parameter >> 16; /* upper byte */
parm2 = parameter >> 8; /* middle byte */
parm3 = parameter; /* lower byte */

/* write command to command register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */
while(!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x08),command);

/* write upper byte to parameter register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */
while (!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x0A),parm1);

/* write middle byte to parameter register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */
while (!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x0A),parm2);

/* write lower byte to parameter register */

/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */
while (!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x0A),parm3);

while(!DONE); /* wait until mm is done before sending the */

/* next command and parameters */

if(!NOERR) check_for_error(base_addr_dmm);
/* check for configuration errors */
}

Continued on Next Page

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 257

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 /******************************************************/
void no_dmm_parameters(char *base_addr_dmm, int command)
{
/* this function sends those multimeter commands which do not have parameters; */
/* this includes trigger immediate and software sample. */
/* write command to command register */
/* wait for mm ready bit = 1 */
while(!READY);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x08),command);

while(!DONE); /* wait until mm is done before sending the */

/* next command and parameters */

if(!NOERR) check_for_error(base_addr_dmm);
/* check for configuration errors */
}
/******************************************************/
void set_scanlist(char *base_addr_fet)
{
/* this function downloads the scan list to the FET multiplexer */

/* clear old scan list and set up scan control register */

iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_fet + 0x06),1);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_fet + 0x06),0);

/* Download the scan list (channels 0 through 4), configure for */

/* DC voltage measurements */
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_fet + 0x0A),0x6000);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_fet + 0x0A),0x6001);

iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_fet + 0x0A),0x6002);

iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_fet + 0x0A),0x6003);
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_fet + 0x0A),0x6004);

/* set up multiplexer scanning */

/* set direct control of scan list */
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_fet + 0x04),0x08);
/* enable digital bus triggering, continuous scanning, reset pointer */
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_fet + 0x06),0x1A);
/* set control of scan list to dmm */
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_fet + 0x04),0x00);
/* close first channel */
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_fet + 0x04),0x10);
}

Continued on Next Page

258 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 /******************************************************/
void trigger_dmm(char *base_addr_dmm)
{
/* this function triggers the multimeter and retrieves and prints the */
/* readings from the data register */

int i, range_code;
short dmm_2byte = 0; /* 2-byte reading variable */
long dmm_4byte = 0, temp_4byte = 0; /* 4-byte reading variable */
float range, reading;

/* voltage range and resistance range tables */

float volt_range[5] = {0.125, 1.0, 8.0, 64.0, 300.0};
float ohm_range[5] = {256.0, 2048.0, 16384.0, 131000.0, 1048000.0};

for (i=0; i<25; i++) /* loop for 5 scans of 5 readings */

{
no_dmm_parameters(base_addr_dmm,13);/* trigger the multimeter */
while(!DATARDY);

if (aper != 6)/* aperture time is NOT 10 us (4-byte readings) */

{
/* get upper word of reading from the data register, shift the */
/* word 16-bits to the left */

temp_4byte = (long) iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x0C));

dmm_4byte = (temp_4byte << 16);

while(!DATARDY); /* wait for lower word of reading */

/* get lower word of reading from the data register, add the */
/* word to the reading upper word in the variable dmm_4byte, */
/* ensure upper word of temp_4byte is 00h */

temp_4byte = (long) iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x0C));

dmm_4byte = dmm_4byte + (temp_4byte & 0xFFFF);

/* check for reading overrange */

if (dmm_4byte & 0x80000000)

{
printf("\nReading Overrange");
}
else
{

Continued on Next Page

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 259

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 /* get range code from reading, get range from */
/* the appropriate range table */
range_code = ((dmm_4byte >> 24) & 7);

if (func == 2)
range = ohm_range[range_code];
else
range = volt_range[range_code];

/* compute and print reading */

dmm_4byte = (dmm_4byte << 8);
reading = (range * dmm_4byte) / 0x7FFFFF00;
printf("\n%.5E", reading);
}
}

else /* aperture time is 10 us (2-byte readings) */

{
dmm_2byte = (short) iwpeek((unsigned short *)
(base_addr_dmm + 0x0C));

/* check for reading overrange */

if (dmm_2byte & 0x1)

{
printf("\nReading Overrange");
}

else
{
/* remove error bit from reading */
dmm_2byte = (dmm_2byte >> 1);

/* get range code from rng variable, get range from */

/* the appropriate range table */
if (func == 2)
range = ohm_range[rng];/* resistance ranges */
else
range = volt_range[rng]; /* voltage ranges */

/* compute and print reading */

reading = (range * dmm_2byte) / 0x3FFF;
printf("\n%.5E", reading);
}
}
}

Continued on Next Page

260 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 /******************************************************/
void check_for_error(char *base_addr_dmm)
{
unsigned short error_code; /* variable for error code from the */
/* query response register */

/* write ’send error’ to command register, wait for */

/* Qryrdy bit = 1 */
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x08),15);
while (!QRYRDY);

error_code = iwpeek((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x08));

printf("Error code = %x", (error_code & 0xFF));

exit(EXIT_FAILURE); /* exit program */

}
/*******************************************************/
void reset_mm(char *base_addr_dmm)
{
/* This function resets the multimeter by disabling the Control Register */
/* ’SYSFAIL’ bit (bit 1), and then by writing a ’1’ to bit 0 and then by */
/* writing a ’0’ to bit 0. After the reset, the ’SYSFAIL’ bit is re-enabled. */

iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04),2);/*disable ’SYSFAIL’ */

iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04),3);

iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04),3);/*set bit for 2us*/
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04),3);

iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04),2);/* turn off reset */

while (!PASS_FAIL); /* wait for the reset to complete */

iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_dmm + 0x04),0);/* enable ’SYSFAIL’ */

}
/******************************************************/
void reset_fet(char *base_addr_fet)
{
/* This function resets the FET multiplexer by writing a ’1’ to Control */
/* register bit 0, waiting 100 ms, and then writing a ’0’ to bit 0. */
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_fet + 0x04),1);/* set bit 0 to 1 */
delay (100); /* wait 100 ms (Borland C++ function) */
iwpoke((unsigned short *)(base_addr_fet + 0x04),0);/* set bit 0 to 0 */
}

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 261

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Useful Tables
The tables contained in this section are:

• Command and Parameter Opcodes

• Register-Based Programming Error Codes
• Multimeter Power-On Settings
• Aperture and Function Change Times
• VME Interrupt Conditions

Command and Table C-2 contains the command and parameter opcodes. The opcodes used to
Parameter Opcodes query the parameter settings are also included. Additional information on the
relationship between commands can be found in Chapter 4.

Table C-2. Command and Parameter Opcodes

Multimeter Command Parameter Query Query

Parameter Opcode Opcode Value Opcode Response
Measurement 04 00 DCV 05 parameter
Function 01 ACV opcode
02 (4-wire) OHMS
Range 02 00 125 mV / 256 Ω 03 parameter
01 1V / 2.048 kΩ opcode
02 8V / 16.384 kΩ
03 64V / 131 kΩ
04
05 300V / 1.048 MΩ
Autorange
Aperture Time 00 00 267 ms 01 parameter
01 16.7 ms opcode
02 320 ms
03 20 ms
04 2.5 ms
05 100 µs
06 10 µs
Autozero 08 00 On 09 parameter
01 Off opcode
02 Once
Offset 36 00 Off 37 parameter
Compensation 01 On opcode
Trigger Source 06 00 Immediate 29 parameter
01 External opcode
02 Hold
03 - 0A TTL trigger lines
0-7
Trigger Count 39 <upper byte> 1 - 16,777,215 33 24-bit unsigned
<middle byte> (1),(3) number
<lower byte> (2)
Trigger Delay 23 <upper byte> 0 - 16.777215s 31 24-bit unsigned
<middle byte> (1) number
<lower byte> (2)

Table C-2 Continued on Next Page

262 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table C-2. Command and Parameter Opcodes (continued)

Multimeter Command Parameter Query Query

Parameter Opcode Opcode Value Opcode Response
Voltmeter 40 8-bit binary number 0-7 41 8-bit binary number
Complete Signal (7) (TTL trigger lines)
Destination
Sample Count 38 <upper byte> 1 - 16,777,215 32 24-bit unsigned
<middle byte> (1),(4) number
<lower byte> (2)
Sample Source 07 00 Immediate 30 parameter
01 Timer opcode
02 Software
03 Control Register
Sample Period 10 <upper byte> 76µs - 65.534ms (1) 11 16-bit unsigned
(5) <lower byte> number
(2)
Software Sample 35 —- —- —- ...
(6)
Trigger Arm 12 00 Un-armed —- —-
01 Armed
Trigger Immediate 13 —- —- —- ...
Send Error 15 —- —- —- —-

(1) Specified as a 2’s complement binary number. For three byte parameters <upper byte> = value shifted 16 bits to the
right (>>16), <middle byte> = value shifted 8 bits to the right (>>8), <lower byte> = value. For two byte parameters
<upper byte> = value shifted 8 bits to the right (>>8), <lower byte> = value & 0xFF.

(2) Reading the Query Response Register two times (16-bit number) or three times (24-bit number) returns in order; the
high byte, middle byte, and low byte.

(3) A parameter value of 0 sets infinite triggers per trigger arm.

(4) A parameter value of 0 sets infinite samples per trigger.

(5) Set when Sample Source is Timer.

(6) Used when Sample Source is Software. The first measurement of each burst occurs when the trigger signal is
received (e.g. Trigger Immediate). Subsequent measurements in the burst occur when Software Sample is written to the
Command Register.

(7) Up to seven VXIbus TTLTrg trigger lines can be selected. 01 selects line 0, FF selects all lines.

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 263

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Register-Based The error codes related to register-based programming are listed in
Programming Error Table C-3.
Codes

Note When an error occurs, bit 6 in the Status Register is cleared and an error
code is stored. The error code is placed in the Query Response Register
with the Send Error command. The “Programming Examples” section
shows you how to check for errors and display error codes.

Table C-3. Register-Based Programming Error Codes

Error Code Cause

0016 No error has occurred since the last error code was read.

0116 Unrecognized command opcode.

0216 A parameter was required but a command was received.

0316 A parameter is invalid or out of range for the specified command.

0416 Reading overrun. The data buffer is full and another measurement is taken. This
error also occurs when a new command (opcode) is received while the multimeter
is placing a reading in the data buffer. Trigger Arm is disabled.

0516 The command or parameter received is not allowed in the two byte reading mode
(10 µs aperture time).

0C16 Command is terminated by another command.

0E16 The aperture time is longer than the sample rate.

0F16 Input overload. A potentially damaging voltage has been applied to the
multimeter:

> +- 40V between HI and LO or HI and COMMON with the range <= 8V
> +- 40V between LO and COMMON on any range

Under this condition, the multimeter disconnects itself from the input.
A new range must be specified to restore operation.

264 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Multimeter The multimeter’s power-on settings are shown in Table C-4.
Power-On Settings

Table C-4. Multimeter Power-On Settings

Parameter Value Opcode

Function DCV 0016

Range 8V 0216

Aperture time 16.7 ms 0116

Autozero ON 0016

Offset Compensation OFF 0016

Trigger Source IMMEDIATE 0016

Trigger Count 1 —-

Trigger Delay set by function —-

Sample Count 1 —-

Sample Source IMMEDIATE 0016

Sample Rate 50 ms —-

Trigger Arm OFF 0016

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 265

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Function and Table C-5 lists the times required for the multimeter to change its function
Aperture Change and aperture time. The times pertain to both SCPI and register-based
programming.
Times

Table C-5. Function and Aperture Change Times

To Function From Function

DCV/OHMS* ACV

ACV** 530 ms (autozero = ON) —-

15 ms (autozero = OFF)

DCV 750 µs (from OHMS) 12 ms

OHMS 750 µs (from DCV) 12 ms

Aperture Time Function

DCV/OHMS* ACV

320 ms 123 ms 1.0 s

267 ms 106 ms 1.0 s

20 ms 123 ms 1.0 s

16.7 ms 106 ms 1.0 s

2.5 ms 36 ms 1.0 s

100 µs 24 ms 1.0 s

10 µs 23 ms 1.0 s

* Including offset compensated OHMS.

** Changing the function to ACV automatically sets a 250 ms
trigger delay. This delay can be changed with the Trigger
Delay command.

Note - range changes are approximately 200 µs.

Reading the Table For example, it takes the multimeter 12 ms to change its function from
ACV to DCV. It takes 23 ms to set the 10 us aperture time for DCV. Thus,
to change from ACV/16.7 ms aperture time to DCV/10 µs aperture time
would require:

12 ms (function change) + 23 ms (aperture time change) = 35 ms.

266 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 VME Interrupts The HP E1326B/E1411B generates interrupt signals on the conditions
indicated in Table C-6. These signals are available to the computer
(controller) via the VXIbus backplane.

Table C-6. VME Interrupt Conditions

Bit Decimal Interrupt

Value

0 1 Interrupt on reading available.

1 2 Interrupt on Status Register bit 7 (DONE) = 1.

2 4 Interrupt on an error (Status Register bit 6 = 0.

3 8 Interrupt on Multimeter Complete

(Status Register bit 5 = 1).

4 16 Interrupt when data buffer is half full.

A VME interrupt is enabled by sending the following command opcode and the
decimal value of the bit representing the interrupt condition:
<26> <decimal value>

The interrupt condition enabled is queried with the opcode:

<34>

Appendix C HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming 267

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Notes

268 HP E1326B/E1411B Multimeter Register-Based Programming Appendix C

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix D
Measurement Speed and Accuracy Tradeoffs

The HP E1326B SCPI driver was designed so that its default mode of
operation will deliver high accuracy readings with a minimum of
programming effort. However, many applications require high-speed
measurements and reduced reading accuracy is acceptable.

The following guidelines show how to increase measurement speed.

Be aware that these guidelines also increase the complexity of the program.

1. Avoid function changes.

2. Avoid aperture changes.

3. Minimize the number of command/response sessions.

4. Do binary transfers to the computer:

REAL 32 is fastest and is compatible with compiled languages.
REAL 64 is fast and is compatible with HP BASIC.

5. Use macros to minimize command parsing time.

6. Set autozeroing to ONCE or OFF.

7. Turn auto ranging OFF.

8. Decrease aperture time:

to reach 10 µs aperture time you must be on a fixed range.

9. Store the readings in command module RAM instead of sending

them directly to the computer.

10. Post process strain and temperature measurements.

Note Only items 7 and 8 may reduce the accuracy of a measurement. The rest of
the guidelines involve increased work for the system programmers.

Appendix D Measurement Speed and Accuracy Tradeoffs 269

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Avoid Function The E1326B multimeter (DMM) takes time to switch between its various
Changes functions because the hardware is reconfigured and calibration constants for
the new function are retrieved. Organize your program so all measurements
on a function are done at the same time. This is best accomplished with a
scan list. For example:
10 OUTPUT @Dmm;"MEAS:VOLT:DC? (@100:103)"
20 ENTER @Dmm;Dc_readings(*)
30 OUTPUT @Dmm;"MEAS:RES? (@105,107)"
40 ENTER @Dmm;Res_readings(*)

Avoid Aperture Changing apertures takes a significant amount of time because the
Changes multimeter retrieves new calibration constants from its calibration memory
and prepares to use them. The easiest way to avoid aperture changes is to
directly specify the aperture time. This requires that you not use the
MEASure command and that you not specify the optional <resolution>
parameter in a CONFigure command. For example:
10 OUTPUT @Dmm;"CONF:VOLT:DC (@100:103);:VOLT:APER 100e-6;:READ?"
20 ENTER @Dmm;Dc_readings(*)

Minimize the Number Minimizing the number of command/response sessions involves

of Command/ programming the multimeter to pace itself, rather than the computer pacing
Response Sessions the multimeter. The SAMPle TIMer should be used for single channel pacing
or for multiple channel scanning with the FET multiplexers (see page 58).
The SAMPle TIMer will generate an error message if the multimeter cannot
keep up. For example:
10 OUTPUT @Dmm;"CONF:VOLT:DC;:VOLT:APER 100e-6;"
20 OUTPUT @Dmm;"SAMP:SOUR TIM;SAMP:TIM .02;SAMP:COUNT 200;:READ?"
30 DIM Reading(1:200)
40 ENTER @Dmm;Reading(*)

The EXTernal TRIGger input can be used to start a scan based on an

external signal. In the HP E1300/E1301 mainframe the built-in pacer is a
convenient source for an external signal. A potential problem is that if an
external trigger arrives before the multimeter is ready to start a new scan,
the trigger will be missed and no error message is generated. For example:
10 OUTPUT @Dmm;"CONF:VOLT:DC (@100:109);:VOLT:APER 100e-6;"
20 OUTPUT @Dmm;"TRIG:SOUR EXT;TRIG:COUNT 200;:READ?"
30 OUTPUT @Sys;"PULSE:PER .02;PULSE:COUN 200;:INIT"
40 DIM Reading(1:200)
50 ENTER @Dmm;Reading(*)

270 Measurement Speed and Accuracy Tradeoffs Appendix D

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Do Binary Transfers to REAL 32 is fastest and is compatible with compiled languages.
the Computer REAL 64 is fast and is compatible with HP BASIC.

The default data format between the multimeter and the computer is ASCII.
This format is not efficient because the multimeter’s internal format is
32-bit REAL. Thus, the multimeter must convert its 32-bit REAL number
to ASCII, and then the computer must convert the ASCII number to its
internal format which is either 32- or 64-bit REAL.

A REAL number in HP BASIC is a 64-bit REAL. In the C language,

variable type "float" is a 32-bit REAL number, and variable type "double"
is a 64-bit REAL number.

When an instrument has been programmed to output its readings in either

REAL 32 or REAL 64 format, an ANSI/IEEE Standard 488.2-1987 definite
length arbitrary block header precedes the binary data. In the header format
#, <non-zero digit>, <digits>, and <8-bit data byte> :
• # indicates the data is in an arbitrary block
• <non-zero digit> is a single digit number which shows the number
of digits contained in "digits". For example, if the "digits" value is
100 or 2000, the "non-zero digit" value is 3 or 4, respectively.
• <digits> is the number of 8-bit data bytes which follow the header.
• <8-bit data byte> are the multimeter readings. For the PACKed
format, each reading is two bytes. For the REAL 64 format, each
reading is eight bytes.

Following the last reading in each block is the line feed (LF) character. The
line feed must be read from the buffer to prevent Error -410 “Query
Interrupted” occurs the next time data is read from the multimeter.

Here is a program which demonstrates the speed

differences.$ISpeed;differences This program was run on a BASIC
language co-processor. Note the actual program output at the end.
10 !re-save "DMM_FMTS"
20 !This main line code is reserved as a error handling shell.
30 !All application code must be at lower level context.
40 !Define I/O paths.
50 ASSIGN @Sys TO 70900
60 ASSIGN @Dmm TO 70903
70 ASSIGN @Dmm_bin TO 70903;FORMAT OFF
80 COM @Sys,@Dmm,@Dmm_bin
90 !Turn TIMEOUTS to errors--this branch never taken.
100 ON TIMEOUT 7,3 GOTO End
110 !This handles timeouts and errors not handled at lower level contexts.
120 ON ERROR RECOVER Kaboom
130 !Put application code in this sub.
140 Main
Continued on Next Page

Appendix D Measurement Speed and Accuracy Tradeoffs 271

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 150 GOTO End
160 Kaboom: PRINT ""
170 PRINT ERRM$
180 PRINT "HERE IS THE E13XX ERROR STATUS"
190 E13xx_errors
200 End: END
210 !This sub reads all errors from E13xx instruments.
220 SUB E13xx_errors
230 COM @Sys,@Dmm,@Dmm_bin
240 DIM A$[128]
250 ABORT 7
260 CLEAR @Dmm
270 REPEAT
280 OUTPUT @Dmm;"SYST:ERR?"
290 ENTER @Dmm;A,A$
300 PRINT "DMM ERROR ";A$
310 UNTIL A=0
320 !
330 CLEAR @Sys
340 REPEAT
350 OUTPUT @Sys;"SYST:ERR?"
360 ENTER @Sys;A,A$
370 PRINT "SYSTEM ERROR ";A$
380 UNTIL A=0
390 SUBEND
400 !This subroutine is treated as the main line.
410 SUB Main
420 COM @Sys,@Dmm,@Dmm_bin
430 !Put application code here.
440 !Program the DMM to take 10000 readings FAST.
450 OUTPUT @Dmm;"CONF:VOLT:DC;:VOLT:RANGE:AUTO
OFF;:CAL:ZERO:AUTO OFF;:VOLT:APER MIN"
460 OUTPUT @Dmm;"SAMP:SOUR TIM;SAMP:TIM 76E-6;SAMP:COUNT 10000"
470 !Take the readings now
480 OUTPUT @Dmm;"INIT;*OPC?"
490 ENTER @Dmm;A
500 !Now time taking the 10000 readings out in ASCII
510 OUTPUT @Dmm;"FORMAT ASCII"
520 DIM Readings(1:10000)
530 OUTPUT @Dmm;"FETCH?"
540 Start=TIMEDATE
Continued on Next Page

272 Measurement Speed and Accuracy Tradeoffs Appendix D

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 550 ENTER @Dmm;Readings(*)
560 Stop=TIMEDATE
570 PRINT "TIME TO READ 10000 READINGS IN ASCII=";(Stop-Start)
580 !Now transfer the same data in BASIC internal format REAL 64.
590 OUTPUT @Dmm;"FORMAT REAL,64"
600 DIM Ndig$[1],Count$[9]
610 OUTPUT @Dmm;"FETCH?"
620 Start=TIMEDATE
630 !Read the header.
640 ENTER @Dmm USING "#,X,K,K";Ndig$;Count$[1;VAL(Ndig$)]
650 !Read the data.
660 ENTER @Dmm_bin;Readings(*)
670 !Read the LF.
680 ENTER @Dmm;Lf$
690 Stop=TIMEDATE
700 PRINT "TIME TO READ 10000 READINGS IN REAL 64= ";(Stop-Start)
710 !Now transfer the same date in REAL 32 format.
720 !If this is going to BASIC it would later need to be converted.
730 OUTPUT @Dmm;"FORMAT REAL,32"
740 !It take two integers per reading.
750 INTEGER I_readings(1:20000)
760 OUTPUT @Dmm;"FETCH?"
770 Start=TIMEDATE
780 !Read the header.
790 ENTER @Dmm USING "#,X,K,K";Ndig$;Count$[1;VAL(Ndig$)]
800 !Read the data.
810 ENTER @Dmm_bin;I_readings(*)
820 !Read the LF.
830 ENTER @Dmm;Lf$
840 Stop=TIMEDATE
850 PRINT "TIME TO READ 10000 READINGS IN REAL 32=";(Stop-Start)
860 SUBEND
870 !

TIME TO READ 10000 READINGS IN ASCII = 34.75

TIME TO READ 10000 READINGS IN REAL 64 = 8.14999389648

TIME TO READ 10000 READINGS IN REAL 32 = 1.82000732422

Appendix D Measurement Speed and Accuracy Tradeoffs 273

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Use Macros to Macros provide the fastest programming method when it is necessary to
Minimize Command change functions from one measurement to the next. If you are not
Parsing Time changing functions, then it is just as fast to repeat a measurement using
INIT;:FETCH? or READ?.

Program with macros if more than one scan list or function is needed. The
firmware has allocated space for approximately 50 macros.
OUTPUT @Dmm;"*PMC;*EMC 1" !To initialize Purge old macros.
!Enable macros.
!Define the MACRO. Choose a short name such as M1.
!The #225 is an IEEE 488.2 arbitrary block header in the form #ndd
! # means block specifier
n is the number of dd to follow
dd is the number of characters
!
OUTPUT @Dmm;"*DMC ""M1"",#234MEAS:VOLT:DC?,300,1000, (@100:115)"
!To use the Macros.
OUTPUT @Dmm;"M1"
ENTER @Dmm;Reading(*) !This example is doing ASCII transfer.

Set Autozeroing to Autozeroing causes the A/D to alternately measure its internal zero and the
ONCE or OFF external signal. Autozeroing improves reading accuracy; however, it
reduces reading speed by 1⁄2.

CAL:ZERO:AUTO ON ----The zero will be measured before each

measurement.
CAL:ZERO:AUTO OFF ---- No new zero readings will be made.
CAL:ZERO:AUTO ONCE ---- Does one Autozeroing operation when the
command is received and also sets the mode
to autozeroing OFF.

The zero may vary over time, especially as the room temperature varies.
Noticeable changes can be expected over many minutes or hours. However,
over a few seconds the changes should be very small.

When a scan list is used the readings occur as a burst, thus little is gained by
auto zeroing each reading.

274 Measurement Speed and Accuracy Tradeoffs Appendix D

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Turn Auto Ranging OFF Turning auto ranging OFF makes the E1326B take all of its measurements
on a fixed range which results in fast and predictable measurement times.
Also, auto ranging must be turned OFF in order to set a 10 µs aperture time.

Auto ranging is turned OFF when a numeric value or MIN | MAX is

specified for the <range> parameter of the CONFigure, MEASure,
[SENSe:]RESistance:RANGe, [SENSe:]VOLTage:RANGe, or
[SENSe:]VOLTage:AC:RANGe command. Auto ranging is directly
controlled by the [SENSe:]VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO ON | OFF,
[SENSe:]VOLTage:AC:RANGe:AUTO ON | OFF, or
[SENSe:]RESistance:RANGe:AUTO ON | OFF command.

You can verify the auto range mode by querying the E1326B as to its auto
range status using the following commands:
[SENSe:]VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO?
[SENSe:]VOLTage:AC:RANGe:AUTO?
[SENSe:]RESistance:RANGe:AUTO?

Decrease Aperture The aperture time is the amount of time that the input signal is integrated.
Time The available choices are 10 µs, 100 µs, 2.5 ms, 16.7 ms, 20 ms, 267 ms,
and 320 ms. The smaller the aperture time, the faster the readings are taken.

The 10 µs aperture time can only be entered if auto ranging is first turned OFF.

A disadvantage to faster aperture times is that increased noise will be

present in the measured values. The most common source of noise is from
AC power sources.

The magnitude of noise from AC power sources is commonly many

milli-volts. If the signal being measured is large enough, then the noise may
not be significant. However, if the signal being measured is in the
micro-volt range, then noise becomes a factor.

The E1326B default aperture time is 16.7 ms in countries with 60 Hz power,

or 20 ms in countries with 50 Hz power. Integrating for one or sixteen
power line cycles causes the E1326B to reject power line frequencies that
are coupled into the measured signal. For example, the specification of
60 db of normal mode rejection will cause 1 mV of noise to be reduced to
1 µV of noise.

Appendix D Measurement Speed and Accuracy Tradeoffs 275

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Setting the Resolution The aperture time is set as a result of specifying the <resolution> parameter
in the MEASure or CONFigure command, or by directly setting it with the
VOLTage:APERture or RESistance:APERture command.

Table 4-5 on page 92 can be used to pick a value for the <resolution>
parameter in a MEASure or CONFigure command when you want to set the
aperture time. Select the range and aperture, and then look up the resolution
from the table. Round the resolution up to one less significant digit and use
it in the CONFigure or MEASure command.

A less complicated method used to set the aperture time is to specify it

directly. This requires that you use the VOLTage:APERture command.
For example:
10 OUTPUT @Dmm;"CONF:VOLT:DC (@100:103);:VOLT:APER 100e-6;:READ?"
20 ENTER @Dmm;Dc_readings(*)

Temperature Thermocouple temperature measurements are actually a computation

Measurements following both a voltage and a resistance measurement. Thermistor or RTD
temperature measurements are actually a computation following a resistance
measurement. To change the aperture for temperature, you need to change
the RESistance:APERture for thermistor measurements and the
RESistance:APERture and VOLTage:APERture for thermocouple
measurements. For example:
10 OUTPUT 70903;"CONF:TEMP TC,J,(@100:115)"
20 OUTPUT 70903;"VOLT:APER MIN;:RES:APER MIN"
30 OUTPUT 70903;"READ?"
40 ENTER 70903;Reading(*)

276 Measurement Speed and Accuracy Tradeoffs Appendix D

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Store the Readings in There is a major difference between INIT;:FETCH? and READ? after a
Command Module CONFigure command.
RAM Instead of
Sending them Directly
to the Computer

INIT;:FETCH? When the INITiate command is sent to the HP E1326B, the multimeter will
reserve four bytes per reading of command module RAM to hold the total
number of readings that the E1326B multimeter has been configured to
take. For example:
CONF:VOLT:DC?
SAMP:COUNT 1000
INIT !Reserves room for 1000 four
byte readings
FETCH?

The HP E1326B then takes the readings as soon as its trigger conditions
have been satisfied. For example, if the trigger source is IMMediate, the
readings are started once INITiate is executed. If the trigger source is BUS,
then the readings are started when a group execute trigger is received.

The FETCH? command causes the readings that have been stored in the
HP E1300/E1301 RAM (or command module RAM) to be retrieved and sent
over the HP-IB bus. No readings are output until all readings have been taken
and stored in RAM. This results in a burst-then-transfer mode of operation.

This mode of operation has been designed so that readings from the E1326B
multimeter can be received and placed into RAM at any reading rate up to
13 kHz. The 13 kHz rate is achieved with auto zeroing and auto ranging
OFF, and the 10 µs aperture time selected. In this mode, the E1326 does a
two-pass process on the data. In response to the INIT command, the
multimeter readings are placed into RAM in the multimeter’s internal
format as they are taken. When the first pass ends, the readings in RAM are
converted to 32-bit REAL numbers. The FETCH? command outputs the
readings in the format that has been selected.

The maximum number of readings is limited by the amount of RAM in the

HP E1300/E1301 mainframe or command module. The RAM is used up at
the rate of four bytes per reading.

Appendix D Measurement Speed and Accuracy Tradeoffs 277

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 READ? The READ? command causes the E1326B multimeter to start taking
readings as soon as the trigger requirements have been met (see
INIT;:FETCh).

The READ? command, however, causes NO RAM in the command module

(or E1300/E1301 mainframe) to be allocated for E1326B reading storage.
Instead, E1326B readings are placed directly in the HP-IB output buffer.

This is the mode of operation that should be used when readings need to be
taken at a continuous rate.

The controller needs to remove the readings at a rate such that the HP-IB
output buffer (128 characters) and the 512 word multimeter Data
Register (used when SAMPle:SOURce TIM is used) does not overflow.

The readings in the multimeter’s Data Register are in the multimeter

internal format. For example:

• 10 µs aperture == one word per reading

• all other apertures == two words per reading

The readings in the output buffer are in the format specified by the FORMat
command. For example, FORMat ASCII, FORMat REAL 32,
FORMat REAL 64.

Post Process Strain The temperature and strain measurements are computations done on voltage
and Temperature and resistance measurements. The computations are done at the end of each
Measurements pass through a scan list. This computation limits the maximum speed.

With thermocouple temperature measurements, function changing times are

also involved in the measurements as the RESistance function is used to
measure a 5000 Ω thermistor on the isothermal terminal block, and then the
voltage function is used to measure each thermocouple.

The method used to make fast temperature and strain measurements is to

make the measurements using the voltage and resistance functions. After
all measurements have been completed the computer can convert the
readings to the desired final units (i.e., temperature, strain). This maximizes
measurement speed, but also increases program complexity.

278 Measurement Speed and Accuracy Tradeoffs Appendix D

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index
HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual

resolution, 92, 120, 175

RMS, 86, 130, 147
specifications, 194 - 195
*CLS, 178, 186 VOLTage:AC:RANGe, 169
*DMC, 186 Access Annunciator (E1411B only), 16
*EMC, 186 Accessing the Registers, 202
*EMC?, 186 Adapter
*ESE, 186 A/B to C-size, 37
*ESE?, 186 HP E1326B, 25
*ESR?, 186 Address
*GMC?, 186 A16 address space, 199
*IDN?, 186 base address, 200 - 201
*LMC?, 186 bytes per register-based device, 201
*OPC, 186 bytes per VXI device, 200
*OPC?, 186 external memory board, 150
*PMC, 186 logical, 22 - 23, 200 - 201
*RCL, 114, 186 registers, 199, 201 - 202
*RMC, 186 secondary, 22
*RST, 17, 186 Analog Bus
*SAV, 114, 186 cables, 30 - 31, 37 - 38
*SRE, 186 connections, 31
*SRE?, 186 connections at multimeter, 31
*STB?, 186 port, 15
*TRG, 103, 122, 186 Aperture Time
*TST?, 16, 186 changes, 266
*WAI, 186 changing, 270
decreasing, 275
A description, 97
four-byte reading mode, 208
A16 Address Space, 199 - 200 See also Integration Time (PLC)
inside command module, 201 minimum sample period, 110
inside embedded controller, 201 parameters, 91, 97
inside mainframe, 201 querying, 98, 164, 171
outside command module, 200 RESistance:APERture, 98, 163
outside mainframe, 200 sample period (minimum), 159
Abbreviated SCPI Commands, 118 saved in memory, 114
ABORt, 112 - 113, 122 setting, 98, 110, 163, 171
Aborting Measurements, 112 - 113, 122 table listing, 92, 120
AC Voltage Measurements two-byte reading mode, 208
AC-coupled, 86, 130, 147 VOLTage:APERture, 98, 171
CONFigure:VOLTage:AC, 130 Arbitrary Block Header, 140, 271
connecting for, 33 ASCII Data Format, 140, 271
MEASure:VOLTage:AC?, 147 Assemblies, carrier cable, 37
percent overrange, 92, 120 Autorange
range, 92, 120, 169 description, 94

HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual Index 279

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 enabling, 167, 174 shielded twisted-pair, 32
parameters, 94 CALibration Subsystem, 123 - 124
querying setting, 95, 168, 175 CALibration:LFRequency, 123
RESistance:RANGe:AUTO, 94, 167 CALibration:LFRequency?, 123
setting, 94 CALibration:ZERO:AUTO, 99, 124
VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO, 94, 174 CALibration:ZERO:AUTO?, 99, 124
Autozero Carrier Cable Assemblies, 37
CALibration:ZERO:AUTO, 99, 124 Certification, 7
description, 99, 124 Changing
disabling, 124, 275 AC voltage range, 170
enabling, 99, 124, 274 aperture time, 270
parameters, 91, 99, 124 data format, 58 - 59
querying, 99 DC voltage range, 172
querying mode, 124 DC voltage resolution, 176
saved in memory, 114 function, 270
range, 166
B resolution, 169
Channel
Backplane closing via backplane, 135
closing channels, 135 closing via digital bus, 135
FET multiplexer control, 135 list scanning, 46 - 49
interrupt line, 24 monitoring single, 136 - 137
Base Address, 200 pairs, 88
inside embedded controller, 201 query monitor mode, 137
BASIC Example Programs sense, 88, 130, 147
See HP BASIC/WS Example Programs source, 88
Binary Checking for Errors, 66 - 67, 214
data format, 58 CLEAR Command, 19, 113, 122
transfers to computer, 271 Clearing the Multimeter, 19
Bits error queue, 19 - 20, 178
device dependent error, 67, 81 *CLS, 178, 186
message available, 68 Codes for Self-test, 17
status, 207 COM Lead, connecting, 32
Block Length, 80 Command Module
Boolean Parameters, 119 A16 address space, 199 - 201
Burst Measurements, making, 43 - 46 default IRQ line, 24
memory, 114
C Command Reference, 117 - 121
SCPI commands, 121
C Language Example Programs Command Register, 204
high-speed scanning, 253 - 261 Commands
reading error codes, 232 - 233 ABORt, 112, 122
reading the device type register, 225 alphabetical listing, 117 - 121
reading the query response register, 228 - 229 CALibration, 123 - 124
resetting the multimeter, 222 CLEAR, 19, 113, 122
scanning multimeter measurements, 253 - 261 common (*) command format, 117
stand-alone multimeter measurements, 239 - 245 CONFigure, 42, 76 - 79, 126 - 130, 132 - 133
Cables CONFigure?, 134
analog bus, 30 - 31, 37 - 38 DIAGnostic, 135
digital bus, 30 - 31, 37 - 38 DISPlay, 136 - 138
for B-size multiplexers, 38 FETCh?, 83, 139, 277
list of connecting, 37 - 38 FORMat, 140
shielded, 32 FORMat?, 141

280 HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INITiate, 142 saving, 14, 114 - 115
linking, 119 setting with CONFigure, 78
MEASure, 42, 76 - 78, 82, 143 - 149 using MEASure and CONFigure, 77
MEMory, 150 - 152 CONFigure
opcodes, 262 - 263 commands, 126 - 130, 132 - 133
OUTPut, 153 - 154 making measurements with, 78 - 79
parsing time, 274 parameters, 91
quick reference, 187 - 188 subsystem, 126 - 130, 132 - 133
READ?, 82, 155, 278 used in example programs, 42
SAMPle, 157 - 160 used in place of MEASure, 42
SCPI format, 117 CONFigure and MEASure
[SENSe:], 161 - 176 commands, 76 - 77
SYSTem, 177 - 178 equivalent commands, 77
TRIGger, 179 - 184 used as a single command, 14
types, 117 used in example programs, 42
Comment sheet, reader, 11 CONFigure:FRESistance, 127
Common (*) Commands CONFigure:RESistance, 128 - 129
*CLS, 178, 186 CONFigure:TEMPerature, 129
*DMC, 186 CONFigure:VOLTage:AC, 130
*EMC, 186 CONFigure:VOLTage[:DC], 132 - 133
*EMC?, 186 CONFigure? Command, 134
*ESE, 186 Configuring the Multimeter, 14, 21 - 40, 211 - 212
*ESE?, 186 Conformity, declaration, 9 - 10
*ESR?, 186 Connecting
format, 117 analog bus cables, 30
*GMC?, 186 analog bus to multimeter, 31
*IDN?, 186 COM lead, 32
linking with SCPI, 119 digital bus cables, 30
*LMC?, 186 for 4-wire measurements, 35
*OPC, 186 for measurements, 33 - 35
*OPC?, 186 HP E1326B Adapter, 25
*PMC, 186 input signals, 32
*RCL, 114, 186 multiplexers to multimeter, 30 - 31, 33 - 38
reference, 186 thermocouples, 36
*RMC, 186 Control Register, 203
*RST, 17, 186 sampling, 219
*SAV, 114, 186 Converting Readings, 209
*SRE, 186
*SRE?, 186 D
*STB?, 186
*TRG, 103, 122, 186 Data
*TST?, 16, 186 buffer register, 208
*WAI, 186 retrieving from memory, 83 - 84
Common Mode Rejection storing in memory, 82 - 83
effective, 97 Data Format, 80
ratio, 97 ASCII, 80, 140, 271
Computer binary, 58
binary transfers to, 271 changing, 58 - 59
reading destinations, 81 default format, 80, 271
resetting from, 17 definite length arbitrary block, 58, 80
synchronizing multimeter with, 68 external VME, 150
Configurations length, 140
recalling, 114 - 115 query, 141

HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual Index 281

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 REAL-32, 80, 140, 271 Effective Common Mode, 97
REAL-64, 58, 80, 140, 271 Electrical Description, 14
selecting, 80 Embedded Controller
specifying, 80, 140 base address, 201
vs. reading destination, 81 *EMC, 186
DC Voltage Measurements, 42 *EMC?, 186
accuracy conditions, 190 Enabling
changing to 4-wire measurement, 91 autorange, 167, 174
CONFigure:VOLTage[:DC], 132 - 133 autozero, 99, 124, 274
connecting for, 33 offset compensation, 101, 165
description, 86 trigger delay, 182
MEASure:VOLTage[:DC]?, 148 - 149 VME memory card, 152
percent overrange, 92, 120 Error
range, 92, 120, 172 checking for, 66 - 67, 214
resolution, 92, 120, 175 codes, 264
specifications, 190 codes, list of, 264
specifying, 86 codes, reading, 230 - 233
using autozero, 99 messages, 197 - 198
VOLTage[:DC]:RANGe, 172 queue, 19 - 20, 178
Declaration of Conformity, 9 - 10 *ESE, 186
Default Data Format, 271 *ESE?, 186
Definite Length Arbitrary Block, 58, 80 *ESR?, 186
Description, 13 Example Programs
Device Dependent Error Bit, 67 aborting a measurement, 113
setting in overload, 81 burst measurements, 43 - 46
Device Type Register, 206, 224 - 225 changing measurement functions, 91
DIAGnostic Subsystem, 135 changing the data format, 58 - 59
DIAGnostic:FETS, 135 channel list scanning, 46 - 49
DIAGnostic:FETS?, 135 checking for errors, 66 - 67
Digital Bus data format, selecting, 80
cables, 30 - 31, 37 - 38 entering data into computer, 82
closing channels, 135 externally triggered burst of measurements, 44
connecting, 30 externally triggered scan, 49
FET multiplexer control, 135 maximizing measurement accuracy, 63
overview, 31 maximizing measurement speed, 56 - 57
port, 15 measurements using single trigger, 112
Disabling multimeter self-test, 16
autozero, 124, 275 multiple burst measurements, 45
front-panel mainframe keyboard, 39 multiple high-speed scans, 54 - 55
offset compensation, 165 multiple paced scans, 48
trigger delay, 182 multiple scans, 47
VME memory card, 152 read/clear error queue, 19
Discrete Parameters, 119 reading an error code, 230 - 233
DISPlay Subsystem, 136 - 138 reading the device type register, 224 - 225
DISPlay:MONitor:CHANnel, 136 reading the ID register, 223
DISPlay:MONitor:CHANnel?, 137 reading the query response register, 226 - 229
DISPlay:MONitor[:STATe], 137 register-based programming, 220 - 261
DISPlay:MONitor[:STATe]?, 138 resetting the multimeter, 221 - 222
*DMC, 186 retrieving data from memory, 84
Documentation History, 8 saving/recalling configurations, 115
scanning a channel list, 46 - 49
E scanning B-size switchbox channels, 50 - 51
scanning C-size switchbox channels, 52 - 53

282 HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 scanning multimeter measurements, 20, 246 - 261 measurement, 14, 162
setting aperture time and sample period, 110 specifying, 90
setting sample count, 108 Functional Description, 14
setting trigger count, 105
setting trigger delay, 107 G
single measurements, 42
speed differences, 271 Getting Started, 13 - 20
stand-alone multimeter measurements, 20, 234 - 245 *GMC?, 186
storing readings in mainframe memory, 83 Group Execute Trigger (GET), 103, 122
storing readings in shared memory, 64 - 65
synchronizing multimeter with a computer, 68 H
using a PC, C language, and HP-IB card, 60 - 62
using E1345A configured as a switchbox, 71 - 73 High-speed Scanning, 269 - 278
External Trigger example program, 253
burst of measurements, 44 multiple scans, 54 - 55
port, 15, 103 How To Make Measurements, 78
scan, making, 49 HP BASIC/WS Example Programs
External VME Memory Board, 150 - 152 reading error codes, 230 - 231
reading the device type register, 224
F reading the ID register, 223
reading the query response register, 226 - 227
Failed Annunciator (E1411B only), 16 resetting the multimeter, 221
FET Multiplexer Control, 135 scanning multimeter measurements, 246 - 252
FETCh? Command, 83, 139, 277 speed differences, 271
FORMat Subsystem, 140 stand-alone multimeter measurements, 234 - 238
FORMat[:DATA], 140 HP E1326B
FORMat? Command, 141 connecting the adapter, 25
Four-byte Readings, 208 - 209 input terminals, 29
Four-wire installing in the mainframe, 25
resistance measurements, 35, 127, 144, 192 - 193 scanning switchbox channels with, 50 - 51
resistance measurements, channel pairs, 88 SCPI driver, 269
resistance measurements, CONFigure:FRESistance, stand-alone instrument, 39
127 HP E1344A
resistance measurements, description, 88 reference thermistor, 89
resistance measurements, MEASure:FRESistance?, terminal module connections, 36
144 thermocouple measurements, 130, 146
resistance measurements, range, 166 thermocouple types, 89
resistance measurements, resolution, 168 HP E1345A
resistance measurements, scanning multimeter, 87 configured as switchbox, 71 - 73
resistance measurements, stand-alone multimeter, 87 terminal module connections, 33 - 35
resistance measurements, table listing, 92, 120 HP E1346A
resistance measurements, using offset compensation, terminal module connections, 33 - 34
100, 165 HP E1347A
RTD measurements, 35, 90 reference thermistor, 89
temperature measurements, 129 - 130, 146 - 147 terminal module connections, 33 - 36
thermistor measurements, 35, 89 thermocouple measurements, 130, 146
vs. two-wire measurements, 87 thermocouple types, 89
Front Panel HP E1351A
keyboard disabling, 39 high-speed scanning, 253
resetting from, 17 terminal module connections, 33 - 35
Function HP E1352A
change times, 266 terminal module connections, 33 - 34
changing, 270 HP E1353A

HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual Index 283

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 reference thermistor, 89 RESistance:NPLC, 98, 164, 173
terminal module connections, 33 - 36 saved in memory, 114
thermocouple measurements, 130, 146 setting, 98, 163 - 164, 171, 173
thermocouple types, 89 table listing, 92, 120
HP E1403B Adapter, 37 VOLTage:NPLC, 98, 173
cables, 38 Interface Card, HP-IB, 60 - 62
HP E1411B Internal Installation, HP E1326B, 25
high-speed scanning, 253 Interrupt
input terminals, 29 lines, 24
installing in mainframe, 26 priority, 24
scanning switchbox channels with, 52 - 53 VME, list of, 267
TTLTrg line, 153 Introduction to Operation, 16
HP E1460A IRQ Jumper Setting, 24
making measurements, 246
scanning switchbox channels with, 52 - 53 J
terminal module connections, 33 - 35
HP E1476A Jumper, IRQ, 24
reference thermistor, 89
terminal module connections, 36 L
thermocouple measurements, 130, 146
thermocouple types, 89 LADDR, 22 - 23, 200 - 201
HP-IB Language Used In Programming, 41
CLEAR command, 113, 122 Line Reference Frequency, 123
group execute trigger (GET), 103, 122 Linking Commands, 119
interface card, 60 - 62 *LMC?, 186
secondary address, 22 Logical Address
factory setting, 22 - 23, 200 - 201
I register-based, 200 - 201
setting, 22 - 23, 200 - 201
ID Register, 205, 223
*IDN?, 186 M
IEEE 488.2 Commands
See Common (*) Commands Macros, 274
Implied SCPI Commands, 118 Mainframe
Increasing A16 address space, 199 - 201
measurement speed, 269 - 278 disabling keyboard, 39
reading rates, 82 E1411B installation, 26
throughput speed, 58 HP E1326B internal installation, 25
Induced Voltage, 100 installing the E1326B adapter, 25
INITiate Subsystem, 142 memory, 82, 114
INITiate:FETCH?, 277 reading destinations, 81 - 82
INITiate[:IMMediate], 111, 142 retrieving data from memory, 83 - 84
Input Making
characteristics, 28, 189 a measurement, 78
signals, connecting, 32 externally triggered scan, 49
terminals, 15, 29 measurements, 20
Installation Overview, 21 measurements using CONFigure, 78 - 79
Instrument, definition of, 13 measurements using MEASure, 78, 82
Integration Time (PLC) measurements using READ?, 82
See also Aperture Time multiple paced scans, 48
description, 97 multiple scans, 47 - 48
parameters, 91, 97 Maximizing
querying, 98, 165, 174 measurement accuracy, 63

284 HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 measurement speed, 56 - 57 speed tradeoffs, 269 - 278
MEASure temperature, 88, 129, 146, 276
commands, 143 - 149 thermistor, 88, 276
making measurements with, 78, 82 thermistor resistance, 35, 89
parameters, 91 thermocouple, 89, 276
subsystem, 143 - 149 two-wire resistance, 34, 88, 128 - 129, 145 - 146
used as a single command, 20 two-wire vs. four-wire, 87
used in example programs, 42 using CONFigure commands, 78 - 79
MEASure and CONFigure using MEASure commands, 78, 82
commands, 76 - 77 using READ? commands, 82
equivalent commands, 77 using single trigger, 112
used as a single command, 14 Memory
used in example programs, 42 amount used for readings, 14
MEASure:FRESistance?, 144 command module, 114
MEASure:RESistance?, 145 - 146 mainframe, 82, 114
MEASure:TEMPerature?, 146 parameters stored, 114
MEASure:VOLTage:AC?, 147 reading capacity, 83
MEASure:VOLTage[:DC]?, 148 - 149 retrieving data from, 83 - 84
Measurement Function saving configurations in, 14
of multimeter, 14, 86 shared, 64 - 65, 84, 150
other than DC voltage, 42 storing readings in, 64 - 65, 83
querying, 162 subsystem, 150 - 152
saved in memory, 114 VME memory card, 150 - 152
selecting, 162 MEMory:VME:ADDRess, 150
Measurements MEMory:VME:ADDRess?, 150
AC voltage, 33, 86, 130, 147, 169 MEMory:VME:SIZE, 151
burst, 43 - 46 MEMory:VME:SIZE?, 151
connections, 33 - 36 MEMory:VME:STATe, 152
DC voltage, 20, 33, 86, 132 - 133, 148 - 149, 172 MEMory:VME:STATe?, 152
externally triggered burst, 44 Message Available Bit
externally triggered scan, 49 setting, 68
four-wire resistance, 35, 88, 127, 144 Multimeter
full bridge strain, 86 analog bus connections, 31
half bridge strain, 86 command reference, 117 - 121
how to make, 78 configuring, 14, 21 - 40, 211 - 212
in output buffer, 139 description, 13
making, 20 error messages, 197 - 198
maximizing accuracy, 63 installation overview, 21
maximizing speed, 56 - 57 logical address, 22 - 23, 200 - 201
multiple burst, 45 maximum voltage allowed, 29
multiple high-speed scans, 54 - 55 measurement functions, 14, 86
multiple paced scans, 48 overview, 13
multiple scans, 47 - 48 parameters, 91
overload indications, 81 power-on settings, 18, 265
quarter bridge strain, 86 resetting, 17, 210, 221 - 222
resistance, 34 - 35, 87 - 88 self-test, 16
retrieving, 213 specifications, 189 - 196
RMS AC voltage, 86, 130, 147 synchronizing with a computer, 68
RTD resistance, 35, 89 - 90, 276 triggering, 14, 101 - 113, 179 - 184, 217 - 219
scanning a channel list, 46 - 49 understanding the, 75 - 116
scanning B-size switchbox channels, 50 - 51 using with a multiplexer, 29 - 38, 216
scanning C-size switchbox channels, 52 - 53 wait-for-trigger state, 142
single, 42 Multiple

HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual Index 285

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 burst measurements, 45 OUTPut:TTLTrgn[:STATe], 153
high-speed scans, 54 - 55 OUTPut:TTLTrgn[:STATe]?, 154
scans, making, 47 - 48 Overload Indications, 81
Multiplexer Overrange, 92, 120
AC voltage measurement, 130, 147 Overview
connected to multimeter, 14, 29 - 31, 33 - 35 digital bus, 31
DC voltage measurement, 132 - 133, 148 - 149 installation, 21
FET control, 135 multimeter, 13
four-wire resistance measurement, 127, 144
monitor single channel, 136 - 137 P
temperature measurements, 130, 146
two-wire resistance measurement, 128, 145 - 146 Pacing
using with multimeter, 29 - 38, 216 multiple paced scans, 48
voltage ratings, 29 source, 158 - 159
Parameter Register, 204
N Parameters
aperture time, 91, 97
Noise Rejection Conditions, 189 autorange, 94
Non-Zero Digit, 80 autozero, 91, 99, 124
Normal Mode Rejection (NMR), 27 boolean, 119
increasing, 97 discrete, 119
ratio, 97 integration time, 91, 97
Numeric Parameters, 119 numeric, 119
offset compensation, 91, 100 - 101
O opcodes, 262 - 263
optional SCPI, 119
Offset querying, 215
register, 202 range, 91, 93
voltage, 100 resolution, 91, 95 - 96
Offset Compensation saved in memory, 114
2-wire resistance measurements, 100 SCPI commands, 119
4-wire resistance measurements, 100 trigger count, 104
autozero override, 100 trigger delay, 106
description, 100 - 101 trigger source, 103
disabling, 165 Percent Overrange, 92, 120
enabling, 101, 165 Physical Description, 15
four-wire resistance measurements, 165 *PMC, 186
parameters, 91, 100 - 101 Ports
querying, 101, 165 analog bus, 15
RESistance:OCOMpensated, 101, 165 digital bus, 15
saved in memory, 114 external trigger, 103
two-wire resistance measurements, 165 external trigger, 15
Ohms Ranges, 92, 120 Power Line
*OPC, 186 cycles (PLC), integration time, 164, 173
*OPC?, 186 cycles (PLCs), 27, 97
Opcodes, 262 - 263 frequency, 27
Operating Characteristics, 15 noise, 27
Operation, introduction to, 16 Power-on
Optional SCPI Command Parameters, 119 configuration, 17
Output Buffer settings, 18, 265
capacity, 139, 155 Programming
measurement storage, 139 language, 41
OUTPut Subsystem, 153 - 154

286 HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 register-based, 199 - 268 RESistance:RANGe, 93, 166
timing and execution, 210 saved in memory, 114
setting, 93, 166
Q two-wire resistance, 166
VOLTage:AC:RANGe, 93
Query Response Register, 207, 226 - 229 VOLTage:RANGe, 93
reading an error code, 230 - 233 *RCL, 114, 186
Querying READ Registers, 205 - 208
AC voltage range, 170 data buffer, 208
aperture time, 98, 164, 171 device type, 206, 224 - 225
autorange mode, 168, 175 ID, 205, 223
autorange setting, 95 query response, 207, 226 - 233
autozero, 124 status, 206
autozero mode, 99 READ? Command, 82, 155, 278
data format, 141 entering data with, 82
DC voltage range, 173 Reader comment sheet, 11
FET multiplexer mode, 135 Reading
integration time, 98, 165, 174 card description, 177
line reference frequency, 123 card type, 178
measurement function, 162 destinations, 80 - 85
monitor mode channel, 137 device type register, 224 - 225
monitor mode state, 138 error codes, 230 - 233
multimeter parameters, 215 error queue, 19 - 20, 178
multiplexer configuration, 134 four-byte, 209
offset compensation, 165 ID register, 223
offset compensation mode, 101 number per trigger, 157
pacing source, 159 placed in RAM, 139
range, 94, 167 query response register, 226 - 229
reference frequency, 27 rate, conditions, 189
resolution, 96, 169 rates, 159
sample count, 108, 158 rates, increasing, 82
sample period, 110, 160 registers, 200
sample source, 110 storage, 14, 83, 150
trigger count, 105, 180 two-byte, 209
trigger delay, 107, 181 - 182 REAL 32 Data Format, 80, 140, 271
trigger source, 103, 185 REAL 64 Data Format, 80, 140, 271
VME memory address, 150 - 151 changing to, 58
VME memory size, 151 Recalling Multimeter Configurations, 114 - 115
VME memory state, 152 Reference Frequency
voltage resolution, 176 description, 27
Quick Reference SCPI Commands, 187 - 188 querying, 27
setting, 27
R Register-based Programming, 199 - 268
aperture change times, 266
Range base address, 200 - 201
AC voltage, 92, 120, 169 checking for errors, 214
changing, 166 command opcodes, 262 - 263
DC voltage, 92, 120, 172 command register, 204
default, 94 configuring the multimeter, 211 - 212
description, 93 control register, 203, 219
four-wire resistance, 166 data buffer register, 208
parameters, 91, 93 description, 199
querying, 94, 167, 170, 173 device type register, 206, 224 - 225

HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual Index 287

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 error codes, 264 current source values, 87
examples, 220 - 261 four-wire, 35, 88, 127, 144, 166, 168
function change times, 266 offset compensated ohms, 165
ID register, 205, 223 output from multimeter, 100
parameter register, 204 range, 166
parameters opcodes, 262 - 263 resolution, 168
power-on settings, 265 two-wire, 34, 88, 128 - 129, 145 - 146, 166, 168
program timing and execution, 210 two-wire vs. four-wire, 87
query response register, 207, 226 - 233 Resolution
querying parameters, 215 AC voltage, 175
READ registers, 205 - 208 changing, 169
reading an error code, 230 - 233 DC voltage, 175
reading the device type register, 224 - 225 description, 95 - 96
reading the ID register, 223 four-wire resistance, 168
reading the query response register, 226 - 229 parameters, 91, 95 - 96
register addressing, 199, 201 - 202 querying, 96, 169, 176
register descriptions, 203 RESistance:RESolution, 96, 168
register offset, 202 saved in memory, 114
register triggering, 217 - 219 setting, 95 - 96, 168, 276
resetting the multimeter, 210, 221 - 222 table listing, 92, 120
retrieving measurements, 213 two-wire resistance, 168
status register, 206 VOLTage:RESolution, 96, 175
useful tables, 262 Retrieving
using multiplexers, 216 data from memory, 83 - 84
VME interrupts, 267 measurements, 213
WRITE registers, 203 - 204 *RMC, 186
Registers RMS AC Voltage Measurements, 86
accessing, 202 AC-coupled, 86, 130, 147
addressing, 199, 201 - 202 CONFigure:VOLTage:AC, 130
base address, 200 - 201 MEASure:VOLTage:AC?, 147
command register, 204 *RST, 17, 186
control register, 203, 219 RTD Measurements
data buffer register, 208 CONFigure:TEMPerature RTD, 129
descriptions, 203 description, 276
device type register, 206, 224 - 225 four-wire resistance, 35, 90
ID register, 205, 223 MEASure:TEMPerature? RTD, 146
offset, 202 two-wire resistance, 89
parameter register, 204
query response register, 207, 226 - 233 S
READ, 205 - 208
reading registers, 200 Safety Warnings, 8, 21
standard event status, 66 Sample
status register, 206 count, 108, 157 - 158
triggering, 217 - 219 period, 109 - 110, 159 - 160
WRITE, 203 - 204 source, 110, 158 - 159
writing to registers, 200 SAMPle Subsystem, 157 - 160
Resetting SAMPle:COUNt, 108, 157
computer, 17 SAMPle:COUNt?, 158
from E1301A front panel, 17 SAMPle:SOURce, 109 - 110, 158
multimeter, 17, 210, 221 - 222 SAMPle:SOURce?, 159
Resistance Measurements, 87 SAMPle:TIMer, 109 - 110, 159
autorange function, 167 SAMPle:TIMer?, 160
converting to, 209 *SAV, 114, 186

288 HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Saving Multimeter Configurations, 114 SCPI Driver, description of, 13
*SAV, 114 Secondary HP-IB Address, 22
example program, 115 Selecting
how to, 114 data format, 80
in memory, 14 measurement function, 162
Scanning reading destinations, 81 - 85
B-size switchbox channels, 50 - 51 VME RAM, 39
C-size switchbox channels, 52 - 53 Self-test
channel list, 46 - 49 codes, 17
high-speed example program, 253 example program, 16
multiple high-speed scans, 54 - 55 multimeter, 16
Scanning Multimeter Sense
2-wire measurements, 87 channels, 88, 130, 147
4-wire measurements, 87 terminals, 87
additional functions, 69 [SENSe:] Subsystem, 161 - 176
command parameter, 42 [SENSe:]FUNCtion, 162
definition of, 75 [SENSe:]FUNCtion:FRESistance, 162
forming, 14, 23 [SENSe:]FUNCtion:VOLTage:AC, 162
logical address, 23 [SENSe:]FUNCtion:VOLTage[:DC], 162
making a measurement, 20 [SENSe:]FUNCtion?, 162
measurements example program, 246 - 261 [SENSe:]RESistance:APERture, 163
sample count, 108 [SENSe:]RESistance:APERture?, 164
trigger count, 104 - 105, 180 [SENSe:]RESistance:NPLC, 164
trigger delay, 106, 182 [SENSe:]RESistance:NPLC?, 165
two-wire temperature measurements, 129, 146 [SENSe:]RESistance:OCOMpensated, 165
SCPI Commands [SENSe:]RESistance:OCOMpensated?, 165
abbreviated, 118 [SENSe:]RESistance:RANGe, 166, 275
ABORt, 122 [SENSe:]RESistance:RANGe:AUTO, 167, 275
CALibration subsystem, 123 - 124 [SENSe:]RESistance:RANGe:AUTO?, 168, 275
CONFigure subsystem, 126 - 130, 132 - 133 [SENSe:]RESistance:RANGe?, 167
CONFigure? subsystem, 134 [SENSe:]RESistance:RESolution, 168
DIAGnostic subsystem, 135 [SENSe:]RESistance:RESolution?, 169
DISPlay subsystem, 136 - 138 [SENSe:]VOLTage:AC:RANGe, 169, 275
FETCh? subsystem, 139, 277 [SENSe:]VOLTage:AC:RANGe?, 170
format, 117 [SENSe:]VOLTage:APERture, 171
FORMat subsystem, 140 [SENSe:]VOLTage:APERture?, 171
FORMat? subsystem, 141 [SENSe:]VOLTage[:DC]:RANGe, 172
implied, 118 [SENSe:]VOLTage[:DC]:RANGe?, 173
INITiate subsystem, 142 [SENSe:]VOLTage:NPLC, 173
linking with common (*) commands, 119 [SENSe:]VOLTage:NPLC?, 174
MEASure subsystem, 143 - 149 [SENSe:]VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO, 174, 275
MEMory subsystem, 150 - 152 [SENSe:]VOLTage:RANGe:AUTO?, 175, 275
OUTPut subsystem, 153 - 154 [SENSe:]VOLTage:RESolution, 175
parameters, 119 [SENSe:]VOLTage:RESolution?, 176
quick reference, 187 - 188 Setting
READ?, 155, 278 AC voltage range, 169
reference, 121 AC voltage resolution, 175
SAMPle subsystem, 157 - 160 aperture time, 98, 110, 163, 171
[SENSe:] subsystem, 161 - 176 autorange, 94
separator, 117 autozero, 99, 124
SYSTem subsystem, 177 - 178 data format, 140
TRIGger subsystem, 179 - 184 DC voltage range, 172
upper case vs. lower case, 118 DC voltage resolution, 175

HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual Index 289

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 integration time, 98, 163 - 164, 171, 173 Standard Event Status Register
IRQ jumper, 24 device dependent error bit, 67, 81
line reference frequency, 123 monitor for errors, 66
logical address switch, 22 - 23 Status
pacing source, 158 bit precedence, 207
range, 93, 166 register, 206
readings per trigger, 157 *STB?, 186
reference frequency, 27 Storing Readings
resolution, 95 - 96, 168, 276 in mainframe memory, 83
sample count, 108 in memory, 83
sample period, 109 - 110 in shared memory, 64 - 65
trigger count, 104 - 105, 179 - 180 on VME memory card, 64 - 65, 150
trigger delay, 106 - 107, 181 - 182 Switchbox
trigger source, 103 HP E1345A configured as, 71 - 73
VME memory address, 150 Switches, logical address, 22 - 23
VME memory size, 151 Synchronizing Multimeter with a Computer, 68
wait-for-trigger state, 111 SYSTem Subsystem, 177 - 178
Shared Memory SYSTem:CDEScription?, 177
reading destinations, 84 SYSTem:CTYPe?, 177
Shielded Cables, 32 SYSTem:ERRor?, 19, 178
Shielded Twisted-pair Cables, 32
Shock Hazard, 21 T
Single
measurements, 42 Temperature Measurements
trigger, 112 CONFigure:TEMPerature, 129
Source description, 88, 276
channels, 88 MEASure:TEMPerature?, 146
terminals, 87 overload indications, 81
Specifications, 189 - 196 RTD resistance, 35, 89 - 90, 129, 146
Specifying specifying, 88
data format, 80 thermistor, 88, 129, 146
function, 90 thermocouple, 89, 129 - 130, 146 - 147
Speed Terminal Module Connections, 33 - 36
increasing, 269 - 278 Terminals
increasing throughput, 58 input, 15, 29
maximizing, 56 - 57 sense, 87
multiple high-speed scans, 54 - 55 source, 87
*SRE, 186 Thermistor Measurements, 88
*SRE?, 186 CONFigure:TEMPerature THER, 129
Stand-alone Multimeter description, 276
4-wire measurements, 87 four-wire resistance, 35, 89
additional functions, 69 MEASure:TEMPerature? THER, 146
command parameter, 42 two-wire, 88
configurations saved in memory, 114 Thermocouple Measurements, 89
definition of, 75 CONFigure:TEMPerature TCouple, 129 - 130
making a measurement, 20 connections for, 36
measurements example program, 234 - 245 description, 276
sample count, 108 MEASure:TEMPerature? TCouple, 146 - 147
scanning switchbox channels, 50, 52 multiplexers needed, 89
trigger count, 104 - 105, 180 *TRG, 103, 122, 186
trigger delay, 106, 182 Trigger
Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments count, 104 - 105, 179 - 180
See SCPI Commands count loop, 101

290 HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 delay, 106 - 107, 181 - 182 multimeter power-on settings, 265
group execute (GET), 103, 122 register error codes, 264
immediately, 183 VME interrupts, 267
lines (TTL), 153 - 154 Using
model, 218 a PC, C language, and HP-IB card, 60 - 62
readings per, 157 CONFigure commands, 76 - 79
registers, 217 - 219 HP E1345A configured as a switchbox, 71 - 73
sample count loop, 101 macros, 274
source, 103, 183 - 184 MEASure commands, 76 - 78, 82
system, 217 READ? commands, 82
TRIGger Subsystem, 179 - 184 single trigger signal, 112
TRIGger:COUNt, 104 - 105, 179 the multimeter, 41 - 74
TRIGger:COUNt?, 180
TRIGger:DELay, 106 - 107, 181 V
TRIGger:DELay:AUTO, 106, 182
TRIGger:DELay:AUTO?, 182 VME Interrupts, 267
TRIGger:DELay?, 181 VME Memory Card
TRIGger[:IMMediate], 183 enabling/disabling, 152
TRIGger:SOURce, 103, 183 - 184 query address, 150
BUS, 103, 113, 183 - 184 querying memory size, 151
EXTernal, 103, 183 querying state, 152
HOLD, 103, 113, 183 - 184 setting size (bytes), 151
IMMediate, 103, 183 - 184 storing readings, 64 - 65, 84, 150
TTLTrg, 103, 183 VME RAM, selecting, 39
TRIGger:SOURce?, 103, 184 Voltage
Triggering the Multimeter, 14, 101 - 113, 179 - 184 aperture time, 171
*TST?, 16, 186 autorange function, 174
TTL Trigger Lines, 153 - 154 converting to, 209
Two-byte Readings, 208 - 209 induced, 100
Two-wire maximum allowed, 21, 29
resistance measurements, 34, 128 - 129, 145 - 146 measure AC, 33, 130, 147, 169
resistance measurements, CONFigure:RESistance, measure DC, 20, 33, 42, 132 - 133, 148 - 149, 172
128 - 129 offset, 100
resistance measurements, description, 88 ranges, 92, 120
resistance measurements, MEASure:RESistance?, 145 resolution, 175
- 146 VXIbus
resistance measurements, range, 166 interrupt lines, 24
resistance measurements, resolution, 168 TTL trigger lines, 153 - 154
resistance measurements, scanning multimeter, 87
resistance measurements, table listing, 92, 120 W
resistance measurements, using offset compensation,
100, 165 *WAI, 186
RTD measurements, 89 Wait-for-Trigger State, 111
temperature measurements, 129, 146 command used, 142
thermistor measurements, 88 WARNINGS, 8
vs. four-wire measurements, 87 Warranty, 7
Wiring Considerations, 32
U WRITE Registers, 203 - 204
command, 204
Understanding the Multimeter, 75 - 116 control, 203, 219
Useful Tables, 262 parameter, 204
command and parameter opcodes, 262 - 263 Writing to Registers, 200
function and aperture change times, 266

HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual Index 291

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Notes

292 HP E1326B/E1411B 5 1/2 Digit Multimeter User’s Manual Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine